Copyright

This document is Copyright © 2024 by the LibreOffice Documentation Team. Contributors are
listed below. This document may be distributed and/or modified under the terms of either the
GNU General Public License ([Link] version 3 or later, or the
Creative Commons Attribution License ([Link] version
4.0 or later. All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.

Contributors
For this edition:
Peter Schofield
For previous editions:
Claire Wood Jean Hollis Weber Olivier Hallot T. Elliot Turner
Dimona Delvere Kees Kriek Peter Hillier-Brook Vasudev Narayanan
Felipe Viggiano Linda Worthington Peter Schofield
Gary Schnabl Low Song Chuan Rachel Kartch
Hazel Russman Michele Zarri Samantha Hamilton

Feedback
Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to the Documentation Team
Forum at [Link] (registration is
required) or send an email to: loguides@[Link].

Note
Everything sent to a forum, including email addresses and any other information, is
publicly archived and cannot be deleted. Emails sent to the forum are moderated.

Publication date and software version

Published November 2024. Based on LibreOffice 24.8 Community.
Other versions of LibreOffice may differ in appearance and functionality.

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at [Link]

Contents
Copyright.....................................................................................................................................2
Preface.............................................................................................................................. 7
Who is this user guide for?.........................................................................................................8
What is in this user guide?.......................................................................................................... 8
What is LibreOffice?....................................................................................................................8
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice..............................................................................8
How to get LibreOffice................................................................................................................8
Installing LibreOffice...................................................................................................................9
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice...................................................................................... 9
Extensions and add-ons.............................................................................................................9
Where to get more help..............................................................................................................9
What you see may be different................................................................................................. 12
Using LibreOffice on macOS....................................................................................................13
Who wrote this user guide?......................................................................................................14
Frequently asked questions......................................................................................................14
What is new in LibreOffice 24.8?.............................................................................................. 15
Chapter 1, Introducing Draw......................................................................................... 17
Introduction............................................................................................................................... 18
Main window............................................................................................................................. 18
Choosing and defining colors....................................................................................................27
Grid, snap guides, and helplines...............................................................................................28
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes................................................................................29
Introduction............................................................................................................................... 30
Drawing basic shapes............................................................................................................... 30
Gluepoints and connectors....................................................................................................... 41
Drawing geometric shapes.......................................................................................................42
Adding, inserting and formatting text........................................................................................45
Chapter 3, Working with Objects..................................................................................47
Introduction............................................................................................................................... 48
Selecting objects....................................................................................................................... 48
Positioning and adjusting objects..............................................................................................49
Using grid and snap functions...................................................................................................60
Using Helplines......................................................................................................................... 66
Changing object shape............................................................................................................. 67
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes........................................................................79
Formatting lines........................................................................................................................ 80
Area fills.................................................................................................................................... 89
Working with area fills...............................................................................................................92
Working with shadows............................................................................................................ 107
Working with transparencies................................................................................................... 109
Drawing styles......................................................................................................................... 111
Special effects......................................................................................................................... 115
Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects.....................................................................123
Grouping objects..................................................................................................................... 124
Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting...................................................................... 128
Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects.......................................................................... 129
Duplication and cross-fading...................................................................................................131
Positioning objects.................................................................................................................. 134
Chapter 6, Editing Images........................................................................................... 139

Draw Guide 24.8 | 3

 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 140
Importing graphics and images............................................................................................... 140
Exporting images.................................................................................................................... 144
Formatting images.................................................................................................................. 146
Cropping images..................................................................................................................... 149
Image filters............................................................................................................................ 153
Replacing colors..................................................................................................................... 161
Conversion.............................................................................................................................. 164
Chapter 7, 3D Objects..................................................................................................169
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 170
3D object types....................................................................................................................... 170
Creating 3D objects................................................................................................................ 171
Editing 3D objects................................................................................................................... 175
Combining objects.................................................................................................................. 187
Assembling 3D objects...........................................................................................................188
Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts..............................191
Connectors and gluepoints..................................................................................................... 192
Flowcharts...............................................................................................................................202
Organization charts................................................................................................................. 203
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.....................................................................205
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 206
Text mode............................................................................................................................... 206
Text boxes............................................................................................................................... 207
Text in objects......................................................................................................................... 215
Formatting text........................................................................................................................ 217
Unordered or ordered lists...................................................................................................... 222
Text columns........................................................................................................................... 225
Text animation......................................................................................................................... 228
Text callouts............................................................................................................................ 229
Tables in Draw........................................................................................................................ 232
Using fields............................................................................................................................. 243
Using hyperlinks......................................................................................................................244
Image maps............................................................................................................................ 249
Fontwork................................................................................................................................. 252
Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing...........................................................255
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 256
Default printer setup................................................................................................................256
Quick printing.......................................................................................................................... 257
Linux or Windows printing....................................................................................................... 257
macOS printing....................................................................................................................... 260
Printing examples................................................................................................................... 267
Exporting................................................................................................................................. 271
Emailing documents................................................................................................................273
Digital signatures.................................................................................................................... 273
Removing personal data......................................................................................................... 273
Redaction................................................................................................................................ 276
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques...................................................................279
Drawing pages........................................................................................................................ 280
Master pages.......................................................................................................................... 283
Templates................................................................................................................................288
Multiple layers......................................................................................................................... 297
Dimensioning.......................................................................................................................... 301

4 | Draw Guide 24.8

 Drawing to scale..................................................................................................................... 305
Multiple views of a drawing.....................................................................................................306
Gallery.....................................................................................................................................307
Colors......................................................................................................................................310
Bézier curves.......................................................................................................................... 319
Adding comments................................................................................................................... 323
Coordinate system.................................................................................................................. 324
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants............................................................................ 325
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 326
Selecting user interface variants............................................................................................. 326
Standard Toolbar.....................................................................................................................327
Tabbed.................................................................................................................................... 327
Single Toolbar & Sidebar........................................................................................................335
Tabbed Compact..................................................................................................................... 336
Groupedbar Compact............................................................................................................. 337
Contextual Single.................................................................................................................... 337
Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................... 339
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 340
macOS keyboard shortcuts.....................................................................................................340
Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts.............................................................................341
Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts............................................................................ 344
General function key and keyboard shortcuts........................................................................349
Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts.........................................................................350
Appendix B, Toolbars..................................................................................................355
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 356
Using toolbars......................................................................................................................... 356
Toolbars.................................................................................................................................. 359
Subtoolbars............................................................................................................................. 372

Draw Guide 24.8 | 5

 Draw Guide 24.8

Preface
Drawing vector graphics in LibreOffice
Who is this user guide for?
This user guide is for users who want to acquire knowledge on LibreOffice Draw and is new to
drawing or graphics software, but may be familiar with another office software suite, will find this
user guide very useful.
LibreOffice is an open-source office productivity software suite containing capabilities for word
processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases, and formula editing. Draw is the
vector graphics drawing module and a wide variety of graphical images can be easily and
quickly created. Drawings created in Draw can be exported in several file formats, for example,
PDF, HTML, and numerous graphic formats.

What is in this user guide?

This user guide introduces the main features of Draw module. It is a vector graphics drawing
tool, but can also be used to edit raster graphics (pixels), for example photographs. A few
examples of drawing functions are as follows:
Layer management, snap functions and grid-point system
Dimensions and measurement display
Connectors for making organization charts
Draw also includes 3D functions for creation of 3D drawings (with texture and lighting effects),
drawing and page-style integration, and creation of Bézier curves.

What is LibreOffice?
LibreOffice is a freely available, fully-featured, open source office productivity suite that is
compatible with other major office suites and is available on a variety of platforms. The native file
format used is Open Document Format (ODF). However, LibreOffice can also open and save
documents in many other formats, including those used by versions of Microsoft Office. For more
information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice

LibreOffice 24.8 requires one of the following operating systems:
Linux x64 (deb) and Linux x64 (rpm)
Mac OS X (Aarch64/Apple Silicon)
macOS x86_64 (10.14 Mojave or higher)
Windows x86_64 (Windows 7 or newer required)
For a detailed list of requirements and operating systems supported, see the LibreOffice website,
[Link]

How to get LibreOffice

Computers and laptops
Versions of LibreOffice for Windows, Linux, and macOS are freely available and can be
downloaded from the LibreOffice website at [Link]
For Linux users LibreOffice is included free with many of the latest distributions, for example
Ubuntu. Linux versions of LibreOffice may differ in a few features from the descriptions used in
this user guide.

8 |Draw Guide 24.8

LibreOffice is also available for Windows in the Microsoft Store and for macOS in the Apple App
Store at a low and attractive price. These versions are free software (as in open source), but the
small charge covers the cost of placing LibreOffice in the app stores. The profits from this sale of
LibreOffice are invested to support the development of the LibreOffice project.

Tablets, iPads and Chromebooks

To use LibreOffice on tablets, iPads, or Chromebooks, a LibreOffice based app has to be
downloaded and installed. The app is called Collabora Office, which uses the same technology
as LibreOffice and is very similar in operation to LibreOffice. For more information, go to the
Collabora Office website at [Link]

Installing LibreOffice
Information on installing LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems can be found at
this web page: [Link] If LibreOffice is acquired
through official app stores, follow the installation instructions provided by the store.

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice

After installation, change the default settings (options) in LibreOffice to suit working requirements
and preferences. Go to Tools > Options on the Menu bar (mac OS LibreOffice > Preferences)
and change the settings as required.
Settings are described in LibreOffice Help and the Getting Started Guide. These two sources
provide information on how to customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts in Draw, add
new menus and toolbars, and assign macros to events.

Tip
Some settings are intended for power users and programmers. If it is difficult to
understand what an option does, LibreOffice recommended leaving an option on its
default setting unless instructions in this user guide recommend changing the
setting.

Extensions and add-ons

Functionality can be added to LibreOffice with extensions and add-ons. Several extensions are
installed with the program and other extensions from the official extensions repository,
[Link] or various other sources. See the Getting Started Guide for
more information on installing extensions and add-ons.

Where to get more help

This user guide, the Help system, and user support systems assume that users are familiar with
computers and basic functions such as starting a program, opening and saving files.

Help system
LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system and is used as the first line of support.
Windows and Linux users can choose to download and install the offline Help for use when not
connected to the Internet. Offline Help is installed with the MacOS version of LibreOffice.

Preface | 9
To display the LibreOffice Help, press F1 or go to Help > LibreOffice Help on the Menu bar. If
the offline help is not installed on a computer, but connected to the Internet, a dialog opens
giving the option to Read Help Online. Select this option and the default web browser opens at
the LibreOffice online help pages in the LibreOffice website.
The Help menu includes links to other LibreOffice information and support facilities. The Help
menu also includes links to other LibreOffice information and support resources.
What's This?
For quick tips when a toolbar is visible, place the cursor over a tool icon to see a small
tooltip box with a brief explanation of the tool function. For a more detailed explanation,
select Help > What's This? Also Extended Tips can be activated by going to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice > General > Help (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > General > Help) on the Menu bar and selecting the option Extended Tips.
Extended tips provide a brief description about tools and commands. To display an
extended tip, use the keyboard Shift+F1, then move the cursor onto a tool or
command.
User Guides
Opens the default browser at the Documentation page of the LibreOffice website
[Link] This web page gives
access to the LibreOffice User Guides and other useful information that can be opened in
the default browser. Also, the LibreOffice User Guides are available in PDF format as a
free download, or to buy as printed copies.
Show Tip of the Day
Opens a small window with a random tip on how to use LibreOffice.
Search Commands
Opens a window where typing a few letters, or the name of a Menu bar command, for
example, quickly finds where the command is located. Clicking on a command in the
resulting list may open a relevant dialog or have other effects.
Get Help Online
Opens the default browser at the Ask LibreOffice forum of questions and answers from
the LibreOffice community, [Link]
Send Feedback
Opens the default browser at the Feedback page of the LibreOffice website
[Link] From this web page, bugs can be
reported, new features suggested and communicated with other users in the LibreOffice
community.
Restart in Safe Mode
Opens a dialog window giving options to restart LibreOffice and reset the software to its
default settings. Restarting in safe mode also provides an opportunity to restore
LibreOffice from a backup.
Get Involved
Opens the default browser at the Get Involved page of the LibreOffice website,
[Link] Choose a topic of interest to help
improve the program.
Donate to LibreOffice
Opens the default browser at the Donation page of the LibreOffice website,
[Link] providing an opportunity to make a donation to support
LibreOffice.

10 |Draw Guide 24.8

 License Information
Outlines the licenses under which LibreOffice is made available.
Check for Updates
Opens a dialog and checks the LibreOffice website for updates to version of the
software. The dialog provides an opportunity to download and install any updates to
LibreOffice.
About LibreOffice
Opens a dialog and displays information about the version of LibreOffice and the
operating system being used. This information is often requested if the community is
asked for help or assistance with the software (in macOS, this option is found under
LibreOffice on the Menu bar}.

Other free online support

The LibreOffice community not only develops software, but provides free, volunteer-based
support. See Table 1 and the web page [Link] For comprehensive
online support from the community, look at mailing lists and the Ask LibreOffice website,
[Link] Other user websites also offer free tips and tutorials.
Table 1: Free support for LibreOffice users
Free LibreOffice support
Answers to frequently asked questions
FAQs
[Link]
Free community support is provided by a network of experienced
Mailing lists
users [Link]
Free community assistance is provided in a Question & Answer
formatted web service. Search similar topics or open a new one in
Questions & Answers [Link]
and Knowledge Base The service is available in several other languages; just replace /en/
with de, es, fr, ja, ko, nl, pt, tr, and many others in the web address
above.
The LibreOffice website in various languages
[Link]
Native language Mailing lists for native languages
support [Link]
Information about social networking
[Link]
Information about available accessibility options.
Accessibility options
[Link]
Another forum that provides support for LibreOffice, among other
OpenOffice Forum
open source office suites [Link]

Paid support and training

Support and training is available through service contracts from a vendor or consulting firm
specializing in LibreOffice. For information about certified professional support, see The
Document Foundation website: [Link]
For schools, educational and research institutions, and large organizations, see
[Link]

Preface | 11
 Figure 1: Options LibreOffice dialog — General page

What you see may be different

Illustrations
LibreOffice runs on Windows, Linux, and macOS operating systems. Each operating system has
several versions and can be customized by users (fonts, colors, themes, window managers).
The illustrations in this user guide were taken from a variety of computers and operating
systems. Therefore, some illustrations will not look exactly the same as displayed on a computer
monitor.
Also, some of the dialogs may differ because of the settings selected in LibreOffice. Either use
dialogs from the computer system (default) or dialogs provided by LibreOffice. To change to
using LibreOffice dialogs:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > General) on the Menu bar to open the dialog page for general options
(Figure 1).
2) Select the option Use LibreOffice dialogs in Open/Save dialogs to display the
LibreOffice dialogs on a computer display.
3) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Icons
The LibreOffice community has created icons for several icon sets, for example Breeze, Colibre,
and Sifr. LibreOffice users can select a preferred set of fonts to use. The icons used to illustrate
tools available in LibreOffice may differ from the ones used in this user guide. Icons in this user
guide have been taken from a LibreOffice installation set to display the Colibre set of icons.

12 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 2: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page
Change the icon set used in a LibreOffice installation as follows:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > View) on the Menu bar to open the
dialog page for view options (Figure 2).
2) In Icon Theme, select a font from the options available in the drop-down list.
3) In Icon Size, select the required size from the drop-down lists for Toolbar, Notebookbar
and Sidebar.
4) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Notes
Some Linux operating systems, for example Ubuntu, include LibreOffice as part of
the installation and may not include the required icon set. Icon sets can be
downloaded from the software repository for the Linux operating system being used.
Some of the previously included icon sets are now available only as extensions. Go
to [Link] or search for specific ones.
For example, the People Gallery is available from
[Link]

Using LibreOffice on macOS

Some keystrokes and menu items are different on computers operating macOS from computers
using Windows and Linux operating systems. Table 2 gives some common substitutions used in
this user guide. For more information on keyboard shortcuts, see LibreOffice Help and
Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts in this user guide.

Preface | 13
Table 2: Example of macOS keyboard shortcuts
Windows or Linux macOS equivalent Effect
Tools > Options LibreOffice > Preferences Access to setup options
Ctrl+click and/or right-click
Right-click Opens a context menu
depending on computer setup
⌘ and/or Cmd or Command,
Ctrl or Control Used with other keys
depending on keyboard
⌥ and/or Alt or Option
Alt Used with other keys
depending on keyboard
Open the Styles deck in the
F11 ⌘+T
Sidebar

Who wrote this user guide?

This user guide was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from sales of
the printed edition are used to benefit the community.

Frequently asked questions

How is LibreOffice licensed?
LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved Mozilla Public
License (MPL), see [Link] It is based on code
from Apache OpenOffice made available under the Apache License 2.0 but also includes
software that differs from version to version under a variety of other Open Source
licenses. New code is available under LGPL 3.0 and MPL 2.0.
Can LibreOffice be distributed to anyone?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be sold?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be used in a business?
Yes.
How many computers can LibreOffice be installed on?
As many as required.
Is LibreOffice available in different languages?
LibreOffice has been translated (localized for more than 80%, both UI and Help) into over
46 languages, so a required language is probably supported. Localization is well under
way for another 30+ languages (50-80%) and for another 50+ languages help is more
than welcome. In addition, over 70 spelling, hyphenation, and thesaurus dictionaries are
available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface. The
dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at: [Link]
How can LibreOffice be freely available?
LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several
organizations. LibreOffice also relies upon donations from its users. To make a donation,
go to the following web page: [Link]

14 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Can the programming code from LibreOffice be used when developing a software
application?
Yes, but follow the parameters set in the MPL and/or LGPL. Read the licenses:
[Link]
Why is Java required to run LibreOffice and is it written in Java?
LibreOffice is not written in Java, but written in the C++ language. Java is one of several
languages that can be used to extend the software. The Java JDK/JRE is only required
for some features. The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine.
Java is available at no cost. More information and download links to the appropriate
edition for an operating system can be found at:
[Link]

Note
If LibreOffice features requiring Java are to be used, it is important that the correct
32-bit or 64-bit edition matches the installed version of LibreOffice. If Java is not to
be used, nearly all of the LibreOffice features can still be used.
How can users contribute to LibreOffice?
Users can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways, and
there is no need to be a programmer. To start, check out this webpage:
[Link] An interactive web page that guides
users in contributing with their best skills available at [Link]
Can the PDF copy of this user guide be distributed, or printed and copies sold?
Yes, as long as requirements are met for one of the licenses in the copyright statement at
the beginning of this user guide. There is no need to request special permission.
LibreOffice requests that users share with the LibreOffice project some of the profits
made from sales of user guides, in consideration of all the work that LibreOffice
volunteers have put into producing user guides.

What is new in LibreOffice 24.8?

The LibreOffice 24.8 Release Notes are available at this link
[Link] Also available at this link are the
release notes for earlier versions of LibreOffice giving more information on the features included
in LibreOffice.

Preface | 15
 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 1,
Introducing Draw
Introduction
Draw is the vector graphics drawing module for LibreOffice for creating and updating a wide
format of graphic images, including raster graphics (pixels). Vector graphics store and display
images as assemblies of simple geometric elements such as lines, circles, and polygons, rather
than a collection of pixels (points on the screen), allowing for easier storage and image scaling.
Draw is fully integrated into the LibreOffice suite simplifying the exachange of graphics between
all LibreOffice modules. If an image is created in Draw, reusing it in a Writer document is
relatively easy. For example, select and copy a drawing in Draw, then paste the copied image
directly into a Writer document. Also, drawings can be worked on directly from within Writer or
Impress, using a subset functions and tools from Draw.
The functionality of Draw is extensive, but is not designed to rival high-end graphics applications.
However, Draw has more functionality than drawing tools that are available in the majority of
other office productivity suites. A few examples of drawing functions are as follows:
Layer management
Magnetic grid-point system
Dimensions and measurement display
Connectors for making organization charts and other diagrams
3D functions for creating small three-dimensional drawings
Drawing and page-style integration
Bézier curves
This Draw user guide is not a course book to be worked through from beginning to end, but a
reference work used as guidance when greating vector graphics. This user guide describes only
the functions associated with Draw. Some concepts, such as file management, or the way the
LibreOffice environment works, are mentioned briefly, but are covered in more detail in the
Getting Started Guide.

Notes
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, a menu entry for each module is added
to the system menu. The exact name and location of these menu entries depends on
the operating system and user interface being used.
The New icon displayed on the Standard toolbar depends on which LibreOffice
module is opened when creating a new document, presentation, spreadsheet, or
drawing.

Main window
Pages pane
In Draw, drawings can be split over several pages using multi-page drawings. These multi-page
drawings are normally used in presentations. The Pages pane, on the left side of the main
window, provides an overview pages created in a drawing. If the Pages pane is not visible,
select View > Page Pane on the Menu bar. To make changes to the page order, drag and drop
one or more pages displayed in the Pages pane.

Workspace
The large area in the center of the main window (Figure 3) is the Workspace where drawings are
created. This drawing area can be surrounded with toolbars and information areas. The quantity
and position of tools varies with the task being carried out, user preferences, and computer
setup.

18 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 3: Draw main window
(1) Pages pane (3) Sidebar (5) Layers Bar
(2) Workspace (4) Status Bar
The maximum size of a Draw drawing page is limited by computer setup and the page size that
that can be set and used in a printer connected to the computer.

Sidebar
The Sidebar for Draw has five main decks and is similar to the Sidebar in other LibreOffice
modules. To open a deck, click on its icon on the right of the Sidebar, or click on Sidebar
Settings at the top of the Sidebar and select a deck from the drop-down list. If the Sidebar is not
visible, select View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5
(macOS ⌘+F5).
Properties
Provides panels where properties of a selected object in a drawing are edited and
updated. Available panels depend on the selected object, but are as follows:
Page Character Paragraph Image
Area Line Effect Shadow
Position and Size Columns.
Styles
Provides options to edit and apply available Drawing Styles to objects in a drawing.
When a style is edited or modified, changes are automatically applied to all elements
formatted using that style. In Draw, Presentation Styles are not available. New drawing
styles can be added to a drawing.
Gallery
Objects available on the Gallery deck are inserted into a drawing either as a copy or as a
link. New themes are added to the Gallery. See Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques
for more information on using the Gallery. The Gallery is divided into the following
themes:
Arrows BPMN Bullets
Diagrams Flow chart Icons
Network Shapes Sounds.

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 19

 Navigator
On the Navigator deck, pages and objects in a drawing are quickly selected. It is
recommended to use meaningful names for drawing pages and objects providing easy
identification and location when using the Navigator.
Shapes
Provides quick selection of some items available on the Drawing toolbar. These Shapes
are available in the following subtoolbars:
Lines and Arrows Curves and Polygons Connectors
Basic Shapes Symbol Shapes Block Arrows
Flowchart Callouts Stars and Banners
3D Objects.

Status bar
The Status Bar (Figure 4) is located at the bottom of the Workspace in all LibreOffice modules.
To hide the Status Bar, if required, select View on the Menu bar and deselect Status Bar from
the submenu.

Note
The measurement units displayed on the Status Bar are set by going to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > General) on the Menu bar. These measurement units can be different
to the measurement units set for the rulers displayed in the LibreOffice Draw main
window.
Slide (drawing) number
Shows the drawing pane number that is selected.
Information area
Shows which action is being carried out, or object type selected.
Master drawing
Indicates the master drawing in use.
Cursor position/Selected object size
Shows different information depending on whether objects are selected or not.
– When no object is selected, the position numbers show the current position (X and Y
coordinates) of the cursor.
– When an object is selected and being resized, the object size numbers show the
object size (width and height).
– If an object is selected, the position numbers shows the X and Y coordinates of the
upper-left corner and the object size number pair displays the object size. These
numbers do not relate to the object itself, but to the selection outline, which is the
smallest possible rectangle that can contain the visible object part or parts. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
– When an object is selected, clicking in either of these areas opens the Position and
Size dialog. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.
Document scaling factor
Indicates how the drawing appears on the display. The default scaling factor is 1:1. To
change the scaling factor, right-click on the scaling factor and select a scaling factor from
the context menu that opens.

20 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 4: Draw Status Bar
(1) Slide (drawing) number (5) Selected object size (9) Fit drawing
(2) Information area (6) Document scaling factor (10) Zoom slider
(3) Master drawing (7) Unsaved changes (11) Zoom percentage
(4) Cursor position (8) Digital signature
Unsaved changes
Indicates that the file needs saving. The icon displayed depends on the computer
operating system and setup. Clicking on this icon opens the Save as dialog if the file is
new and has not been saved before. If the file has been saved already, then clicking on
this icon automatically saves the file after any changes have been made.
Digital signature
Indicates if the document is digitally signed. The icon only appears if the drawing has a
digital signature certificate. After the file has been saved, double clicking on this icon
opens the digital signatures dialog. See LibreOffice Help for more information on digital
signature certificates.
Fit drawing
Resizes the drawing so that the whole drawing appears in the Workspace.
Zoom slider/Zoom percentage
Adjusts and indicates the Workspace zoom percentage displayed. Double clicking on
zoom percentage opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog.

Layers bar
A layer is a workplace where drawing elements and objects can be inserted. By default, the
Workspace consists of three layers, which are Layout, Controls and Dimension Lines. Tabs
for the default layers appear at the bottom of the Workspace. Default layers cannot be deleted or
renamed, but layers can be added as and when necessary.
Tabs for layers appear in the Layers bar at the bottom of the Workspace. Use the Layers bar to
navigate between layers, add layers as required, or delete layers that have been created. For
more information on layers, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Rulers
Rulers are positioned on the Workspace upper and left-hand sides. If the rulers are not visible,
select View > Rulers in the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+R
(macOS ⌘+Shift+R). The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page using double
lines (highlighted in Figure 5). Rulers are also used when using object handles and guide lines
for positioning of objects.
Page margins in the drawing area are represented on the rulers. Change the margins directly on
the rulers by dragging with the cursor. Margin areas are normally indicated by a grayed out area
on the rulers, but this indication does depend on computer and operating system setup.
To change the ruler measurement units, right-click on a ruler and select the measurement unit
from the drop down list, as shown in Figure 6 for the horizontal ruler. Measurement units for the
horizontal and vertical rulers can be different measurement units.

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 21

 Figure 5: Example of Rulers showing object size

Figure 6: Example of Ruler measurement units

Figure 7: Example of visible toolbar icons on a toolbar

22 |Draw Guide 24.8

Toolbars
To display or hide the Draw toolbars, select View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select the
required toolbar from the submenu. For example, Standard and Drawing toolbars are shown by
default, but Line and Filling, and Text Formatting toolbars are not shown.
Appearance of tool icons on toolbars depends on the computer operating system and the
selection of icon style and size in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice > View).
The tools available on a toolbar are indicated, either, by highlighting around the tool icon, or a
check mark as shown by the example in Figure 7. For more information about working with
toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide. The four main toolbars used
in Draw are as follows:
Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar (Figure 8) is similar for all LibreOffice components and is not
described in detail in this chapter. By default, it is positioned at the top of the Draw main
window.

Figure 8: Standard toolbar

Figure 9: Drawing toolbar

Figure 10: Line and Filling toolbar

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 23

 Figure 11: Text Formatting toolbar
Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 9) contains all the necessary functions for drawing various
geometric and freehand shapes, and for organizing them in the drawing. By default, it is
positioned on the left of the Draw main window. This toolbar is described in detail in
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes.
Line and Filling toolbar
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 10) is used to modify the main properties of a
drawing object. The tools and pull-down lists vary according to the type of object
selected. For example, to change the style of a line, click on the up and down arrows for
Line Style and select the required style.
The functions on the Line and Filling toolbar are used to change the color, style, and
width of the line drawn, the fill color and style, and other properties of a selected object. If
the selected object is a text frame, the Line and Filling toolbar is replaced by the Text
Formatting toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes.
Text Formatting toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 11) is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer. It is
only available when text, or a text object, has been selected in a drawing, replacing the
Line and Filling toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes,
and Chapter 9 Adding and Formatting Text.

Notes
For more information on the available tools that can be added to a toolbar, see
Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide. When a tool is added to a
toolbar, its position on the toolbar (from left to right) is the same as its listed position
in the Visible Buttons context menu.
When a sub-toolbar is made into a floating toolbar, the tool on the existing toolbar
remains in the toolbar and always shows the last tool used. This means that the tool
icon on a screen may differ from the tool icon shown in this guide.
Make sure that all toolbars are docked into the required position in the LibreOffice
window before using Lock Toolbars or Lock Toolbar Position. There is no
selection indication on Lock Toolbars when used to lock and unlock the toolbars.
The locking indication is only indicated by the dotted toolbar handles.

Adding and removing tools

The default set of tools on each toolbar can be added or removed using Visible Buttons as
follows:
1) Either, right-click in an empty area on the toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ in the toolbar
title and select Visible Buttons from the context menu to a submenu of available tools.
2) Click on a tool name in the submenu to add or remove the tool.

24 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 12: Example of available toolsets

Available toolsets
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ on the right side of the tool icon indicating that the
tool has additional tools available in a subtoolbar. Clicking on this triangle ▼ opens a palette, or
subtoolbar, of available tools (Figure 12). This palette, or subtoolbar, can be turned into a floating
toolbar as follows:
1) Click on the dotted line at the top of the toolset.
2) Drag the toolset across the screen to a convenient location, then release the cursor to
create a floating toolbar.
3) To close a floating toolbar, click on the X on the right of the toolbar title.

Tip
If a tool is going to repeatedly used, double-click on the selected tool. The tool
becomes active and remains active, allowing for repeated use. To exit from this
repeat use mode, press the Esc key, or select another tool. Please note that this may
not work for every tool on every toolbar.

Figure 13: Example of toolbar handles

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 25

Unlocking and locking individual toolbars
By default, when Draw is opened, any docked toolbars are locked into position and have to be
unlocked before becoming floating toolbars, or repositioned on the main window. The locking
status of toolbars is indicated by dotted handles at the left end of horizontal toolbars (highlighted
in Figure 13). For vertically positioned toolbars, these dotted handles are positioned at the
toolbar top.
1) To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and select Lock Toolbar
Position from the context menu. A toolbar handle appears at the end of the toolbar,
indicating that the toolbar is unlocked and can be moved.
2) To lock a toolbar into position, dock the toolbar into position, then right-click in a blank
area on the toolbar and select Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu. The
toolbar handle disappears from the end of the toolbar.

Note
Before unlocking or locking individual toolbars, make sure that ALL toolbars are
unlocked.

Unlocking and locking all toolbars

All toolbars available in LibreOffice can also be locked into position. This overrides the unlocking
and locking of individual toolbars.
Unlocking toolbars
1) Make sure all open LibreOffice documents have been saved before unlocking or locking
all toolbars.
2) To unlock all toolbars, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars
from the context menu.
3) Select Restart Now from the warning message that opens and all toolbars can now be
individually unlocked. Toolbar handles appear on individual toolbars that are NOT
individually locked.
Locking all toolbars
1) To lock all toolbars, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars
from the context menu.
2) Select Restart Now from the warning message that opens and all toolbars are now
locked into position. Toolbar handles are no longer displayed on all toolbars.

Undocking toolbars
When Draw is opened, by default, the Standard and Drawing toolbars are already docked into
their positions at the top of the main window. These toolbars and any other open toolbar can be
undocked to create floating toolbars as follows:
1) Make sure the toolbar handle is displayed indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. If there
is no toolbar handle displayed, see “Unlocking and locking individual toolbars” and
"Unlocking and locking all toolbars" above for more information.
2) Move the cursor over the toolbar handle. The cursor changes shape, normally to a
grabbing hand, depending on computer setup and operating system.
3) Click on the toolbar handle and drag the toolbar until it is undocked and becomes a
floating toolbar. This floating toolbar capability is common to all LibreOffice modules.

26 |Draw Guide 24.8

Docking toolbars
To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:
• Press and hold the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘), then double click on the toolbar title. The
toolbar moves into available space at the top of the Draw main window.
• Click in the toolbar title and drag the toolbar to the docked position required. This can be
the top, bottom or one of the sides of the Draw main window.

Customizing toolbars
Draw toolbars can be customized by adding or removing commands to or from a toolbar. Also,
customization allows creation of toolbars for specific purposes. Customizing toolbars is
additional to using “Adding and removing tools” on page 24. For more information on adding
customizing toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.

Choosing and defining colors

Color palette
The Color Palette (Figure 14) is a standard set of colors to use for objects and text in a drawing.
1) Go to View on the Menu bar and select Color Bar to open the Color Palette. The Color
Palette appears in the main window, next to the Sidebar.
2) Select an object or text.
3) Left click on the color required for the area fill, or text, and change the color of the object
or text.
4) Right click on the color required for the object, or text box border, and change the border
color.
5) Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Color Bar to close the Color Palette.

Figure 14: Color Bar (Color Palette)

Note
Selecting the X at the bottom left of the Color Palette corresponds to no color for an
object, text, or border.

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 27

Specialized color palettes
In addition to the Color Palette, Draw has several specialized color palettes providing a greater
selection of color for objects and text; for example chart-palettes, rectangles, arrows, and so on.
After selecting an object, or text, in a drawing, use one of the following to access the specialized
color palettes.
• Area or fill color — Color page in the Area dialog, Fill Color on the Drawing or Line and
Filling toolbar, or Fill in the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Line color — Line page in the Line dialog, Line Color on the Drawing or Line and Filling
toolbar, or Color in the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Text color — Font Color tool on the Text Formatting toolbar, or Font Color in the
Character panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
For more information on selecting a color and a color palette for an object, or text, see
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes, Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text, and Chapter 11,
Advanced Draw Techniques.

Custom colors
In Draw, custom colors can be created using the Color Picker dialog, CMYK values, or RGB
values to match color schemes used; for example a company color scheme. For more detailed
information on creating custom colors, color palettes, CMYK settings, RGB settings, and HSB
settings, refer to Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Grid, snap guides, and helplines

The grid, snap guides, and helplines in Draw act as drawing aids when moving and positioning
objects in a drawing. These drawing aids can be turned on or off using one of the following
options:
• Line and Filling toolbar — click on Display Grid, or Helplines While Moving to turn the
grid or helplines on or off.
• Options toolbar — click on Display Grid, Display Snap Guides, or Helplines While
Moving to turn the grid, snap guides, or helplines on or off.
• Go to View > Grid and Helplines on the Menu bar and select, or deselect Display Grid,
or Helplines While Moving on the submenu.
• Go to View > Snap Guides on the Menu bar and select, or deselect Display Snap
Guides on the submenu.
The grid and snap guides are displayed only on the screen and are not shown on a printed
drawing, or when the drawing is used in another LibreOffice module. The color, spacing and
resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis. Draw also has several snap
functions to position objects precisely in a drawing.
Helplines show the object position while moving and makes positioning an object much easier. If
this function is activated, pairs of vertical and horizontal lines enclosing the object are shown
while moving the object. These helplines extend to the drawing area edges.
For more information on the grid, snap guides, snap functions, and helplines, see Chapter 3,
Working with Objects and Object Points.

28 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 2,
Drawing Basic Shapes
Introduction
Draw is used for creating 2D and 3D objects and this chapter explains how to create 2D objects.
For more information on 3D objects, see Chapter 7, Working with 3D Objects. All rectangles,
lines, and shapes are called objects, which is a common notation in vector drawing software.
Frequently used drawing tools are found on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15) which is normally
docked on the left side of the main window. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars on
the Menu bar and select Drawing from the available options. The Drawing toolbar can be
unlocked and used as a floating toolbar. Toolbars can also be configured by adding, moving,
hiding, or deleting tools. See Chapter 1, Introducing Draw for more information.

Drawing basic shapes

Basic shapes, including text, are treated as objects in Draw. The default set of tools available for
drawing basic shapes on the Drawing toolbar are shown in Figure 15. To add more tools to the
Drawing toolbar, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide for more information.
Some tool icons on the Drawing toolbar change shape according to the last tool used from the
selection of available tools. Each tool that has a triangle ▼ next to the tool icon indicates that
more tools are available. See “Drawing geometric shapes” on page 42 for information on the
available shapes.
When a shape is created, an object selected for editing, or text added to the drawing, the
information field in the Status Bar (Figure 16) changes to reflect the action taken or in progress.
See Chapter 1, Introducing Draw for more information on the Status Bar.

Figure 15: Drawing toolbar

Figure 16: Draw Status Bar

(1) Slide (drawing) number (5) Selected object size (9) Fit drawing
(2) Information area (6) Document scaling factor (10) Zoom slider
(3) Master drawing (7) Unsaved changes (11) Zoom percentage
(4) Cursor position (8) Digital signature

Note
When a basic shape is drawn, or selected for editing, the information area at the left
side in the Status Bar changes to reflect the present action. For example Line
created, Text frame xxyy selected, and so on.

30 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 17: Shapes deck on Sidebar

Creating lines
A straight line is the simplest element or object to create using Draw.
1) Use one of the following options to draw a straight line:
– Click Insert Line on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15).
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15)
and select Insert Line from the options available.
– Click Insert Line in the Line and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 17).
2) Place the cursor at the starting point on the drawing, then click and drag the cursor to
draw a straight line.
3) Release the cursor when the required line length is reached and a straight line is
created. A selection handle appears at each line end. The selection handle at the starting
point of a line is slightly larger than the selection handle at the end point (highlighted in
Figure 18).
4) To snap ends of a straight line to the nearest grid point, hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘)
key while drawing a straight line. This is default behavior of the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key.
5) To restrict the drawing angle of a straight line to multiples of 45 degrees (0, 45, 90, 135,
and so on), hold down the Shift key while drawing a straight line. This is the default
behavior of the Shift key.
6) To draw a straight line symmetrically outwards in both directions from the start point, hold
down the Alt (macOS ⌥) key to draw a straight line from the line center.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 31

 Figure 18: Example of line starting point (highlighted)

Notes
If the option View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar has been
selected, holding down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key while drawing a straight line
temporarily deactivates the Snap to Grid option.
If the option When creating or moving objects in the Constrain Objects section of
Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice Draw > Grid) has been selected, holding down the Shift key
temporarily deactivates this restriction.
Draw classifies both lines and arrows as lines and are created in the same way as
straight lines. Hovering the cursor over each tool in the Lines and Arrows subtoolbar
(Figure 22 on page 34), or the Line and Arrows panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar, indicates what type of line or arrow each tool draws. The information field on
the Status Bar shows them only as lines.

Formatting lines
When a line is drawn, it uses default attributes for line style, line color, line width and
transparency. To change any of these attributes to the drawing requirements is as follows:
1) Select the straight line by clicking on it to display the selection handles.
2) To format line style, line color, line width, or transparency select an available option using
one of the following methods:
– Click on a line selection handle and drag it to increase or decrease the line length.
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar to open the Line dialog (Figure 19).
– Use Line Style, Line Width, and Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar
(Figure 20).
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the submenu to open the Line dialog.
– Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 21).

32 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 19: Line dialog — Line page

Figure 20: Line and Filling toolbar

Creating arrows
1) Use one of the following methods to create an arrow:
a) Select the type of line or arrow required in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).
b) Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and select the
type of line and arrow required from the options in the Lines and Arrows subtoolbar
(Figure 22).

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 33

 c) Place the cursor at the starting point for the line or arrow, then click and drag the cursor.
The arrowheads are drawn at the line ends when the line is completed.
d) For more information on creating lines and arrows, see “Creating lines” on page 31.

Figure 21: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar with Arrowhead styles

Figure 22: Lines and Arrows subtoolbar

34 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 23: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page

Formatting arrows
1) To format the line used for an arrow, see “Formatting lines” on page 32 for more
information.
2) To format an arrow using the same arrowhead style for both arrow ends:
a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar or right-click on the arrow to open the Line
dialog (Figure 19 on page 33).
c) Click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 23)
and select an arrow style from the options available in the Arrow style drop-down list.
d) Click OK to apply the arrow style and close the Line dialog.
e) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.
3) To format an arrow using different arrowhead styles for each arrow end:
a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Open the Line panel on the Properties deck of the Sidebar (Figure 21 on page 34).
c) In the Line panel, click on Arrow Style to open the drop-down list for arrowhead styles.
d) On the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 20 on page 33), select an arrowhead style from
the left-hand list of arrowhead styles for the arrow start point.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 35

 e) On the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 20 on page 33), select an arrowhead style from
the right-hand list of arrowhead styles for the arrow end point.
f) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.

Note
The option for selecting different arrowhead styles at each end of an arrow is not
available in the macOS version of the Line panel on the Properties deck in the
Sidebar.

Rectangles or squares
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing a rectangle or square:
– Click on Rectangle on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of rectangle or square in the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck
on the Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15 on
page 30) and select the type of rectangle or square required from the available
options.
– Select the type of rectangle or square on the Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 24).
To display the Legacy Rectangles toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and
select it.
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the rectangle or square, then click and drag the
cursor until the required size is drawn. The rectangle or square is drawn from the starting
point using the bottom right corner as the anchor point for the cursor.
3) If necessary, use one of the following options to draw a rectangle or square:
– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw a square.
– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to
draw a rectangle from its center.
– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging the
cursor to draw a square from its center.
– If a square option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw a rectangle.
– If a square option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw
a square from its center.

Figure 24: Legacy Rectangles toolbar

Figure 25: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

36 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Note
If the option When creating or moving objects is selected in the Constrain Object
section of Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice>
Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Grid), Shift key action is reversed. A square is
drawn instead of a rectangle. Holding down the Shift key a rectangle is drawn.
Shift key action reversal also applies to ellipses, circles, arcs, and segments.

Ellipses or circles
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an ellipse or circle:
– Click on Ellipse on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle in the Basic Shapes panel in Shapes deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15 on
page 30) and select the type of ellipse or circle required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle on the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 25).
To display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar and select it.
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the ellipse or circle, then click and drag the
cursor until the required size is drawn. The ellipse or circle is drawn from the starting
point using the bottom right corner as the anchor point for the cursor.
3) If necessary, use one of the following options while drawing an ellipse or circle:
– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw a circle.
– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to
draw an ellipse from its center.
– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging the
cursor to draw a circle from its center.
– If a circle option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw an ellipse.
– If a circle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw
a circle from its center.

Tip
To quickly insert an object, press and hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key, then click
on an object tool on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15 on page 30). A standard sized
object of the selected object is drawn automatically in the center of the Workspace.
The size, shape, and color used are default settings. These settings can be changed
to match the drawing requirements. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for
more information.

Dimension lines
Dimension lines display a measurement of an object in the drawing, as shown by the example in
Figure 26. A dimension line does not belong to the object itself, but is positioned close to it. An
object can have as many dimension lines as necessary to indicate the dimensions of all aspects
of an object.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 37

 Figure 26: Example of object dimension lines

Figure 27: Dimension Line dialog

To format the display of a dimension line and its components, right-click on the dimension line
and select Dimensions from the context menu to open the Dimension line dialog (Figure 27).

Note
The measurement units used for dimension lines can be changed. Go to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice Draw > Grid > General) on the Menu bar and select a measurement
unit from the available options in the Units of measurement drop-down list.

38 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Tip
To help in accurately positioning dimension lines on an object, it is recommended to
use the the horizontal and vertical guide lines. It is also recommended to use the
Snap to grid option to accurately position objects and dimension lines.
1) Use one of the following options to start drawing a dimension line:
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and select
Dimension Line from the drop-down list.
– Click on Dimension Line in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar.
2) Place the cursor at the point close to the object to position the dimension line start.
3) Click and drag to draw the dimension line. As the dimension line is drawn, the dimension
is displayed and automatically calculated.
4) Select the dimension line, then right-click on the dimension line and select Dimensions
from the context menu to open the Dimension Line dialog.
5) Format the dimension line using the options available in the Dimension Line dialog. For
more information dimension line options, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension Line dialog.
7) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the dimension line.

Arcs and segments

1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an arc or segment (partial circles or
ellipses):
– Select the type of arc or segment in Curves and Polygon panel in the Shapes deck
on the Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15 on
page 30) and select the type of arc or segment required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of arc or segment from the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar
(Figure 25 on page 36). To display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View >
Toolbars on the Menu bar and select it.
2) Click on and drag the cursor to start creating an arc or segment. Release when the
required object size is reached.
3) Move the cursor to the position where the arc or segment starts and click to start drawing
the arc or segment. The Status Bar indicates the angle in degrees.
4) Move the cursor to the end position of where the arc or segment finishes. The Status
Bar shows the angle in degrees.
5) Click again to complete the arc or segment.

Curves
1) Select the type of curve required using one of the following methods:
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar
(Figure 15 on page 30) and select the type of curve from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of curve in the Curve and Polygons panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 39

 2) Click, hold and drag the cursor from the starting point to draw a line.
3) Release and continue to drag the cursor to bend the line into the required curve shape.
4) Click to set the curve and position end point of the curve on the drawing.
5) Continue dragging the cursor to draw straight lines at the curve end. Each click sets a
corner point and allows drawing of another straight line from each corner point.
6) Double-click to end the drawing of a curve and straight lines.

Note
A filled curve and filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point
closing the object. The selected fill type then fill the object. A curve or polygon
without filling is not closed at the end of the drawing.

Polygons
1) Select the type of polygon required using one of the following methods:
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar
(Figure 15 on page 30) and select the type of curve from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of curve in the Curve and Polygons panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31).
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor to draw a line between the first and second corner points.
3) Click again to end the drawing between the first and second corner points of the polygon.
4) Move the cursor to draw the next line and click to finish drawing to the next corner point.
Each click sets a corner point and draws another line.
5) Double-click to end the drawing of a polygon.

Polygons 45°
Like ordinary polygons, these are formed from lines, but the angles between lines are restricted
to 45 or 90 degrees. If required, hold down the Shift key as the line is drawn so that the line is
drawn at an angle other than 45 or 90 degrees.

Freeform lines
Using freeform line tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper.
1) Click, hold and drag the cursor to the line shape required, then release to complete the
freeform line drawing.
2) If Freeform Line Filled is selected, the end point is joined automatically to the start point
and the object is filled with the selected fill.

Note
The points in curves, polygons and freeform lines can be moved and edited. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for
more information.

40 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 28: Example of object gluepoints

Figure 29: Gluepoints toolbar

Gluepoints and connectors

Gluepoints
All Draw objects have gluepoints, which are not normally displayed, and only become visible
when Connectors is selected on the Drawing toolbar, or a connector tool is selected in the
Connectors panel on the Shapes deck in the Sidebar.
Most objects have four gluepoints, as shown in the example in Figure 28. More gluepoints can
be added and customized using the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 29). Go to View > Toolbars >
Gluepoints on the Menu bar to open the toolbar.
Gluepoints are not the same as the selection handles of an object. Selection handles are for
moving or changing the shape of an object. Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an
object so that when the object moves, the connector stays fixed to the object. For a more
detailed description on the use of gluepoints, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects, or Chapter 8,
Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts.

Connectors
Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically snap to a gluepoint of an object.
Connectors are not the same as lines and arrows. When objects are moved or reordered, the
connectors remain attached to a gluepoint. Figure 30 shows an example of two objects and
connectors between the objects.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 41

 Figure 30: Example of connectors between objects
Draw has several different connectors and connector functions. On the Drawing toolbar, click on
the triangle ▼ next to Connectors and select a connector type from the drop-down list, or select
a connector from the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. For a more detailed
description using connectors, see Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts.

Drawing geometric shapes

The tools for drawing geometric shapes are located on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15 on
page 30) and the Shapes deck in the Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 31). The use of these tools for
geometric shapes is similar to the tools used for drawing rectangles and squares, or ellipses and
circles. For more information, see “Drawing basic shapes” on page 30.
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool icon on the Drawing toolbar opens a drop-down
list giving access to the toolset for that shape. If necessary, this drop-down list can be “torn off”
to create a floating subtoolbar.
• Click and hold on the dotted line at the toolset top (highlighted in Figure 31), then drag it
across the screen to the Workspace and release to create a floating subtoolbar
• To close a floating subtoolbar, click on the X on the right of the subtoolbar title.

Figure 31: Example of creating a floating subtoolbar

42 |Draw Guide 24.8

3D Objects
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar opens the
3D-Objects subtoolbar (Figure 32). Alternatively, select the required tool from the 3D-Objects
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 32: 3D-Objects subtoolbar

Note
The 3D-Objects subtoolbar is identical to the 3D-Objects toolbar available at View >
Toolbars on the Menu bar.

Basic shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the Basic
Shapes subtoolbar (Figure 33). This subtoolbar also includes rectangle and ellipse tools that are
identical to the ones already displayed on the Drawing toolbar. Alternatively, select the required
tool from the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 33: Basic Shapes subtoolbar

Block arrows
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar opens the Block
Arrows subtoolbar (Figure 34). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Block Arrows
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 34: Block Arrows subtoolbar

Callouts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callout on the Drawing toolbar opens the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 35). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Callouts panel in the
Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 43

 Figure 35: Callouts subtoolbar

Flowcharts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar opens the Flowchart
subtoolbar (Figure 36) for symbols. Alternatively, select the required tool from the Flowchart
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. For more information on the creation of flowcharts,
organization charts, and similar planning tools, see Chapter 8 Connections, Flowcharts and
Organization Charts.

Figure 36: Flowchart subtoolbar

Stars and banners

Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar opens the
Stars and Banners subtoolbar (Figure 37). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Stars
and Banners panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 37: Stars and Banners subtoolbar

Symbol shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the
Symbol Shapes subtoolbar (Figure 38). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Symbol
Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 38: Symbol Shapes subtoolbar

44 |Draw Guide 24.8

Adding, inserting and formatting text
In Draw text can be added, inserted, and formatted to in text boxes, objects, and shapes. For
more information on how to add, insert, and format text in a drawing, see Chapter 9, Adding and
Formatting Text.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 45

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 3,
Working with Objects
Introduction
This chapter explains the tools and functions for modifying existing drawings for creating and
editing a selected object or a group of selected objects. When several objects are selected, a
selection frame around the objects corresponds to the smallest rectangle containing all objects.
This selection frame is also called a selection rectangle, or marquee. Selection handles appear
on this rectangular frame which is also large enough to contain all objects when that have been
selected.

Note
The color and shape of selection handles changes depending on the selected tool
and function when changing object properties. Also, the color of selection handles
depends on computer operating system and computer set up.

Selecting objects
Direct selection
Direct clicking on an object is the easiest selection method. For objects not filled, click on the
object border to select it. To select more than one object, hold the Shift key down while clicking
on objects. To deselect an object, move the cursor into a blank space and click.

Selection by framing
Click and drag the cursor around several objects to create a selection rectangle around several
objects. Only objects that are within this selection rectangle are selected. Make sure Select on
the Drawing toolbar (Figure 39) is active when selecting multiple objects.

Selecting hidden objects

Objects located behind other objects and not visible can also be selected. When a hidden object
is selected, its selection handles appear through the objects covering the selected object.
• Windows, Mac or Linux — press the Tab key to select and cycle through objects in a
drawing, stopping at the hidden object to select it. To cycle through objects in reverse
order, press Shift+Tab.
• Windows or Mac only — select an object in front of a hidden object, then press the Alt
key (macOS ⌥) and click to select the hidden object. If there are several hidden objects,
keep holding down the Alt key (macOS ⌥) and click until the required object is reached.
To cycle through objects in reverse order, hold down the Alt+Shift keys (macOS
⌥+Shift) and click.

Figure 39: Drawing toolbar

48 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 40: Line and Filling toolbar

Arranging objects
In complex drawings, several objects can be stacked on top of one another. Use one of the
following methods to rearrange the stacking order by moving an object forward or backward:
• Select an object, go to Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar, or right-click on the object
and select Arrange from the drop down menu, then use one of the following options:
– Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++) (macOS ⌘+Shift++)
– Bring Forward (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++)
– Send Backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–)
– Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+–) (macOS ⌘+Shift+–)
– In Front of Object
– Behind Object
• Select an object, then select one of the Arrange tools at the left end of the Line and
Filling toolbar (Figure 40). When the cursor hovers over a tool, its function is indicated.

Positioning and adjusting objects

Zoom
For positioning and adjustment of objects, Draw has a zoom function that reduces or enlarges
the display of the current drawing. For example, zoom in to position objects on a drawing with
greater accuracy, or zoom out to see the complete drawing. Zooming is controlled using the
Status Bar, Zoom & View Layout dialog, or Zoom toolbar.

Note
The zoom function is handled differently in a Linux operating system. Drawings
saved with 100% zoom setting in Windows or macOS are displayed at a larger zoom
setting than in a Linux operating system.

Status bar
The zoom controls are located on the right side of the Status Bar (Figure 41) for easy access
when zooming. Use one of the following methods to change the zoom factor:
• Use Fit page to current window to fit the drawing to the open window.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 49

 Figure 41: Status Bar zoom controls
(1) Fit page to current window (2) Zoom slide control (3) Zoom percentage

Figure 42: Zoom & View Layout dialog

• Move the Zoom slide control toward the minus sign (–) on the zoom slide control to
reduce the zoom factor.
• Move the Zoom slide control toward plus sign (+) on the zoom slide control to increase
the zoom factor.
• Right-click on the Zoom percentage number and select a zoom option from the context
menu that opens.

Zoom & View Layout dialog

Open the Zoom & View Layout dialog (Figure 42) using one of the following methods:
• Click on the zoom percentage number in the Status Bar.
• Go to View > Zoom > Zoom on the Menu bar.
The Zoom & View Layout dialog provides the following display options:
Zoom Factor
Sets the zoom factor for displaying the current document and all documents of the same
type that are subsequently opened.
Optimal
Resizes the display to fit the text width in the document.
Fit width and height
Displays the entire page on the screen.
Fit width
Displays the complete document page width. The top and bottom page edges may not
be visible.
100%
Displays the document at its actual size.

50 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 43: Zoom toolbar
Custom
Enter a percentage in the box for the zoom factor to display the document, or use the
minus (–) or plus (+) signs to change the zoom factor.

Zoom toolbar
Go to View > Toolbars > Zoom on the Menu bar to open the Zoom toolbar (Figure 43). The
tools available, from left to right, are as follows:
Zoom In
Displays the drawing at twice its current size each time the tool is selected.
Zoom Out
Displays the drawing at half its current size each time the tool is selected.
100%
Displays the drawing at its actual size.
Zoom Previous
Returns the drawing display to the previous zoom factor applied.
Zoom Next
Undo the action of the previous zoom command.
Entire Page
Displays the whole drawing in the Workspace.
Page Width
Displays the complete drawing width. The slide top and bottom edges may not be visible.
Optimal
Resizes the display to include all objects on the drawing.
Object Zoom
Resizes the display to fit the selected object(s).
Zoom & Pan
Zooms in for each click. Ctrl+click (macOS ⌘+click) zooms out for each click.
Shift+click allows panning of a drawing.
Shift
Moves the drawing within the Workspace. Place the cursor on the drawing and drag to
move the drawing.

Moving and adjusting object size

When moving an object or changing its size, check the left corner of the Status Bar at the
bottom of the Workspace (Figure 44). From left to right, this area shows a shape is selected, its
position on the drawing in X/Y coordinates and object dimensions. The measurement units are
selected in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS Preferences >
LibreOffice > LibreOffice Draw > General).

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 51

 Figure 44: Example of left end of Status Bar with shape selected

Figure 45: Example of moving selected objects

Moving objects
To move an object (or a group of objects), select it, then click within the object borders and drag
the object. During movement, a ghost object image appears to help with repositioning, as shown
by the example in Figure 45. When the object reaches its new location, release the object.

Adjusting object size

To change the size of a selected object (or a group of selected objects), move the cursor to a
selection handle. The cursor changes shape to indicate the direction of movement for that
selection handle. Click on the selection handle and drag it to change object size. The results
depend on which selection handle is used, as follows:
• To resize an object in one axis, use a side, top, or bottom handle.
• To resize using both axes, use a corner handle.
As an object size changes, a ghosted object outline appears, as shown by the example in
Figure 46. When the required object size is reached, release the object.

Note
Pressing and holding the Shift key when resizing an object changes the size to
maintain the aspect ratio between width and height. This Shift key behavior works
on all selection handles.

Modifying arcs
The size of an arc is changed by adjusting the positions of the start and end points of an arc.
The selection handle at the start point of an arc is larger than the end point of an arc.
1) Select an arc, then right click on the arc and select Points from the drop down menu, or
press the F8 key. Two handles appear at the start and end of the arc, as shown by the
example in Figure 47

52 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 46: Example of adjusting object size

Figure 47: Example of modifying arcs

2) Click and drag on the start or end handle to change the arc shape.
3) Release the selected handle when the required arc shape is achieved.

Rotating and slanting objects

Rotating objects
To rotate an object (or a group of objects), select the object and change to rotation mode as
follows:
1) Select an object, or a group of objects, so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to switch to rotation mode. The selection handles
change shape and color and a center of rotation indicator appears in the object center,
as shown by the example in Figure 48.
– Click again on a selected object, or a group of objects. DO NOT double click. A double
click is used to switch an object into text mode.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar
(Figure 40 on page 49) and select Rotate from the pop up menu.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 53

 Figure 48: Example of rotation mode

Figure 49: Transformations toolbar

– Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar to open the
Transformations toolbar (Figure 49) and select Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape to indicate
rotation mode.
4) Click on the corner selection handle and drag it to rotate the object. Release the
selection handle when the required object rotation is reached.

Notes
The rotation center is normally located at the center of an object. To change the
rotation center position, click on the rotation center and drag it until it is at the
required position. The rotation center can be repositioned outside of the object.
Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because it occurs in a three
dimensional space and not in a single plane. See Chapter 7, Working with 3D
Objects for more information.

Slanting objects
The axis used for slanting an object is the object edge directly opposite the center handle being
used to slant the object. This axis is fixed in location while the other sides of the object move in
relation to it as the selection handle is dragged. In Figure 50 the selection handle at the center of
the object bottom has been used to slant the object.
1) Select an object and use one of the following methods to switch to rotation mode. The
selection handles change shape and color and a center of rotation indicator appears in
the object center.
– Click again on a selected object.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar
and select Rotate from the pop up menu.

54 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 50: Example of slanting objects
– Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar to open the
Transformations toolbar, then select Rotate.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle at the midpoint of the object top, bottom, left or
right sides and the cursor changes shape to indicate slanting direction.
3) Click and drag the selection handle to slant the object. Release the cursor when the
desired object slant is reached. A ghosted object outline being slanted appears and the
current angle of slanting is shown in the Status Bar.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key while rotating or slanting an object restricts
movement to 15° steps. This is the default behavior of the Shift key. However, if
When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools > Options >
LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw >
Grid), the Shift key action is reversed and rotation or slanting is restricted to 15° of
movement unless the Shift key is pressed.

Setting exact position, size, rotation and slant

Using the cursor to position and resize objects is not exact. If greater accuracy is required to
position and size an object, it is recommended to use the Position and Size dialog (Figure 51), or
the Position and Size panel (Figure 52 on page 57) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• To open the Position and Size dialog, select an object and use one of the following
methods:
– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
• To open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select an
object, then click on Properties on the Sidebar and click on the chevron > on the
Position and Size title bar to open the panel.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 55

 Figure 51: Position and Size dialog

Position and Size

Position
Specifies the position of a selected object location on a page. The units of measurement
used for X//Y coordinates, and object width and height are set by going to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice Draw > General).
Position X
Enter the horizontal distance required to move an object relative to the base point
selected in the grid.
Position Y
Enter the vertical distance required to move an object relative to the base point
selected in the grid.
Base point
Select a base point in the grid and then enter the amount required to shift an object
relative to the base point that is selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The
base points correspond to the selection handles on an object. This option is only
available in the Position and Size dialog.
Size
Specify the amount required to resize a selected object with respect to a selected base
point.

56 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 52: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Width
Enter a width for a selected object.
Height
Enter a height for a selected object.
Keep ratio
Maintains proportions when resizing a selected object.
Base point
Select a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for a selected
object in the Width and Height boxes. This option is only available in the Position and
Size dialog.
Protect
This option is only available in the Position and Size dialog.
Position
Prevents changes to position or size for a selected object.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 57

 Size
Prevents object resizing.
Adapt
When selected allows the size of a text box to adjust and match the size of text being
entered into a text box. This option is only available in the Position and Size dialog for
text boxes.
Fit width to text
Expands an object width to the text width, if the object is smaller than the text.
Fit height to text
Expands an object height to the text height, if the object is smaller than the text.

Note
The position and size default location for a base point is the upper left corner of the
drawing area. This base point can be temporarily changed to make positioning or
dimensioning simpler by clicking on a position corresponding to the required base
point location. This change in base point is only valid for single use and the base
point is reset to the default position of top left corner when the Position and Size
dialog is closed.

Rotating objects
To accurately rotate an object, click on the Rotation tab of the Position and Size dialog to open
the Rotation page (Figure 53). The options allow the rotation angle and pivot point location to be
defined. Alternatively, use the available options for rotation in the Position and Size panel in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 52).
Pivot Point
A selected object is rotated around a specified pivot point and this option is only available
in the Position and Size dialog. The default position for the pivot point is the center of an
object. The pivot point can be moved from its default position by changing the setting for
Position X and/or Position Y, or selecting a position in Default settings.

Figure 53: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page

58 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Position X
Enter a horizontal distance from the page left edge to change the pivot point position.
Position Y
Enter a vertical distance from the page top edge to change the pivot point position.
Default settings
Select the pivot point position. Default position is the center of an object. Changing the
pivot point is valid for single use only and is reset to the default central position when
the Position and Size dialog is closed.
Rotation Angle
Specify the number of degrees required to rotate a selected object. This option is only
available in the Position and Size dialog.
Angle
Enter the number of degrees that required to rotate the selected object.
Default settings
Click on the indicator to rotate the object. The number of degrees rotated is shown in
the Angle box.

Slant and corner radius

To accurately set a corner radius or slant angle of an object, click on the Slant & Corner Radius
tab of the Position and Size dialog (Figure 54) to open the Slant & Corner Radius page.
Options for slant and corner radius are only available in the Position and Size dialog.
Corner Radius
This option is only available for the corners of a rectangular or square object that has
been created using the Legacy Rectangles toolbar. This toolbar is optional and is opened
by going to View > Toolbars > Legacy Rectangles on the Menu bar. If this option is
grayed out, the corner radius cannot set.
Radius
Enter the circle radius that is to be used to round corners. The larger the value for
corner radius set, rounded corners become more visible.
Slant
Slants the selected object along the object bottom edge.
Angle
Enter the slant axis angle. The slant angle relates to how much an object inclines or
slants from its normal vertical position on a drawing.

Figure 54: Position and Size dialog — Slant & Corner Radius page

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 59

 Figure 55: Example of corner point adjustment
Control Point 1/Control Point 2
These control points are special handles or dots that are available on some shapes and
are used to change the properties of a shape. If these options are grayed out, then the
shape does not have a special handle and coordinates cannot be set.
Enter a value to set the special handle X and Y coordinates in relation to the shape top
left corner. The example shown in Figure 55 shows the shape change after adjusting the
X coordinate of Control Point 1 of the special handle.

Note
For more information on control points, see “Changing object shape” on page 67.

Using grid and snap functions

Position objects accurately using the grid and snap functions available in Draw. It is
recommended to use the highest practical zoom value for a drawing when using the grid and
snap functions. Two different functions can be used at the same time, for example, snapping to a
guide line and page edge. It is recommended to only activate snap functions that are required.

Configuring grid and snap

To configure the grid and snap functions in a drawing, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice
Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Grid) on the Menu bar
to open the Options LibreOffice Grid dialog (Figure 56). Grid and snap functions are displayed
and selected using one of the following methods:
• Using the Options LibreOffice Grid dialog.
• Right clicking on a drawing and selecting options from the context menu.
• Using the tools on the Options toolbar (Figure 57). If the Options toolbar is not open, go
to View > Toolbars > Options on the Menu bar.

Grid and snap functions

Grid
Specifies the settings for a drawing configurable grid to determine the exact position of
objects. Also, this grid can be set to match the snap grid. If the snap grid is activated, but
have to move or create individual objects without snap positions, keep the Shift key
pressed to deactivate this function.

60 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 56: Options LibreOffice Draw dialog — Grid page

Figure 57: Options toolbar

Snap to grid
Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid
points. To change the snap grip status only for the current action, drag an object while
holding down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘).
Visible grid
Specifies whether to display the grid.
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and
subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
Vertical
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 61

 Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when the object is
released. This setting can also be defined using Snap to Snap Guides on the Options
toolbar.
To the page margins
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the nearest page margin. The
cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. This function
can also be accessed using Snap to Page Margins in the Options toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the border of the nearest
graphic object. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap
range. This function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Border in the Options
toolbar.
To object points
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the points of the nearest
graphic object. This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is
in the snap range. This function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Points in
the Options toolbar.
Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. Snaps to a snap
point if the cursor is closer than the distance selected.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°)
when creating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing
the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the object. This also applies to an ellipse where
a circle is created based on the ellipse longest diameter. When Extend edges is not
selected, a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that is
selected. To rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when
rotating. Release the object when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this is useful for
reducing editing points.

Snap to grid
Using Snap to Grid
Snap to Grid is used when moving an object onto a grid point in a drawing. This function is
selected using one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Snap to Grid from context menu.
• Click on Snap to Grid on the Options toolbar.

62 |Draw Guide 24.8

Displaying grid
Use one of the following methods to display or hide the grid in a drawing:
• Go to View > Grid and Helplines > Display Grid on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Grid on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Grid and Helplines > Display Grid from the context
menu.
• Select Visible grid in the Options LibreOffice Draw Grid dialog.

Changing color of grid points

By default and depending on the computer setup, grid points are gray and not always easy to
see. Change the grid point color as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Application Colors (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > LibreOffice > Application Colors) to open the Application Colors dialog
(Figure 58).
2) Go to Drawing/Presentation and select a more suitable color for the grid from the
drop-down list.
3) Click on OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Figure 58: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors page

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 63

 Figure 59: New Snap Guide dialog

Snap points and lines

Snap lines and snap points are not part of the grid, but are inserted to position an object at a
specific place in a drawing. Snap lines can either be horizontally or vertically and appear as
dashed lines. Snap points appear as small crosses with dashed lines. Snap points and snap
lines do not appear in printed output.

Inserting snap points and snap lines

To insert a snap point or snap line, go to Insert > Snap Guide on the Menu bar to open the New
Snap Guide dialog (Figure 59).
Position
Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left page corner.
X:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the page left
edge.
Y:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the page top
edge.
Type
Specifies the type of snap object being inserted.
Point
Inserts a snap point.
Vertical
Inserts a vertical snap line.
Horizontal
Inserts a horizontal snap line.

Displaying snap points and lines

Use one of the following methods to display snap points and lines in a drawing:
• Go to View > Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Snap Guides in the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides from the
context menu.

64 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 60: Edit Snap Point dialog

Figure 61: Edit Snap Line dialog

Editing snap points

1) Right-click on the snap point and select Edit Snap Point from the context menu to open
the Edit Snap Point dialog (Figure 60).
2) Enter new X and Y coordinate settings for the snap point and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click and drag a snap point to a new position on a drawing.

Editing snap lines

1) Right-click on the snap line and select Edit Snap Line from the context menu to open
the Edit Snap Line dialog (Figure 61).
2) Enter a new X coordinate setting for vertical snap lines or a new Y coordinate setting for
horizontal snap lines and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click and drag a snap line to a new position on a drawing.

Deleting snap points and lines

• To delete a snap point, drag it back to a ruler or right-click on the snap point and select
Delete Snap Point from the context menu.
• To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler or right-click on the snap line and select
Delete Snap Line from the context menu.

Configuring snap range

To configure the snap range of when an object snaps to a position in the drawing:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice Draw > Grid) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Grid
dialog.
2) Enter the number of pixels to set the proximity of when the object will snap into position
in the Snap range box. The default setting is 5 pixels.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 65

 3) Click OK to set the new snap range and close the dialog.

Using Helplines
Helplines are a Draw function for positioning of objects. Helplines are displayed while the object
is being moved. Helplines extend from the object edges to the rulers at the top and left side of a
drawing and do not have a snap function (Figure 62).
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > View (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice Draw > View) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Draw View
dialog (Figure 63).
2) Select Helplines when moving option or click Helplines While Moving in the Options
toolbar.
3) Click OK to save the selection and close the dialog.

Figure 62: Example of using helplines when moving objects

Figure 63: Options LibreOffice Draw View dialog

66 |Draw Guide 24.8

Changing object shape
Regular shapes
When creating regular shapes in a drawing, some shapes have one or more control dots
displayed in a different color to the selection handles after selecting an object. When the cursor
hovers over one of these dots, it changes shape. Click and drag a control dot to modify the
object shape. For example, increasing corner radius of a rounded rectangle or square, changes
the angles of an arc, and so on. Control dots have different functions according for each shape.

Note
After converting a regular shape to a curve or polygon, the shape of a regular shape
can be changed and points can be edited. See “Curves and polygons” on page 70
and “Editing points” on page 71 for more information.

Basic shapes
The following basic shapes on the Basic Shapes subtoolbar (Figure 64), listed in Table 3, have
control dots.

Figure 64: Basic Shapes subtoolbar

Table 3: Basic shapes with control dots
Basic Shapes Control dot description
Changes the curve radius that replaces the angled corners of a
Rectangle, Rounded
rectangle or square.
Changes the curve radius that replaces the angled corners of a
Square, Rounded
rectangle or square.
Parallelogram Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Trapezoid Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Circle Pie Changes the size of the filled sector.
Block Arc Changes both internal diameter and size of the filled area.
Isosceles Triangle Changes the shape and type of the triangle.
Hexagon Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Octagon Changes the internal angles between the sides.
Cylinder Changes the perspective.
Cube Changes the perspective.
Folded Corner Changes the folded corner size.
Cross Changes the thickness of the cross four arms.
Frame Changes the frame thickness.
Ring Changes the ring internal diameter.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 67

Symbol shapes
The following symbol shapes on the Symbol Shapes subtoolbar (Figure 65), listed in Table 4,
have control dots.

Figure 65: Symbol Shapes subtoolbar

Table 4: Symbol shapes with control dots
Symbol Shapes Control dot description
Smiley Face Changes the smile on the face.
Heart Changes the symbol shape.
Sun Changes the symbol shape.
Moon Changes the symbol shape.
Prohibited Changes the ring thickness and the diagonal bar.
Square Bevel Changes the bevel thickness.
Octagon Bevel Changes the bevel thickness.
Diamond Bevel Changes the bevel thickness.
Double Bracket Changes the bracket curvature.
Left Bracket Changes the bracket curvature.
Right Bracket Changes the bracket curvature.
Double Brace Changes the bracket curvature.
Left Brace Changes the brace curvature and the position of the point.
Right Brace Changes the brace curvature and the position of the point.

Block arrows
The following block arrows on the Block Arrows subtoolbar (Figure 66), listed in Table 5, have
control dots.

Figure 66: Block Arrows subtoolbar

Table 5: Block arrows with control dots
Block Arrows Control dot description
Right Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Left Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

68 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Block Arrows Control dot description
Down Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Up Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Left and Right Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Up and Down Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Circular Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
4-way Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Chevron Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.
Pentagon Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.
Striped Right Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Up, Right and Down Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Notched Right Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Up and Right Arrow Changes the arrow shape and thickness.
Right Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Left Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Down Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Up Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Left and Right Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Up and Down Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
4-way Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.
Up and Right Arrow Callout Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Callouts
For all callouts on the Callouts subtoolbar (Figure 67) use control dots to change length, position
and angle of a pointer.

Figure 67: Callouts subtoolbar

Stars and banners

The following stars and banners on the Stars and Banners subtoolbar (Figure 68), listed in
Table 6, have control dots.

Figure 68: Stars and Banners subtoolbar

Table 6: Stars and banners with control dots
Stars and Banners Control dot description
4-Point Star Changes the star points thickness and shape.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 69

 Stars and Banners Control dot description
8-Point Star Changes the star points thickness and shape.
24-Point Star Changes the star points thickness and shape.
Vertical Scroll Changes the scroll width and shape.
Horizontal Scroll Changes the scroll width and shape.
Doorplate Changes the inward curvature of the corners.

Curves and polygons

Bézier curves
The editing of curves and polygons depends on the mathematics of Bézier curves1. Fully
explaining Bézier curves goes beyond the scope of this Draw Guide. For more information on
drawing and manipulating Bézier curves, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
Editing a Bézier curve is the movement of points or tangents passing through a point. Each
tangent has a control point at each end and a junction point where it meets a curve. The relative
angle and distance between control points determines the curve shape. Figure 69 shows what
happens to a square and moving only one point on the square.

Converting objects to curve or polygon

When changing the shape of an object and before modifying the points on an object, it must be
converted to a curve or a polygon. Depending on what kind of shape and effect required, use
one of the following methods to create a curve or a polygon:
• After selecting an object, go to Shape > Convert on the Menu bar and select either To
Curve or To Polygon.
• Right click on an object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon from the context
menu.

Figure 69: Example of creating different shapes using tangent points

1 Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, who developed the technique in the 1960s while
working as an engineer for the Renault car manufacturer. The technology was intended to make
modeling the surface of vehicles easier.

70 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 70: Edit Points toolbar

Editing points
Many different shapes can be created by moving either the point, or one or both of the round
handle points at either end of the tangent, as shown in Figure 69. Points can be added, deleted,
or points type changed using tools available on the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 70).
1) Convert a shape to a curve or polygon.
2) Select the converted object and then select the points editing mode using one of the
following methods:
– Go to Edit > Points on the Menu bar.
– Click on Toggle Edit Point Mode on the Standard toolbar.
– Right click on the converted object and select Toggle Edit Point Mode from the
context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
3) Click on an object point to change the object shape. The Edits Points toolbar opens and
the tools become active when a point is selected. Tangents also appear attached to the
selected point.
4) Use the various tools on the Edit Points toolbar to add, delete, or change the point type.
5) Click and drag a point to move the point and change object shape.
6) If the selected object is a curve, click on and drag the round points at the end of a
tangent to change the object shape.
7) When satisfied with the shape, click outside of the object to cancel points editing mode
and close the Edit Points toolbar.

Point types
The available tools on the Edit Points toolbar depend on the object and type of object point that
has been selected.
Move Points
Activates a mode allowing movement of points. Click and drag the selected point to
another location.
Insert Points
Activates the insert mode for inserting points. A point is inserted onto a selected object
each time a click is made. The object also changes shape to include a new point into the
object border. Inserted points are a smooth point.
Delete Points
Deletes points from the selected object. Select Delete Points and then click on a point to
delete. To delete several points, hold down the Shift key as each point is selected for
deletion, then click on Delete Points.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 71

 Convert To Curve
Converts a curve into a straight line, or a straight line into a curve. If a single point is
selected, the curve before the point is converted. If two points are selected, the curve
between both points is converted. If more than two points are selected and each time
Convert to Curve is clicked, a different portion of the curve is converted. If necessary,
round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round
points.
If a curve section is a straight line, the line end points have a maximum of one control
point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted
back to a curve.
Close Bézier
Closes a curve by connecting the last point with the first point. This is indicated by an
enlarged square.
Split Curve
Select the point or points, then click on Split Curve.
Corner Point
Converts a selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable
control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line does not go straight
through a corner point, but creates a corner.
To create a corner point, a smooth or a symmetrical point must be inserted first and then
converted to a corner point by clicking on Corner Point.
Smooth Transition
Converts a corner point, or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of a
corner point are aligned in parallel and are only moved simultaneously. Control points
may maybe different lengths, allowing variation in the degree of curvature.

Tangents
Before using tangents on an object, it must be converted to a curve. Tangents are only used on
curves. If an object has been converted to a polygon and a tangent is added, the object is
automatically converted to a curve.

Note
The tangent angle relates to an object shape that is changed by selecting a tangent
control point at the end of a tangent and moving it. As the tangent angle is changed,
the object shape changes in response.

Symmetric transition
Symmetric transition converts a corner or smooth point into a symmetrical point. Tangents have
the same length and are aligned in a straight line, as shown in Figure 71. Tangents can only be
moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.
1) Convert an object to a curve or polygon.
2) Select the converted object and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select a point to change to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Symmetric Transition in the Edit Points toolbar. The straight line on each side
of the symmetric transition point is converted to a curve.

72 |Draw Guide 24.8

 5) Click and drag a tangent control handle to change the object curvature and shape. Any
change to one tangent is carried over symmetrically to the other tangent.

Smooth transition
Converts selected points into corner points. Tangents are aligned in a straight line and move
simultaneously. Tangents can have different lengths with the curvature controlled by the longest
tangent which is the largest curvature, as shown in Figure 72.
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Select the converted object and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Smooth Transition on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag a tangent control handle to change the object shape. This creates an
asymmetric tangent with the largest curvature on the tangent longest side.

Figure 71: Example of symmetric transition

Figure 72: Example of smooth transition

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 73

 Figure 73: Example of changing corner point

Corner point
Converts a selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control
points, independent from each other. It is possible to independently change the angle on each
side of a tangent using the tangent central point as a corner point, as shown in Figure 73.
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Select the converted object and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a corner point.
4) Click on Corner Point on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag the end of a tangent to change its angle. Each tangent can be moved
independently creating spikes and troughs in an object shape.

Points
Moving points
When moving points, the object border on both sides of the point follows the point movement
changing the object shape. This also referred to as distorting objects.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Select the converted object and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Move Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Place the cursor on the selected point, then click and drag the point creating a new
shape. Figure 74 illustrates how a different shape is created from a circle by dragging the
left hand side point to the left.

Inserting points
A smooth point is inserted into a selected object each time there is a click. Clicking and dragging
an inserted point changes object shape at the new point, as shown in Figure 75.

74 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 74: Example of moving points

Figure 75: Example of inserting and moving points

1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Select the converted object and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Click on Insert Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) Click on the object border, or inside the object, to insert a point, then drag the cursor to
move the inserted point and create a new shape.
5) Release the inserted point when the required shape is created.
6) If required, click and drag the end of a tangent to change its angle. Each tangent can be
moved independently creating spikes and troughs in an object shape.

Deleting points
Figure 76 is an example of what happens when three points on the left were deleted from a
circle. The left image is a the full circle and the right image is where three points have been
deleted creating a new shape.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) To delete a single point, proceed as follows
a) Select the point for deletion.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 75

 Figure 76: Example of deleting points
b) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) To delete several points at the same time, proceed as follows:
a) Hold down the Shift key.
b) Select all the points for deletion.
c) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.

Eliminating points
Eliminate Points on the Edit Points toolbar only functions on lines with multiple points. These
lines are created when a curve is converted to a line using Convert to Curve. An example of
creating a straight line and eliminating points is shown in Figure 77.
1) Convert the curve to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the curve into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the curve with multiple points and convert to a line, see “Converting curves or
lines” below.
4) Select the point or points on the line for elimination. The selected point is emphasized.
5) Select Eliminate Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
6) Accurately position the cursor over the selected point, then click and drag the selected
point. As the cursor is dragged, a dotted line forms between the neighboring points.
7) When this dotted line appears to be a straight line between the neighboring points,
release the selected point. The selected point is eliminated and a straight line now exists
between the neighboring points.

Converting curves or lines

Curves and lines are converted using Convert to Curve on the Edit Points toolbar. When a
curve is converted to a line, a straight line is created between selected points on a curve. When
a line is converted to a curve, a curve is created between selected points on a line. An example
of converting a curve to a line is shown in Figure 77.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.

76 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 77: Example of converting curve to a line
(1) Curve with points displayed. (3) Points deleted to create a line section.
(2) Sections between points converted to lines.
3) Select the points for converting from curve to line or from line to curve.
4) Click on Convert to Curve on the Edit Points toolbar. Between the selected points, a
curve is converted into a line or a line is converted into a curve.
5) Delete a point on the converted line to create a straight line.

Splitting objects
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point or points on the object where it is to be split. Keep the Shift key
pressed down when selecting more than one point.
4) Click on Split Curve on the Edit Points toolbar to split or cut the object border at the
selected point. If the object is filled, it will be emptied because the object border is no
longer closed, as shown in Figure 78.
5) Deselect the object, then drag the cut segment and move it away from the original object.

Note
The point where the object was split is now larger than the remaining points visible
on the object.

Closing objects
1) Select an open object (Figure 79).
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 77

 Figure 78: Example of splitting objects

Figure 79: Example of closing objects

3) Select a point where the object has been split. Note that the start point of an object is
larger than the other points visible on the object.
4) Click on Close Bézier in the Edit Points toolbar to close the object. If the open object
was originally a closed and filled object, then the original color fills the object when it is
closed.

78 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes
Formatting lines
In Draw, the term Line indicates a freestanding segment (line), outer edge or border of a shape,
or an arrow. The properties of a line that can be modified are style, width, color, and type of
arrowhead.

Note
For more information on using color when formatting lines, line styles, arrows, and
arrow styles, see “Working with area fills” on page 92.

Line and Filling toolbar

1) Select a line in the drawing.
2) If necessary, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Line and Filling from
the drop-down list to open the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 80).
3) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Style and select a line style from one of the
options in the drop-down list.
4) Either type the line width in the Line Thickness text box, or use the up and down arrows
to change the line width.
5) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of the
available color palettes.
6) If necessary, click on Shadow to add a shadow to the line. The shadow applied uses the
settings set in the Shadow page of the Line dialog (Figure 85 on page 84).
7) If necessary, select from the Select start and end arrowheads for lines drop-down list
the arrowhead type for each end of the line and change the line into an arrow. The left
drop-down list adds an arrow head to the beginning of the line. The right drop-down list
adds an arrow head to the end of the line.
8) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.

Sidebar
1) Select a line in the drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Line to open the Line panel (Figure 81).

Figure 80: Line and Filling toolbar

80 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 81: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
4) In Line, click on Select start and end arrowheads for lines to open the drop-down lists
for arrowhead types for each end of the line and change the line into an arrow.
– Left drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the beginning of the line.
– Right drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the end of the line.
5) In Line, select the type of line required from the Line Style drop-down list.
6) In Thickness, select a line width from the options available in the Select the width of the
line drop-down list, or enter a width in the Custom Line Thickness text box.
7) In Color, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of
the available color palettes.
8) If required, in Transparency enter a percentage amount for line transparency.
9) If required, in Corner style select a corner style for the line from the drop-down list.
10) If required, in Cap style select a cap style for line ends from the drop-down list.
11) Deselect the line to save changes made to the line.
12) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar and open the Line dialog
(Figure 82) for more control over formatting lines.

Line dialog
1) Make sure a line is selected on a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 82) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Line panel title on the Sidebar.
3) Format the line using the options available in the Line dialog. A preview box at the bottom
of the dialog shows the effect of the changes on a line.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 81

 Figure 82: Line dialog — Line page

Line properties
The Line page in the Line dialog is where the basic parameters of the line are set. It is divided
into three sections as follows.
Line properties
Style
Select a line style from the drop-down list.
Color
Select a predefined color from one of the available color palettes.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the line.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of a line. Figure 83 is an example of the effects of different
percentages in transparency levels to lines when placed over an object.
Arrow Styles
This section is only applicable to individual lines and is not used for lines that are the
borders of an object.
Start style
Select from the drop-down list an arrow style or arrowhead for the start of a line.

82 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 83: Example of line transparencies

Figure 84: Example of arrow endings

(1) Default ending (2) Centered ending
End style
Select from the drop-down list an arrow style or arrowhead for the end of a line.
Width
Specifies the thickness of the arrow endings.
Center
Moves the center of the arrow endings to the end point of the line. Figure 84 is an
example of the effects of selecting this option.
Synchronize ends
Makes the two line ends identical.
Corner and Cap Styles
Determines how the connection between two segments of a line looks. To appreciate the
difference between these styles, choose a thick line style and observe how the preview
changes.
Corner style
Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. For a small angle between lines,
a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
Cap style
Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.

Line shadows
The Shadow page of the Line dialog (Figure 85) provides options to add and format a shadow
for a selected line. The settings on this dialog page are also used for shadows applied to other
objects. See “Working with shadows” on page 107 for more information.
To quickly apply a shadow to a line, click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. Using the
Shadow tool creates a shadow using the settings from the Shadow page of the Line dialog.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 83

 Figure 85: Line dialog — Shadow page

Figure 86: Line dialog — Line Styles page

84 |Draw Guide 24.8

Line styles
When creating several lines in a drawing with the same format, using line styles reduce the
requirement of formatting individual lines. LibreOffice includes line styles for use drawings. Line
styles can be created, saved, or deleted. The Line Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 86)
provides the options for using LibreOffice line styles and for creating, or changing line styles.

Creating line styles

1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on Line Styles in the Line dialog to open the Line Styles page.
4) In the Line style drop-down list, select a pre-defined line style to use as a starting point
for creating a line style. An example of the line style appears in the box at the bottom of
the dialog page. This example changes as changes are made to a line style.
5) In the Type drop-down menus, select either Dots or Dash.
– For one line type, select the same type in both Type boxes.
– For alternate line types within a single line, select different types in each Type box.
6) In the Number boxes, specify the number of dots or dashes selected in Type. For
different sized groups of dots or dashes, set a different quantity in each Number box.
7) In the Length boxes, specify the Dash length as a percentage of the line. The Length
option is not available for Dots.
8) In the Spacing box, specify the spacing between the dashes and/or dots as a percentage
of the line. The Spacing option is not available if the option Fit to line width is selected.
9) If required, select Fit to line width so that the new style fits the line width when used in a
drawing.
10) For the current document only, create a new line style, or modify a line style as follows:
a) Click on Add or Modify to open the Name dialog.
b) Enter a unique name for the new or modified line style.
c) Click on OK to save the new or modified line style and close the Name dialog.
11) Click on OK to close the Line dialog and the new line style is ready for use in the current
drawing only.

Notes
To use the new or modified line style in other drawings, the line style must be saved
using Save Line Styles.
When creating or modifying line styles, it is recommended to use a unique name for
the line style. This prevents a LibreOffice line style from being overwritten and
causing formatting problems in other drawings or documents that use LibreOffice line
styles.

Saving line styles

1) Create a new line style, but do not close the Line dialog.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 85

 2) Click on Save Line Styles on the Line Styles page to open a file browser window at the
correct location for saving line styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the file extension SOD for the line style in the Name box.
4) Click on Save to save the line style and close the file browser window. The new line style
is now available for use in new drawings and documents.

Importing line styles

LibreOffice line styles are installed during the installation of LibreOffice. Compatible line styles
can also be imported and used in LibreOffice. Any line styles added to LibreOffice must use the
file extension SOD for the style to be recognised by LibreOffice.
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog and click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
3) Click on Load Line Styles at the bottom right of the Line Styles page to open a file
browser window at the correct location for line styles.
4) Select a style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window. The file extension
for line styles is SOD.
5) Click Open to load the line style into LibreOffice. The line style becomes available for
other LibreOffice drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting line styles

1) Open the Line dialog and click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
2) Select the line style for deletion from the Line style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog.
4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Note
When deleting line styles, make sure the line style is not used in another document.
It is recommended to only delete line styles that have been created, or imported. DO
NOT delete LibreOffice line styles. This prevents any formatting problems in other
documents where a LibreOffice line style has been used.

Arrow styles
Use the Arrow Styles page (Figure 87) in the Line dialog to create new arrow styles, modify
existing arrow styles, or load previously saved arrow styles.

Creating arrow styles

Any shape can be used as an arrowhead, but the shape must be convertible to a curve. A curve
is something drawn without lifting a pencil. For example, a star can be converted to a curve, but
a smiley face cannot.
1) Select a shape, or create a shape that can be converted to a curve for use as a new
arrowhead. The part of the shape that is going to be point of the arrowhead must be at
the top of the shape.

86 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 87: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page

Figure 88: Example of creating an arrowhead

2) Select the shape and convert to a curve using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the shape and select Convert > To Curve from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve on the Menu bar.
3) With the shape selected, open the Arrow Styles page in the Line dialog.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 87

 4) Click on Add and type a unique name for the new arrow style in the Name dialog that
opens, then click OK. The new arrowhead style is displayed in the preview box of the
Line dialog and is listed the bottom of the Arrow style drop-down list.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog. The new arrow style is available
only in the current document.

Notes
The point in an arrowhead being created must be positioned at the top of the shape.
If necessary, rotate the shape until the point is at the top of the shape as shown in
Figure 88.
Some shapes cannot be used as an arrowhead. This is indicated by rectangular
blocks appearing at each end of the line in the preview box on the Line Styles page
in the Line dialog.
When creating an arrow style, it is recommended to use a unique name for the arrow
style. This prevents one of the LibreOffice arrow styles from being overwritten and
causing formatting problems in other drawings that use the LibreOffice arrow styles.
The new arrow style created is available only for use in the current drawing. To use
the new arrow style in other drawings, the arrow style must be saved using the Save
Arrow Styles option.

Saving arrow styles

1) Create a new arrow style as described in “Creating arrow styles” on page 86, but do not
close the Line dialog.
2) Click on the Save arrow styles icon on the Arrow Styles page to open a file browser
window at the correct location for saving arrow styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the file extension SOE for the arrow style.
4) Click on Save to save the arrow style and close the file browser window. The new arrow
style is now available for use in new documents.

Importing arrow styles

LibreOffice provides standard arrow styles when installed on a computer. However, compatible
arrow styles can be imported and used in LibreOffice. Any arrow styles installed in LibreOffice
must use the file extension SOE.
1) Open the Line dialog and click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Click on the Load arrow styles icon on the Arrow Styles page to open a file browser
window at the correct location for arrow styles.
3) Select an arrow style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window
4) Click Open to load the arrow style into the drawing. The arrow style also becomes
available for other LibreOffice documents.
5) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting arrow styles

1) Open the Line dialog and click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Select the arrow style for deletion from the Arrow style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog that
opens.

88 |Draw Guide 24.8

 4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Note
When deleting arrow styles, make sure the arrow style is not used in another
document. It is recommended to only delete arrow styles that have been created, or
imported. Do not to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined arrow styles to prevent
formatting problems in other documents using LibreOffice arrow styles.

Area fills
Area fill refers to the inside of an object that has an unbroken border, for example a rectangle,
circle, star, pentagon and so on. An area fill can be None, Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern, or
Hatch, as shown by the examples in Figure 89. Also, an area fill can be partly or wholly
transparent and throw a shadow.
The Area dialog provides tools and options for selecting and editing area fills. Area fills are also
available in drop-lists in the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and in Area
Style/Filling on the Line and Filling toolbar, but have reduced options and different fill types.

Area dialog formatting

1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog (Figure 90) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Click on Area in the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area panel title on the Sidebar.

Figure 89: Example of area fill types

(1) None (3) Gradient (5) Pattern
(2) Color (4) Image (6) Hatch

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 89

 Figure 90: Area dialog — Area Color page
3) Click on Area to open the Area page.
4) Select the type of area fill from the available options (None, Color, Gradient, Image,
Pattern, or Hatch).
5) Select the required area fill options that become available for each type of area fill
selected.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes to the area fill.

Sidebar formatting
1) Make sure an object with an area fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar, then click on the down chevron ˅ on the left of the
Area panel titlebar to open the Area panel (Figure 91).
3) Select a fill type (None, Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, or Pattern) from the Fill:
drop-down list.
4) Select a fill effect from the options available for each fill type from the Fill: drop-down list.
5) If required, select a transparency type and a transparency percentage from the
Transparency drop-down lists.
6) Deselect the object to save the changes to the area fill.

90 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 91: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Note
The type of transparency effect selected for an area fill changes the options available
for a transparency in the Area panel on the Sidebar.

Line and Filling toolbar formatting

1) If Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 80 on page 80) is not open, go to View > Toolbars >
Line and Filling on the Menu bar.
2) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
3) Select a fill type (None, Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, or Pattern) from the Area
Style/Filling drop-down list.
4) Select a fill effect from the options available for each fill type from the drop-down list. The
fill effects available change for each fill type selected.
5) Deselect the object to save the changes to the area fill.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 91

Working with area fills

Note
The following instructions for area fills use the Area dialog as the main method of
selecting and editing an area fill. The tools and options available in the Area panel in
the Properties deck on the Sidebar and on the Line and Filling toolbar are similar, but
have reduced options and different names.

Color fills
Selecting color fill
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog (Figure 90 on page 90), then click on Color to
open the options available for a color fill.
3) In Colors, select the required palette from the available options in the Palette drop-down
list.
4) Click on the color required in the selected palette. All color fills available are solid colors.
The Active preview box shows the present color fill of a selected object. After selecting a
color, a preview of the selected color appears in the New preview box.
5) Alternatively, use one of the following methods to select a color.
– Enter the individual RGB values, on a 0 to 255 scale, in the appropriate text box.
– Enter the Hex number of a color in the Hex text box.
– If a color has been used before, then select the required color from the colors available
in Recent Colors.
6) To revert back to the original color, click on Reset to remove any changes made.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Creating custom colors using Area dialog

1) Select a filled object to create a color.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to
open the options available for a color fill.
3) Create a custom color using one of the following methods:
4) Specify the values of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) on a 0 to 255 scale.
5) Click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 92), see “Creating custom colors
using Pick a Color dialog” below.
6) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
7) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to Custom Palette.
8) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new custom color appears
as a fill in the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Creating custom colors using Pick a Color dialog

1) Select a filled object to create a color.

92 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 92: Pick a Color dialog
2) Open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 92) using one of the following methods:
– Click on Pick on the Color page of the Area dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color in the Area panel of the Properties deck on
the Sidebar and select Custom Color.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color on the Line and Filling toolbar and select
Custom Color.
3) Create a custom color using one of the following methods.
– Select a color range from the colored bar, then, using the cursor, move the target in
the colored box until the cursor is on the color required.
– Enter values for Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) in the RGB text boxes.
– Alternatively, if known, enter the Hex# number in the text box. Hex numbers are
normally used when a specific color has been created for a company logo or company
name.
– Alternatively, enter values for Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Brightness (B) in the HSB
text boxes. HSB values do not change the color, but how a color looks.
– Alternatively, enter values for Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Key (K) (black)
in the CMYK text boxes.

Note
A preview of the color being created is shown on the left side of the original color box
below the color selection box. Changing one set of color values also changes the
color values in the other sets of color values.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 93

 4) Click OK to close the Pick a Color dialog and save the changes.
5) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
6) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to Custom Palette.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fill
in the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Deleting custom colors

1) Select a filled object that uses the color fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area panel title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Area, then click on Color to open the Color page.
4) In Colors, select Custom from the Palette drop-down list.
5) Select the color for deletion and click on Delete. There is no confirmation given when
deleting a color.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Only custom colors available in the custom palette can be deleted using the Area
dialog. Colors available in the default LibreOffice color palettes cannot be deleted.

Gradient fills
Several predefined gradients are included when LibreOffice is installed. It is recommended to
create custom gradients that match requirements rather than modifying any predefined
gradients. Predefined gradients may have been used in other objects in a drawing or other
documents.
Custom gradients are saved with a unique name allowing the custom gradient to be used in
other drawings or documents. Custom gradients are placed at the end of the gradients displayed
in the Gradient box on the Gradient page of the Area dialog (Figure 93).

Selecting gradient fills

The following procedure to select a gradient for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the tools
on the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is a
similar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object to be filled is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to
open the options available for a gradient fill.
3) In Gradient, select the required gradient from the list of available gradients and the
gradient appears in Preview.

94 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 93: Area dialog — Area Gradient page
4) To override the default gradient transition of a selection, deselect Automatic in Options
and then enter the values for Type, Increment, Center, Angle, Border, From Color and To
Color to modify the gradient to the requirements. As changes are made, the gradient
displayed in Preview also changes indicating how the gradient will look. For more
information on gradient options, see Table 7: Gradient options.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The gradient area fill then
appears in the selected object.

Note
Selecting and modifying a gradient only allows the gradient to be used in the drawing
being created. If a modified gradient is to be used in other drawings or documents,
then create a custom gradient and save it with a unique name. See “Creating custom
gradients” on page 96.
Table 7: Gradient options
Gradient property Meaning
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a straight
Linear gradient
line.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from the
Axial gradient
object center to the object edges in two opposite directions.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 95

 Gradient property Meaning
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a circular
Radial gradient
pattern.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in an
Ellipsoid gradient
elliptical pattern.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from the
Quadratic gradient
object edges to the object center in four directions.
The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from the
Square gradient
object edges to the object center in a square pattern.
Enter the number of steps for blending the two colors of the gradient.
Increment
By default this is set to Automatic.
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify these
Center X
values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify these
Center Y
values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.
Angle For all gradient types, modifies the angle of the gradient axis.
Increase this value to make the gradient start further away from the
Border
border of the shape.
The start color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of the
From Color
color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.
The end color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of the
To Color
color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

Creating custom gradients

To use a modified gradient in other drawings or documents, a custom gradient has to be saved
with a unique name.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to
open the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a gradient and modify it using the options given in Table 7: Gradient options. As
changes are made, the gradient displayed in Preview also changes indicating how the
modified gradient looks.
4) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
5) Enter a unique name for the new gradient, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom gradient is placed at the end of the gradients displayed in Gradient and
becomes available for use in other drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Modifying custom gradients

1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to
open the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a custom gradient in Gradient. Custom gradients appear below the predefined
gradients in Gradient.

96 |Draw Guide 24.8

 4) Enter the new values for the gradient options that need to be changed. See Table 7:
Gradient options for more information on gradient options. Depending on the type of
gradient selected, some options may not be available.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original gradient, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom gradient. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom gradient.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
Using the Modify option on the Gradient page in the Area dialog permanently
changes a gradient and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom
gradients and not the default LibreOffice gradients.

Renaming gradients
1) Select the object that uses the gradient that is going to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to
open the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Right-click on the gradient and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom gradients

1) Select an object that uses a gradient fill.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) In the Gradient box, select the custom gradient for deletion.
4) Right click on the gradient and select Delete from the context menu.
5) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete custom gradients that have been
created. Deleting or renaming a predefined gradient that is installed with LibreOffice
may cause problems in drawings and documents that use one of the gradients.

Advanced gradient controls

LibreOffice provides advanced gradient controls on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 94).
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar, or click on
Transformations in the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Transformations toolbar.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 97

 Figure 94: Transformations toolbar

Figure 95: Example of using interactive gradient tool

4) Click on Interactive gradient tool in the Transformations toolbar. This displays a dashed
line connecting two colored squares (Figure 95) filled with colors in the From Color and
To Color being used for the selected gradient.
5) Select the type of gradient required for the object from the options in the Type drop-down
list. Properties available for adjustment depend on the gradient type selected, as
explained below. Moving the squares has different effects depending on gradient type,
see Table 8: Changing gradient properties for information.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Moving the squares creates different effects depending on the type of gradient. For
example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient are always
situated either side of the center point of the object.
Table 8: Changing gradient properties
Gradient type Changing gradient properties
Move From Color square to change where the gradient starts (border value).
Linear
Move To Color square to change the orientation (angle value).
Move To Color square to change both the angle and border properties of the
Axial
gradient. Only the To Color square can be moved.
Move From Color square to modify the border property to set the width of the
Radial gradient circle. Move To Color square to change the point where the gradient
ends (Center X and Center Y values).
Move From Color square to modify the border property to set the size of the
Ellipsoid gradient ellipsoid. Move To Color square to change the angle of the ellipsoid
axis and the axis itself.
Move From Color square to modify the border property to set the size of the
Quadratic gradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move To
Color square to change the center of the gradient.

98 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Gradient type Changing gradient properties
Move From Color square to modify the border property to set the size of the
Square gradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move To
Color square to change the center of the gradient.

Image fills
Several predefined images are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. The content
of the supplied images cannot be edited, but the display settings can be changed. Also, images
can be imported from other sources.

Selecting images
The following procedure to select an image for an area fill uses the Image page of the Area
dialog (Figure 96). Using the tools on the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar is a similar procedure, but available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image to
open the options available for an image fill.
3) In Image, select the required image from the list of available images and it appears in
Preview. Alternatively, click on Add/Import to open a file browser window, then select a
file to use as an image fill.

Figure 96: Area dialog — Area Image page

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 99

 4) If necessary, change the values in Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset
to modify the image. For more information on image options, see Table 9: Image options.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original image, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The image fill then appears in
the selected object.
Table 9: Image options
Bitmap option Meaning
When this option is selected, the position and size of the
Style — Custom position/size
image in the object can be specified.
When this option is selected, the image is tiled to fill the area.
Style — Tiled The size of the image used for the tiling is determined by the
Size settings
When this option is selected, an image is stretched to fill the
Style — Stretched
object area.
Sets the width of the image. For example, 100% means that
Size — Width the image is resized to occupy the whole fill area width, 50%
means that the width of the image is half that of the fill area.
Sets the height of the image. For example, 100% means that
Size — Height the image is resized to occupy the whole fill area height, 50%
means that the height of the image is half that of the fill area.
When selected, image size is given as a percentage for Width
Size — Scale and Height. When deselected, the actual size of the image is
given for Width and Height.
Position Specifies the anchoring point of the image.
Sets the offset for the width of the image in percentage values.
50% offset means that LibreOffice Draw places the middle part
Tiling Position — X-Offset
of the image width at the anchor point and start tiling from
there.
Sets the offset for the height of the image in percentage
values. 50% offset means that LibreOffice Draw places the
Tiling Position — Y-Offset
middle part of the image height at the anchor point and start
tiling from there.
Offsets the columns of tiled images by the percentage entered
Tiling Offset in the box so that two subsequent columns of images are not
aligned.

Editing images
1) Select an object for editing that contains an image as a fill, or insert an image into a
selected object
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image to
open the options available for an image fill.
3) Select an image from the options available in Image to use and edit as a fill. Note that
imported images are also available. The selected image appears in Preview.
4) Change the values for Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset to the
requirements. For more information on image options, see Table 9: Image options.
Examples of image or bitmap fills and the properties used are shown in Figure 97.

100 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 97: Examples of image fill
(1) Original image.
(2) Width/height 25% scaled. Anchor top left corner. No offset.
(3) Width/height 25% scaled. Anchor top right. Row offset 50%.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original image, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Supplied images cannot be edited, but the display settings for placement and tiling
can be changed.

Importing images
1) Select an object to import an image into the object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image to
open the options available for an image fill.
3) Click on Add/Import and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the directory containing the image file, then select the file and click Open.
5) Enter a unique name for the new image in the Name dialog that opens, then click OK to
close the Name dialog. The imported image appears at the bottom of the images
displayed in Image.
6) Select the imported image in Image.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The imported image fill appears
in the selected object.

Renaming images
1) Select an object to import an image into the object.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 101

 2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image to
open the options available for an image fill.
3) Right-click on the selected image and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a new name for the image in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting images
1) Make sure the object containing an image fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Image.
3) Right click on the selected image being deleted, then select Delete from the context
menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete images that have been created or
imported. Renaming or deleting images installed with LibreOffice may cause
problems in documents that uses one of these images.

Pattern fills
Several LibreOffice pattern fills are installed during a LibreOffice installation. Custom patterns
can also be created and modified in LibreOffice.

Selecting pattern fills

The following procedure selects a pattern for an area fill using the Area dialog. The tools on the
Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar have a similar
procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to
open the options available for a pattern fill (Figure 98).
3) In Pattern, select the required pattern and the selected pattern appears in Preview.
4) changes are made, the pattern displayed in Preview also changes indicating how the
pattern will look. Any changes will affect only the object being filled.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The pattern fill then appears in
the selected object.

Creating custom patterns

1) Make sure the object containing a pattern fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page.
3) Select the required pattern in Pattern to use as a starting point and the selected pattern
appears in Preview.

102 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 98: Area dialog — Area Pattern page
4) In Options, select a color from the available color palettes for the Foreground Color and
Background Color. The pattern remains the same, but the colors change.
5) In Pattern Editor, click on individual squares to change the color from Foreground Color
to Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color creating a new
pattern.
6) In Preview, check the pattern being created to see if the desired effect is being achieved.
7) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
8) Enter a unique name for the new pattern, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom pattern is placed at the end of the patterns displayed in Pattern and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
9) If necessary, to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes made
are removed.
10) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Modifying custom patterns

1) Make sure the object containing a pattern fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern.
3) Select a custom pattern from the patterns displayed in Pattern and the selected pattern
appears in Preview. Custom patterns are located below predefined patterns in Pattern.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 103

 4) In Pattern Editor, click on each square to change the color from Foreground Color to
Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color modifying the selected
pattern.
5) If necessary, to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes made
are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom pattern. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom pattern.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
To use a modified pattern in other drawings or documents, the custom pattern has to
be saved with a unique name.
Using the Modify option on the Pattern page in the Area dialog permanently
changes a pattern and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom
patterns and not the LibreOffice patterns that were installed.

Renaming patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to
open the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for renaming in Preview and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name for the pattern in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom patterns

1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to
open the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for deletion in the Preview box and select Delete from the
context menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, delete or rename custom patterns that have been
created. Modifying, deleting or renaming one of the LibreOffice patterns that are
installed may cause problems in drawings and documents using one of the patterns.

104 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 99: Area dialog — Area Hatch page

Hatch fills
Hatch fills are similar to pattern fills, but use lines instead of squares. Several predefined hatch
fills are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. Custom hatch fills can also be
created and modified.

Selecting hatch fills

The following procedure to select a hatch for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the tools on
the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is similar,
but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to
open the options available for a hatch fill (Figure 99).
3) Select a hatch from the options shown in Hatch and the selected hatch fill appears in
Preview.
4) If necessary to revert back to the original hatch fill, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The hatch fill then appears in
the selected object.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 105

Creating custom hatch fills
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to
open the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Select the required hatch fill in Hatch as a starting point and the selected hatch fill
appears in Preview.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to
edit the hatch fill to the requirements. For more information on hatch fill options, see
“Table 10: Hatch fill options”.
5) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
6) Enter a unique name for the new hatch fill, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom hatch fill is placed at the end of the hatch fills displayed in Hatch and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new hatch fill appears in
the selected object.
Table 10: Hatch fill options
Hatching option Meaning
Determines the spacing between two lines of the hatch fill. As the value is
Spacing
changed, the preview window is updated.
Use the mini map below the numerical value to quickly set the angle
Angle formed by the line to multiples of 45 degrees. If the required angle is not a
multiple of 45 degrees, enter the desired value in the edit box.
Line type Set single, double, or triple line for the style of the hatch fill.
Line color Use the list to select the color of the lines that will form the hatch fill.
Background color When selected, adds a color fill behind the lines used for the hatch fill.

Note
Using the Modify option on the Hatch page in the Area dialog permanently changes
a hatch fill and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom hatches
and not the LibreOffice hatches that were installed.

Modifying custom hatch fills

1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to
open the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Select a custom hatch fill in Hatch and the selected hatch fill appears in Preview.
Custom hatch fills are located below the predefined hatch fills in Hatch.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to
edit the hatch fill. For more information on hatch options, see “Table 10: Hatch fill
options”.
5) If necessary to revert back to the original hatch fill, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom hatch fill. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom hatch fill.

106 |Draw Guide 24.8

 7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming hatch fills

1) Select the object that contains the hatch fill that is to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to
open the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Right-click on the hatch fill displayed in Hatch and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name for the hatch fill in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom hatch fills

1) Select an object that uses the hatch fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Hatch.
3) In Hatch, select the custom hatch fill for deletion.
4) Right-click on the hatch fill and select Delete from the context menu. Click on Yes to
confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete hatch fills that have been
created. Modifying, renaming or deleting hatch fills that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these hatch fills.

Working with shadows

Shadow options
Shadows can be applied to objects such as lines, shapes and text. The options available for
shadows are as follows:
Position
Select one of nine points determining the direction in which the shadow is cast.
Distance or Angle
Determines the offset distance between the object and the shadow.
Color
Sets the color used for the shadow.
Blur
Sets how much the edges of a shadow are blurred or softened.
Transparency
Determines the amount of transparency for the shadow: 0% opaque shadow, 100%
transparent shadow.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 107

 Figure 100: Area dialog — Shadow page

Note
For more control when applying shadows, use the Shadow page in Area or Line
dialogs. The following information uses the Shadow page in the Area dialog
(Figure 100), but can also be applied to the Shadow page in the Line dialog and the
Shadow panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Default shadows
To quickly apply a shadow to an object, select the object and click on Shadow in the Line and
Filling toolbar. The shadow applied to an object uses the default shadow settings in LibreOffice.

Formatting shadows
For a more control when adding shadows to an object, use the Shadow page, as follows, on the
Area dialog and Line dialog.
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Shadow to open the Shadow page (Figure 100).
3) Select Use shadow in Properties and the shadow options become active.
4) Select from one of nine points the direction in which the shadow is going to be cast in
relation to the object.
5) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and then
select the color required for the shadow.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
8) In Transparency, enter a percentage for the shadow transparency.
9) Click OK to close the Area or Line dialog and save the changes.

Sidebar shadow formatting

1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

108 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 101: Shadow panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
3) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow panel (Figure 101) in the Properties deck.
4) Select Enable and the shadow options become active.
5) In Angle, select from one of the options in the drop-down list to set the direction of where
the shadow is going to be cast in relation to the object.
6) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and then
select the color required for the shadow.
7) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
8) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
9) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadow
transparency.
10) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

Working with transparencies

Transparencies can be applied to objects and shadows. In Draw, two types of transparencies
can be applied to an object – uniform and gradient. Transparencies can be applied to area fills,
gradients, shadows and lines.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 109

 Figure 102: Area dialog — Area Transparency page
• For gradient transparencies and an example of combining a color gradient with a
gradient transparency, see “Gradient fills” on page 94.
• For line transparencies, refer to “Who is this user guide for?” on page 8 for more
information.
• For shadow transparencies, refer to “Working with shadows” on page 107 for more
information.
The following example procedure applies a transparency to an object area fill using the Area
dialog (Figure 102):
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog, then click on Transparency to the open the Transparency page
and access the available options.
3) To create a uniform transparency, select Transparency and enter a percentage in the text
box.
4) To create a gradient transparency so that the area becomes gradually transparent, select
Gradient and select the type of gradient transparency from the drop-down list: Linear,
Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic, or Square. See “Table 7: Gradient options” on page 95
for more information on gradient types.
5) Set the parameters for the type of the gradient transparency selected above. Refer to
“Table 11: Transparency parameters” for a description of the transparency properties.
The parameters available depends type of gradient transparency selected.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.
Table 11: Transparency parameters
Transparency parameters Meaning
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
Centre X
values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.
For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
Center Y
values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

110 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Transparency parameters Meaning
For Linear, Axial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients.
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient axis.
Increase this value to make the gradient start further away from
Border
the border of the object.
Value for the starting transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
Start value
100% means fully transparent.
Value for the ending transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
End value
100% means fully transparent.

Drawing styles
If the same area fill, line thickness, and border properties are to be applied to a set of objects, it
is recommended to reduce this repetitive by using styles. Styles reduce the risk of format errors
by allowing format to be defined and applied to multiple objects. For more information on styles,
see the Writer Guide.

Note
The drawing styles included with Draw cannot be deleted or renamed, but can be
modified to drawing requirements. Drawing styles can also be hidden when not being
used in a drawing.

Style categories
All Styles
Displays all drawing styles available for use.
Applied Styles
Only displays drawing styles that have been used in the selected drawing.
Hierarchical Styles
Displays the drawing styles in a hierarchical list (also known as a linked or parent/child
styles). To view the styles in a sub-level, click on the triangle ► or chevron > next to the
style name listing the styles available in the sub-level, as shown in Figure 103.
Custom Styles
Displays all user created drawing styles that are available for use.
Hidden Styles
Displays all drawing styles are hidden when not required.

Tips
Hierarchical styles are used when multiple objects differ in one or two options, but
are otherwise identically formatted. Create a parent style for the objects including
borders, area fill, font, and so on. Then create a hierarchical or child styles, which
differ, for example, in fill color. If the font size or the thickness of a border needs to be
changed, it is sufficient to change the parent style and all the child styles are
changed accordingly.
At the bottom of the Styles deck on the Sidebar there is a drop-down list allowing
selection of a style category. The style categories available are Hierarchical, All
Styles, Hidden Styles, Applied Styles, and Custom Styles.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 111

 Figure 103: Styles deck in Sidebar

Selecting styles
Styles can only be selected and applied to objects using the Styles deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 103).
1) Select the object for style application.
2) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar using one of the following methods:
– Go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, then click on Styles at the right side of the
Sidebar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Go to View > Styles on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11.
3) Select a style category from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck.
4) In the Styles deck, double-click on the style required for the selected object.
5) If necessary, create a custom style, or modify the selected style to drawing requirements.

112 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 104: Graphic Styles dialog — General page

Note
It is recommended to create custom styles rather than modify drawing styles that
were installed with LibreOffice. Modifying the LibreOffice drawing styles may cause
formatting problems if the style has been used in other drawings.

Creating custom styles

Custom styles are placed in All Styles and Custom Styles categories in the Sidebar Styles
deck. When a custom style is applied to an object, the custom style appears in Applied Styles.

Using Styles deck

1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
2) Right click on the style required as a starting point to create a custom style and select
New from the context menu to open the Graphic Styles dialog (Figure 104).
3) Click on Organizer to open the Organizer page in the Graphic Styles dialog.
4) In the Name text box, enter a unique style name.
5) In Inherit from text box, select None from the drop-down list if the new drawing style is
NOT going to be linked. When an object is created, it uses the Default Drawing Style
and a new drawing style is linked by default to the Default Drawing Style.
6) If the new style is to inherit settings from an existing style, select a style from the Inherit
from: drop-down list.
7) Use the available options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to format and
categorize a new style.
8) Click OK to save the new style and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Using New Style from Selection

Using the option New Style from Selection all formatting is applied to an object first and then a
new drawing style is created using the formatting changes.
1) Select an existing object, or create a new object in a drawing.
2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area
dialog, Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.
3) Make sure the object is selected and create the new style using one of the following
methods:

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 113

 – Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on New Style from Selection at the
top right of the deck.
– Go to Format > Styles > New Style from Selection on the Menu bar.
4) In the New Style from Selection dialog, enter a unique name for the new style. This
dialog also shows existing custom styles.
5) Click OK to save the new style and close the New Style from Selection dialog.

Modifying styles
1) Select an object in a drawing.
2) Click on Styles on the left of the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
3) Open the Graphic Styles dialog using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Edit Style from the context menu.
– Right-click on the style that is highlighted in the Styles deck on the Sidebar and select
Modify from the context menu.
4) Use the options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to modify the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify custom styles. Modifying the installed LibreOffice
styles may cause formatting errors in other documents that uses a LibreOffice style.

Editing hierarchical or parent styles

If an object uses a style that is linked to a hierarchical or parent style, then this hierarchical or
parent style can be edited.
1) Select an object in a drawing that uses a linked style.
2) Open the Graphic Styles dialog and click on Organizer to open the Organizer page in
the Graphic Styles dialog.
3) Check that the style name in the Inherit from text box is the required hierarchical or
parent style, then use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to
edit the style.
4) If the hierarchical or parent style is NOT the style required:
a) Click on Edit Style to the right of the Inherit from text box until the name of the style is
displayed.
b) Use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to edit the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Updating styles
Using Update Style allows all formatting to an object to be applied first and then the drawing
style used for the object is updated.
1) Select the object to update the applied drawing style.
2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area
dialog, Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.

114 |Draw Guide 24.8

 3) Update the drawing style using one of the following methods. There is no confirmation
when updating a drawing style.
– Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Update Style at the top right.
– Go to Format > Styles > Update Selected Style on the Menu bar.

Note
Only update custom styles that have been created. Updating drawing styles installed
with LibreOffice may create formatting errors in other documents that use LibreOffice
drawing styles.

Applying styles
Drawing styles are applied to an object using the Styles deck on the Sidebar as follows:
1) Select the object to apply a drawing style.
2) Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar, or click on Styles on the Sidebar.
3) Double click on a style name to apply the drawing style to the selected object.

Deleting styles
Drawing styles installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted, even if the drawing styles are not
being used. Only custom styles can be deleted.
1) To open a list of styles, use one of the following methods:
– Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar.
2) Select Applied Styles from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.
3) Right click on the style name in the styles list and select Delete from the context menu.
4) If the style is used on an object, a warning message appears stating that the selected
object will revert back to the default drawing style. Select Yes to confirm deletion of the
style.
5) If the style is not in use, select Yes to confirm deletion of the style and there is no
confirmation message.

Note
Before deleting a custom style, it is recommended to make sure the drawing style is
not in use by checking the list of drawing styles in the Applied Styles category.

Special effects

Note
The tools on the Transformations toolbar are described in the following sections with
the exception of the In 3-D Rotation Object tool. This tool is described in Chapter 7,
Working with 3D Objects.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 115

A number of special effects can be applied to objects in Draw. Several of these effects are
readily available on the Transformations toolbar. If the Transformations toolbar (Figure 94 on
page 98) is not open, go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar and select
Transformations.

Rotating objects

Note
By default, the rotation pivot point is a small circle in the center of the selected
object. To change the center of object rotation, click and drag the rotation pivot point
to a new position. The rotation pivot point can be positioned outside of the selected
object.

Manual rotation
1) Select an object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to switch the selected object into rotation mode. The
selection handles change shape and color when in rotation mode (Figure 105).
– Click again on the selected object.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling and
select Rotate from the context menu.
– If the Transformations toolbar is open, click on Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over one of the corner handles and the cursor changes shape. Only
corner selection handles are active for rotation.
4) Click and drag on a corner selection handle to rotate the selected object.
5) To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, press and hold the Shift key
while rotating the object. This is useful for rotating objects through 90 deg.
6) When satisfied with the rotation, release the corner selection handle.

Rotation using Sidebar

1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.

Figure 105: Example of manual rotation

116 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 106: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
2) Open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 106).
3) Rotate the object using one of the following options:
– Click on and drag the Rotation Angle indicator in Rotation.
– Enter a rotation angle in the Select the angle for rotation text box.
4) After rotating the object, click outside the object to deselect the object and save the
changes.

Position and Size dialog

1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 107) using one of the following methods:
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Select Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 117

 Figure 107: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page
3) Click Rotation to open the Rotation page.
4) If required, in Pivot Point enter a value for Position X and Position Y to move the
position of the pivot point. The default position of the pivot point is the center of the
object. Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
5) In Rotation Angle, rotate the object using one of the following methods:
– In the Angle text box, enter the degrees of rotation required.
– Click on and drag the rotation indicator in Default settings.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Position and Size dialog.

Flipping objects
Quick flipping
1) Select the object for flipping to display the selection handles.
2) Use one of the following methods to flip the object vertically or horizontally:
– Right click on the object and select Flip > Horizontally or Flip > Vertically from the
context menu.
– In Flip on the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar
(Figure 106 on page 117), click on Flip Vertically or Flip Horizontally.
– In the Line and Filling toolbar, click on Vertically or Horizontally.
– Go to Shape > Flip > Vertically or Horizontally on the Menu bar.

Flip tool
Using Flip on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 94 on page 98), the position and angle that
the object flips over can be changed, as shown by the example in Figure 108.
1) Select the object for flipping to display the selection handles.

118 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 108: Example of using Flip tool
(1) Flip selected (2) Symmetry axis moved (3) Flip result
2) Click on Flip on the Transformations toolbar and the symmetry axis appears as a dashed
line through the middle of the object. The object is flipped about this symmetry axis.
3) Click and drag one or both ends of the symmetry axis setting the axis orientation.
4) Place the cursor over one of the object selection handles until it changes shape.
5) Click and hold the selection then drag the object across to the other side of the symmetry
axis until the object appears flipped over. The angle and position of the flip depends on
the angle and position of the symmetry axis.
6) Release the selection handle and the object is flipped.

Note
Pressing and holding the Shift key while moving the symmetry axis allows rotation
in 45 degree increments.

Mirror copies
At the moment there is no mirror command available in LibreOffice Draw. However, mirroring an
object can be emulated by copying and flipping the object as follows:
1) Select the object to copy the object to the clipboard.
2) Flip the object using the procedures in “Flipping objects” on page 118.
3) Click in an empty area on the drawing to deselect the object.
4) Paste the copy of the original object back into its original location creating a mirror copy.
5) If necessary, select both objects and align them using one of the following methods:
– Go to Shape > Align on the Menu bar and use one of the alignment options.
– Right-click the selected objects and select Align from the context menu, then select
one of the alignment options.

Distorting images
Three tools on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 94 on page 98) allow an object to be
distorted.
• Distort — distorts an object in perspective.
• Set to circle (slant) and Set in Circle (perspective) — both create a pseudo 3D effect.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 119

 Figure 109: Example of using Set In circle (perspective) tool
(1) Original obect (2) Set in Circle (perspective) distortion

Figure 110: Example of using Set in circle (slant) tool

(1) Original obect (2) Set in circle (slant) distortion

Note
Before distorting an object, the object must be converted to a curve. Transforming an
object into a curve is a safe operation, but cannot be reversed. To cancel the curve
conversion, click on Format > Undo on the Menu bar.

Set in circle (perspective)

An example of distorting an object using Set in Circle (perspective) is shown in Figure 109.
1) Select an object and click on Set in Circle (perspective) on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog
does not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted to
give an indication of how the resulting object will look.

Set to circle (slant)

An example of distorting an object using Set to circle (slant) is shown in Figure 110.
1) Select an object and click on Set to circle (slant) on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog
does not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted to
give an indication of how the resulting object will look.

120 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 111: Example of using Distort tool
(1) Original object (3) Vertical distortion
(2) Corner distortion (4) Horizontal distortion

Distort
Examples of distorting an object using Distort are shown in Figure 111.
1) Select an object and click on Distort on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog
does not appear.
3) Click and drag a corner selection handle to distort the object using the opposite corner
selection handle as an anchor point for the distortion.
4) Click and drag the vertical selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
vertical side as an anchor point for the distortion.
5) Click and drag the horizontal selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
horizontal side as an anchor point for the distortion.

Dynamic gradients
Transparency gradients are controlled using the same procedure for color gradients and both
types of gradient are used together. With a transparency gradient, the direction and degree of
object fill color changes from opaque to transparent. In a color gradient, the fill changes from one
color to another, but the degree of transparency remains the same.
Two icons on the Transformations toolbar dynamically control transparency and color gradients.
Even if an object with a color fill is not assigned transparency, the transparency can be controlled
by clicking on Interactive transparency tool. This defines a transparency gradient and a
dashed line connecting two squares appears on the object. Move the two squares to modify the
gradient. Define the direction of the gradient (vertical, horizontal, or at any angle) and the spot at
which the transparency begins.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 121

 Figure 112: Example of using Dynamic Gradient tool
A regular color gradient is defined in the same manner. Select an object, then select a gradient
area fill (see “Gradient fills” on page 94 for more information). The Interactive gradient tool is
now active on the Transformations toolbar. When clicking on Interactive gradient tool, a
dashed line connecting two squares appears on the object, just as it does for a transparency
gradient. In both transparency gradient and gradient fill, click outside the object to set the
gradient.
In the example shown in Figure 112 a gradient transparency is dynamically adjusted. Direction of
transparency is changed by moving the white square and the distance over which it is applied by
moving the colored square.

Note
Moving the squares has different effects, depending on the type of gradient. For
example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient are always
situated on either side of the center point of the object.

122 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 5,
Combining Multiple Objects
Grouping objects
Grouping of objects is similar to placing objects into a container. Objects within a group are
moved together as one object and any changes made are applied to all objects within the group.
A group can be ungrouped and the objects that make up the group can be manipulated
separately.

Temporary grouping
A temporary grouping is when several objects are selected together. Any changes to object
parameters are applied to all objects within the temporary group. For example, a temporary
group of objects can be rotated in its entirety. A temporary group is created using one of the
following methods:
• Click and drag the cursor over several objects surrounding the objects with a selection
rectangle. This selection rectangle is also known as a marquee, as shown in Figure 113.
Release the cursor when all the objects required for a temporary group are selected.
• Click the first object, then hold down the Shift key and click on the remaining objects
required for a temporary group.
• To cancel a temporary group of objects, simply click outside of the selection handles
displayed around the objects.

Grouping
When objects are grouped, any editing carried out on a group is applied to all objects within the
group. Click on one object in a group selects the whole group. Objects within a group retain their
individual properties and can be edited independently. See “Editing individual objects in a group”
on page 125 for more information.
1) Select objects for a group using one of the following methods. Selection handles appear
around all objects selected for the group (Figure 114).
– Click on each object required while holding down the Shift key.
– Select Select on the Drawing toolbar and draw a selection rectangle around the
objects required for the group.

Figure 113: Example of a selection rectangle (marquee)

124 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 114: Example of grouping objects
– To select all the objects, go to Edit > Select All on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).
2) Create a group of selected objects using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on an object within the selected group and select Group from the context
menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+Shift+G).

Ungrouping
1) Select a group of objects and selection handles appear around objects within the group
(Figure 114).
2) Ungroup a group of objects using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the selected group and select Ungroup from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Ungroup on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+G).

Editing individual objects in a group

Note
After entering a group, any other objects outside the group cannot be selected for
editing. Exit from the selected group first before editing objects outside the group.
An object within a group can be edited individually without ungrouping the objects.
1) Select a group, then enter the group using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the group and select Enter Group from the context menu.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 125

 Figure 115: Example of editing individual object within a group
– Go to Shape > Group > Enter Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F3.
– Double-click on the selected group.
2) Click on an object to select and individually edit it, as shown in Figure 115.
3) After editing and saving changes to an individual object within a group, exit the group
using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the group and select Exit Group from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Exit Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+F3 (macOS ⌘+F3).
– Double-click outside the group.

Nesting groups
A group of groups can be created and is commonly known as nesting groups. When nested
groups are created, Draw retains individual group hierarchy, keeping the order in which groups
were selected. The last individual group selected is on top of all the other groups within a nested
group. Ungrouping and entering a nested group works the same way as for individual groups.

Tip
If group and ungroup commands are regularly used, or any other command, tools
can be added to a toolbar. See Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide
for more information on customizing toolbars.

126 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 116: Example of area fill in combined objects
(1) Overlapping individual objects (2) Combined individual objects

Figure 117: Example of area fill in combing and splitting objects

(1) Overlapping individual objects (3) Splitting combined objects
(2) Combined individual objects

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 127

Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting
Combining objects
Combining objects is a permanent merging of objects creating a new object. The original objects
are no longer available as individual objects and cannot be edited as individual objects.
1) Select several objects that are overlapping each other.
2) Combine the selected objects into a single object using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the selection and select Shapes > Combine from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Combine on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+Shift+K).
The result of combining objects may not be what is expected, but the following explains how
combining objects works.
• The attributes (for example, area fill) of the resulting object are those of the object at the
back of the group. In Figure 116, it is the rectangle and in Figure 117 it is the yellow
rectangle.
• Where objects overlap, the overlapping zone is either filled or empty depending on
whether the overlap is even numbered or odd numbered. Figure 117 shows where the
overlap number is even, an empty space is created and where the overlap number is
odd, a filled area is created.

Splitting combined objects

An object which has been created from combining several objects can be split into individual
objects. However, the original objects retain the formatting of the combined object and do not
revert back to their original formatting. Select the combined object and use one of the following
methods to split a combined object:
• Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+K).
In Figure 117, the individual overlapping objects use Rectangle 1 formatting at the rear of the
overlapping objects when a combined object is split.

Breaking objects
An object that consists of more than one part can be broken into its individual parts as follows.
For example, a star is broken into separate lines and the area fill is lost, as shown by the center
graphic in Figure 118.
1) Select an object that consists of more than one part.
2) Convert the object to a curve or polygon using one of the following methods:
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on the context
menu.
3) Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar and the object is broken into individual parts.
4) Move, format or delete the individual parts as necessary, as shown by the right object in
Figure 118.

128 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 118: Example of breaking objects
(1) Original object (2) Object broken (3) Individual parts edited

Connecting lines
The individual parts of an object or individual objects can be connected together as follows:
1) Select all the objects that are going to be connected.
1) Go to Shape > Connect on the Menu bar. Individual lines or lines in a border are
converted to curves and the end points of each line connected.

Closing objects
1) Select an object that has a gap in its border.
2) Right-click on the selected object and select Close Object from the context menu to
close the gap.
3) Format the area fill created to requirements. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes
for more information on working with area fills.

Note
The shape created when connecting individual parts or lines is not a closed shape.
The new shape has to be closed to create an area fill.

Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects

After selecting more than one object, the merge, subtract, and intersect functions become
available allowing creation of a new object with a new shape.

Merge
When merging objects, a new object is created with a shape that follows the shape of the
merged objects. The area fill of the merged object is determined by the area fill of the object that
is at the rear of all the other objects, as shown in Figure 119.
After selecting several objects, use one of the following methods to merge the objects:
• Go to Shape > Merge on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Merge from the context menu.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 129

Subtract
When subtracting objects, the objects at the front are subtracted from the object behind. This
leaves a blank space the subtracted objects occupied creating a new shape, as shown in
Figure 120. After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use one of the following
methods to subtract objects:
• Go to Shape > Subtract on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Subtract from the context
menu.

Figure 119: Example of merging objects

Figure 120: Example of subtracting objects

Figure 121: Example of intersecting objects

130 |Draw Guide 24.8

Intersect
When intersecting objects, the front objects and the exposed area of the rear object are
removed. This creates a new object from the area of the rear object that was covered by the
front objects, as shown in Figure 121. After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use
one of the following methods to intersect objects:
• Go to Shape > Intersect on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Intersect from the context
menu.

Duplication and cross-fading

Duplication
Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes to the duplicate copies,
such as color or rotation.
1) Select an object or group of objects, then use one of the following methods to open the
Duplicate dialog (Figure 122):
– Go to Edit > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Go to Shape > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+F3.
2) Select the umber of copies, placement, enlargement, and the start and end colors for the
duplicate copies.

Figure 122: Duplicate dialog

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 131

 Figure 123: Example of duplication
3) Click OK and duplicate copies are created. An example of a duplication is shown in
Figure 123. Each duplicate object is a separate object.
4) To group the duplicate objects into one group, see “Who is this user guide for?” on
page 8.
5) To combine the duplicate objects into one object, see “Combining, splitting, breaking, and
connecting” on page 128.
The following options are available when using the Duplicate dialog:
Number of copies
Enter the number of copies required.
Placement
Sets the position and rotation of duplicated objects in relation to the original object.
X axis
Enter the horizontal distance between centers of a selected object and duplicate
objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift
the duplicate object to the left.
Y axis
Enter the vertical distance between the centers of a selected object and duplicate
objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the
duplicate object up.
Angle
Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) required for rotating a duplicate object. Positive
values rotate duplicate objects in a clockwise direction and negative values in a
counterclockwise direction.
Enlargement
Sets the size of duplicate objects.
Width
Enter the amount to enlarge or reduce the width of duplicate objects.

132 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Height
Enter the amount to enlarge or reduce the height of duplicate objects.
Colors
Sets the colors for selected objects and duplicate objects. For more than one copy, these
colors define the start and end points of a color gradient.
Start
Select a color for a selected object.
End
Select a color for a duplicate object. If making more than one copy, this color is applied
to the last copy.

Cross-fading
Cross-fading transforms one object shape into another object shape. The result is a new group
of individual objects that includes the start and end objects. The intermediate steps show the
transformation from one object shape to another object shape. The cross-fading is carried out
from the first object selected to the second object selected.
1) Select two objects and go to Shape > Cross-fading on the Menu bar to open the
Cross-fading dialog (Figure 124).
2) In Settings, select the number of Increments for the transformation.
3) If necessary, in Settings, select Cross-fade attributes and Same orientation.

Figure 124: Cross-fading dialog

Figure 125: Example of cross-fading objects

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 133

 4) Click OK to cross-fade the selected objects and close the Cross-fading dialog. An
example of cross-fading is shown in Figure 125 with Same orientation deselected. The
object created is a group of objects.
5) To ungroup this group of objects and use the individual objects, see “Ungrouping” on
page 125.
The following options are available in the Cross-fading dialog:
Increments
Enter the number of steps created between the selected objects.
Cross-fade attributes
Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects. For example, if
the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the two
colors is applied.
Same orientation
Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects.

Positioning objects
Arranging objects
When combining, merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects, the end result varies depending
on which object is at the front and which object is at the back. Each new object placed on a
drawing automatically becomes the front object and all the other objects move backwards in
positioning order. Arranging objects changes the order of a group of objects. To change the
arrangement position of an object, select one or more objects and then use one of the following
methods
• Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Arrange from the context menu and
one of the available options.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Arrange on the Standard toolbar to open the
Position subtoolbar (Figure 126) and select one of the available tools.
• Click one of the arrangement tools on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Click on Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar and select an arrangement option.
• Use the Arrange tools in Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Use a keyboard shortcut available for each arrange option.
The arrangement options available are as follows:
Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the front of a group of objects (Shift+Ctrl++)
(macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Brings the selected object forward one step (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++).

Figure 126: Position subtoolbar

134 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Send Backward
Sends the selected object one step backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects (Shift+Ctrl+–)
(macOS ⌘+Shift+–).
In Front of Object
Moves the selected object in front of another selected object.
Behind Object
Moves the selected object behind another selected object.
Reverse
Reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one object is
selected.

Aligning objects
To make a drawing look more professional, objects can be aligned with each other. Select one or
more objects and use one of the following methods to align objects:
• Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Align Objects from the context menu
and one of the available options.
• Click on one of the alignment tools on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Go to Shape > Align Objects on the Menu bar and select the alignment required.
• Use the Align tools in the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Align Objects to open the Align
Objects toolbar (Figure 127).
The alignment tools available are as follows:
Left
Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the left edge
of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
Centered
Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of the
object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
Right
Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right
edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
Top
Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the
top edge of the object is aligned to the top page margin.
Center
Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of the
object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
Bottom
Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected,
the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the bottom page margin.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 135

 Figure 127: Align Objects toolbar

Figure 128: Distribute Selection toolbar

Distributing objects
Distributing objects allows three or more objects to be evenly spaced along a horizontal or
vertical axis. Objects are distributed using the outermost objects as base points for spacing.
Select at least three objects, then use one of the following methods to distribute the objects:
• Right-click on the selected objects, then select Distribute Selection from the context
menu and one of the available options.
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Distribute Selection to open the
Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 128).
• Go to Shape > Distribute Selection on the Menu bar and select a distribution option.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Distribute Selection from the context
menu, then select a distribution option.
The distribution options available are as follow:
Horizontal Left
Distributes the selected objects so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Horizontal Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Horizontal Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally so that the objects are evenly spaced from
one another.
Horizontal Right
Distributes the selected objects so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertical Top
Distributes the selected objects so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertical Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Vertical Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically so that the objects are evenly spaced from one
another.

136 |Draw Guide 24.8

Vertical Bottom
Distributes the selected objects so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 137

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 6,
Editing Images
Introduction
Previous chapters in this Draw Guide provide information on vector graphics and the most
common types of vector graphics in use are as follows:
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics)
An Extensible Markup Language (XML) based vector image format for two-dimensional
graphics with support for interactivity and animation.
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)
A PostScript document format usable as a graphics file format. EPS files are self
contained, PostScript documents that describe an image or drawing and can be placed
within another PostScript document.
AI (Adobe Illustrator)
A proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing single-page
vector-based drawings in either the EPS or PDF formats.
However, Draw has several functions for handling raster graphics or bitmaps, for example
photographs and scanned pictures. This includes import, export, and conversion from one
graphic format to another graphic format. Draw can open the majority of graphic file formats
using capabilities similar to raster graphics programs like Gimp or Adobe Photoshop. Raster
graphics are generally images or pictures that use the most common formats in use:
JPG/JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
JPEG is the most common image format on websites and most digital cameras produce
JPEG images as default.
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)
GIF is a bitmap image format that is popular because of its wide support and portability.
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
PNG is a raster image format which supports lossless data compression and also
background transparency.
TIF/TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
TIFF is flexible, adaptable, and capable of storing image data in a lossless format.
BMP (BitMaP)
Also known as bitmap image file, which is a dot matrix data structure.

Importing graphics and images

Inserting
To import graphic or image files into a drawing, go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar to open
the Insert Image dialog (Figure 129).
Draw contains import filters for the majority of graphic formats. If the file being imported uses a
graphic format not compatible with LibreOffice import filters, it is recommended to use a free
graphic conversion program to convert the file into a graphic format that Draw recognizes.
If Preview is selected, a preview of the file is shown on the right-hand side of the Insert Image
dialog. This makes it easier to select the file required and makes sure that Draw can import the
graphic file format used.

140 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 129: Insert Image dialog

Embedding
Embedding graphics into a drawing makes graphics a permanent part of the drawing. Any
changes made to an embedded graphic only appear in a LibreOffice drawing where the graphic
has been embedded. The original graphic file is not affected. Embedding is importing a graphic
into a drawing using one of the following methods:
• Insert Image dialog.
• Copying and pasting.
• Scanning a graphic.
• Dragging and dropping between open files.
The main advantage of embedding graphics into a drawing is that a graphic is always available
no matter what computer is used to open the drawing.
The main disadvantage of embedding graphics is that it creates large file sizes, which may
create storage problems if there is limited storage capacity on the computer. Also, if the original
graphic is altered, the embedded graphic is not updated each time the LibreOffice drawing is
opened.

Note
When a graphic is embedded into a LibreOffice drawing, make sure that Insert as
Link is not selected in the Insert Image dialog.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 141

 Figure 130: Confirm Linked Graphic dialog

Linking
Linking to an original graphic does not insert the graphic into a drawing, but creates a link to the
location of an original graphic file. Each time a LibreOffice drawing is opened, any linked
graphics are displayed in the drawing.
The main advantage of linking graphic files is that if the original graphic file is altered or
modified, opening a LibreOffice drawing automatically updates the linked graphic. Also the file
size of a LibreOffice drawing is smaller and the original graphic is easily edited with specialized
external applications.
The main disadvantage of linking graphics is that the link must be maintained between a
LibreOffice drawing and the embedded graphic file for a link to work correctly. If the original
drawing or graphic file is moved to another computer location, then any links must be updated to
include the new location.
1) Open the Insert Image dialog.
2) Select Insert as Link in the Insert Image dialog.
3) Select the required graphic or image file and click on Open to open the Confirm Linked
Graphic dialog (Figure 130).
4) Click on Keep Link to link the file and close the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.
5) If required, click on Embed Graphic to embed the file instead of linking the file. This also
closes the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.

Note
When a graphic or image file is linked in a LibreOffice drawing, the file format of the
linked graphic or image is not changed.

Editing links
1) Go to Edit > External Links on the Menu bar to open the Edit Links dialog (Figure 131)
and select the link to be edited.
2) Click on Modify, Break Link, or Update as appropriate.
– Modify — allows changes to the selected link that is between the graphic file in the
current drawing and the source file.

142 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 131: Edit Links dialog
– Break Link — breaks the link between the selected linked graphic file and the current
document. The graphic file version in the drawing becomes embedded into the
drawing. A confirmation dialog opens asking if the link is to be broken. Click on Yes to
confirm the breaking of the link.
– Update — updates the selected link so that the most recent version of the linked
graphic file is displayed in the drawing.
3) Click on Close to save the changes to the link and close the Edit Links dialog.

Scanning
After scanning, scanned graphics and images are inserted and embedded using PNG format
into a LibreOffice drawing. To insert scanned images, make sure the scanner is configured for
the computer and supported by SANE for a Linux operating system, or TWAIN for a Windows or
macOS.
The following procedure is an example only. The actual scanning procedure depends on the
scanner type, software and computer operating system. Consult the scanner documentation for
more information.
1) Place a document, drawing, or photograph in the scanner and make sure that the
scanner is switched on and ready, then use one of the following procedures:
– If this is the first time the scanner has been used with LibreOffice, go to Insert > Media
> Scan > Select Source on the Menu bar to select the scanner.
– If the scanner has been used before, go to Insert > Image > Scan > Request on the
Menu bar.
2) Specify the scanning resolution, subject type being scanned, subject size and so on.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 143

 3) When the image has been scanned, Draw places it in the LibreOffice drawing. The
scanned image can then be edited like any other graphic or image.

Note
If more than one scanner is connected to the computer, the scanner is selected
when the source is selected. This selection becomes the default source for scanning
until another scanner is selected and used as the scanning source.

Copying and pasting

Copying and pasting a graphic also embeds a graphic or image file into a LibreOffice drawing. A
copied graphic can be an image already embedded in another document or drawing, or a
graphic file such as a drawing, document, or photograph.
1) After copying the graphic file, go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Special on the Menu
bar to open the Paste Special dialog.
2) Select the required format for pasting the copied graphic into a LibreOffice drawing.
Available formats for pasting depend on the type of file copied onto the clipboard.
3) Click OK to paste the graphic file and close the Paste Special dialog.

Note
When copying and pasting images into a LibreOffice drawing, respect the copyright
and license of any file being copied.

Exporting images
Exporting ODG files
By default Draw saves drawings in the Open Document format ODG and some software
programs are not compatible with the ODG format. To make drawings compatible with other
software applications, an ODG file can be exported in several formats. The export procedure
used depends on the computer setup and computer operating system being used. The following
procedure is an example export procedure.
1) Open the ODG file being exported.
2) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar and open the Export dialog. An example export
dialog is shown in Figure 132.
3) Enter a filename for the exported file and navigate to the folder where the exported file is
to be saved.
4) Select the required file format from the options in the drop-down list.
5) Click Export and the file is exported as a new file in the selected file format.
6) Depending on the file format selected, another dialog may open allowing options to be
selected for the export format.
7) Depending on the additional dialog that may open, click on Export, Create, or OK and
the file is exported as a new file in its new format.

144 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 132: Example export dialog

Figure 133: Example of Export Options dialog

Exporting graphics or images

Exporting individual graphics or images, or a group of graphics or images, from a drawing file is
similar to exporting files. The following export procedure is an example. Actual procedure
depends on computer operating system and computer setup.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 145

 1) Open the ODG file that contains the graphic or images for export.
2) In the ODG file, select the graphics or images for export.
3) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar and open the Export dialog. An example export
dialog is shown in Figure 132.
4) Enter a filename for the exported file and navigate to the folder where the exported file is
to be saved.
5) Click on Selection in the Export dialog. Selecting may open an example options dialog
as shown in Figure 133.
6) Enter the required options in the options dialog and click OK to export the file to the
selected destination. There is no confirmation of export.

Formatting images
Images (raster graphics) are edited and formatted to add or change filters and adjust the
properties of color, lines, areas, and shadows using one of the following methods:
• Go to Format > Image on the Menu bar and use the tools in the sub-menu that opens.
• Use the tools on the Image toolbar (Figure 134).
• Use the tools available in the Image panel on the Properties deck of the Sidebar.
• Some raster graphics may have a text element. For more information on formatting text,
see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.

Note
Formatting changes made to a graphic using LibreOffice tools only appear in the
drawing where the graphic was modified. Original graphic file is not affected. Raster
graphics included in a group behave like other objects when the properties of the
group are edited and formatted.

Naming images
Draw names objects using the insertion order into a drawing, for example Shape 1, Shape 2,
and so on. It is recommended to rename objects using a unique name. Names make objects
and images easily identifiable in the Navigator.
1) Select an image, then use one of the following methods to open the Name dialog and
create a unique name for the selected image:
– Go to Format > Name on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Name from the context menu.
2) Enter a name in the Name text box in the Name dialog that opens and click OK.

Figure 134: Image toolbar

146 |Draw Guide 24.8

Image toolbar
The Image toolbar (Figure 134) appears when an image or raster graphic object is selected. For
more information on the Image toolbar and the available tools, see Appendix B, Toolbars. The
tools listed below for the Image toolbar are an example only.
Position and Size (F4)
Opens the Position and Size dialog. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more
information.
Align Objects
Opens a subtoolbar giving access to alignment tools for aligning selected objects in
relation to each other. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.
Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the front of a group of objects (Ctrl+Shift++)
(macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Brings the selected object forward one step (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++).
Send Backward
Sends the selected object one step backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects (Ctrl+Shift+–)
(macOS ⌘+Shift+–).
In Front of Object
Moves the selected object in front of another selected object.
Behind Object
Moves the selected object behind another selected object.
Reverse
Reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one object is
selected.
Line Style
Opens a drop-down list with different line styles used for the outline of the border. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.
Line Width
Used to change the width of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Line Color
Used to change the color of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Area Style/Filling
Used to change the type of filling used in a shape. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.
Shadow
Sets the default shadow effect around the picture. The shadow attributes are adjusted
using the Shadow panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 4, Changing
Object Attributes for more information.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 147

 Filter
Opens the Image Filter toolbar which is described in “Image filters” on page 153.
Image Mode
Changes the display of the image from color to grayscale, black and white, or a
watermark. This setting affects only the display and printing of the image; the original
image file remains unchanged. The image mode setting can also be changed using
Color mode in the Image panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 135).
Default
Image is displayed unaltered in color.
Grayscale
Image is displayed in 256 shades of gray.
Black/White
Image is displayed in black and white.

Figure 135: Image panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 136: Color subtoolbar

148 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Watermark
Color, brightness, contrast, and gamma settings are reduced so that the image can be
used as a watermark (background). The default settings for Watermark can be
adjusted using the Color subtoolbar (Figure 136).
Crop Image
Crops or trims an image. When using this tool, crop marks appear around the image.
Drag one or more of these marks to crop the image to the desired size. For more
information on cropping, see “Cropping images” below.
Vertically
Flips the selected object vertically. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Horizontally
Flips the selected object horizontally. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for
more information.
Transformations
Opens the Transformations toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Transparency
Adjusts the degree of transparency of the image between 0% (opaque) and 100% (fully
transparent). The transparency setting can also be adjusted using the Image panel in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar.
Color
Opens the Color subtoolbar (Figure 136) to adjust the values of the RGB colors,
brightness, contrast, and Gamma. These adjustments do not affect the original image,
but the values are stored in LibreOffice Draw as a separate formatting set. The color
settings can also be adjusted using the Image panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.
Red, Green, Blue
Select values between –100% (no color) to +100% (full intensity); 0% represents the
original color value of the image.
Brightness
Select a value between –100% (totally black) and +100% (totally white).
Contrast
Select a value between –100% (minimum) and +100% (maximum).
Gamma
Affects the brightness of the middle color tones. Select a value between 0.10
(minimum) to 10 (maximum) Try adjusting this value if changing brightness or contrast
does not give the required result.

Cropping images
Cropping is a method of hiding unwanted areas of an image or changing the size of an image in
a drawing. Changes made when cropping an image only change the display of the image in a
drawing and not the original image file.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 149

 Figure 137: Example image in crop mode

Quick cropping
After selecting an image, it can be cropped quickly using one of the following methods:
• Click on Crop Image on the Standard or Image toolbar.
• Go to Format > Image > Crop on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu.
Selection handles appear around the selected image, as shown in the example in Figure 137.
The image is cropped as follows:
• Top, bottom, left, and right selection handles crop the image in one direction only.
• Corner selection handles crop the image vertically and horizontally in two directions.
• To maintain the ratio between vertical and horizontal dimensions, hold down the Shift
key while moving a selection handle.

Crop dialog
For more control and accuracy over the cropping functions, it is recommended to use the Crop
dialog (Figure 138). Select an image and go to Format > Image > Crop Dialog on the Menu bar
to open the Crop dialog.
Crop
Trim or scale the selected image, or add white space around the image.
Keep scale
Maintains the original scale of the image when cropping so that only the size of the
image changes.
Keep image size
Maintains the image original size when cropping so that only the image scale changes.
To reduce the image scale, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping
boxes. To increase the image scale, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
Left and Right
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left or right edge of the
image, or a negative amount to add white space to the left or right of the image. If
Keep image size is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the image horizontal
scale, or a negative amount to decrease the image horizontal scale.

150 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 138: Crop dialog
Top and Bottom
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the image top or bottom, or a
negative amount to add white space above or below the image. If Keep image size is
selected, enter a positive amount to increase the image vertical scale, or a negative
amount to decrease the image vertical scale.
Scale
Used to change the image scale as it appears in a drawing.
Width
Enter a percentage value to change the image width.
Height
Enter a percentage value to change the image height.
Image Size
Used to change the image size.
Width
Enter a value for the image width.
Height
Enter a value for the image height.
Original Size
Original size of the image is displayed above the option. Clicking on this option and then
clicking OK resets the selected image to its original size.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 151

 Note
In the Crop dialog, the Width and Height are treated as independent values.
Changing one without the other can result in significant distortion of the image and
this may not be what is required.

Exporting cropped images

If a cropped image is to be used in another drawing, use one of the following methods after
selecting the cropped image.

Using Export dialog

1) Select the cropped image.
2) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open the Export dialog.
3) Navigate to the destination folder, then enter a filename.
4) Click on Selection, then click on Export. See “Exporting images” on page 144 for more
information.

Using Save
1) Select the cropped image.
2) Go to Format > Image > Save on the Menu bar or right click on the cropped image and
select Save from the context menu.
3) Click on Yes to save the modified image and open an Image Export dialog.
4) Select the file format required, navigate to the destination folder, and enter a filename.
5) Click on Save to save the cropped image.

Figure 139: Compress Image dialog

152 |Draw Guide 24.8

Compressing images
If a large image is inserted into a drawing and resized to fit into the layout of the drawing, the
complete full-size original image is stored in the drawing file. This preserves the original image,
possibly resulting in a large file to store or send by mail.
If some loss of image quality can be accepted, the image can be compressed using the following
procedure. This reduces the data volume while preserving the display in the page layout.
1) Open the Compress Image dialog (Figure 139) using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the image and select Compress from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Image > Compress on the Menu bar.
2) Select the type of compression and the resolution required.
3) Click on Calculate New Size to update the image information when the Compression
and Resolution settings are changed.
4) When satisfied with the new settings, click OK to apply the settings.
5) If the resulting image is not acceptable, use one of the following methods to undo the
changes and select another compression setting.

Image filters
Draw has eleven filter effects that can be applied to selected images and these image filters can
be combined. Filters always apply to the entire image and it is not possible to use filters on only
part of the image.

Notes
If an image is embedded into a drawing, any image filters are only applied directly to
the embedded image and the original image file is not changed. Save the drawing to
retain any filter effects applied to the embedded image in a drawing.
After a drawing is saved and closed, the effects of image filters become permanent.
If image filter effects are not satisfactory, use Edit > Undo on the Menu bar to cancel
the filter effects BEFORE saving the drawing.
When applying image filters to an image, the file size of the image must be taken into
account. On large file sizes, there is a time lag between applying an image filter and
the effect to become visible on the image.

Applying image filters

1) Select an image to open the Image toolbar.
2) Apply an image filter using one of the following methods:
– Click on Filter to open the Image Filter subtoolbar (Figure 140), then select an image
filter to apply.

Figure 140: Image Filter subtoolbar

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 153

 – Go to Format > Image > Filter on the Menu bar and select an image filter from the
context menu.

Image filters
No image filter
Figure 141 is an example image with no image filters applied.

Invert filter
Inverts or reverses the color values of a color image (similar to a color negative), or the
brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert to the original graphic
(Figure 142).

Figure 141: Example image no filter applied

Figure 142: Example image invert filter applied

154 |Draw Guide 24.8

Figure 143: Example image smooth filter applied

Figure 144: Smooth dialog

Figure 145: Example image sharpen filter applied

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 155

Smooth filter
Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter. This reduces the contrast between
neighboring pixels and produces a lack of sharpness making the image appear smoother. The
effect of the smooth filter can be very subtle. Figure 143 shows the effect of applying a Smooth
radius of 15 to an image.
Selecting this filter opens the Smooth dialog (Figure 144) where the smooth radius parameter is
set. The preview in the Smooth dialog shows the effect of applying the Smooth filter to an image.

Sharpen filter
Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter, adjusting the contrast between neighboring
pixels. The effect increases if the filter is applied several times making the colors appear faded,
as shown by the example in Figure 145.

Remove Noise filter

Removes noise by applying a median filter comparing every pixel with its neighbor. It replaces
any pixel with extreme values that deviate in color by a large amount from the mean value with a
pixel that has a mean color value. The amount of picture information does not increase each
time the filter is applied. However, there are fewer contrast changes resulting in an image that
looks smoother and the effect is very subtle (Figure 146).

Figure 146: Example image remove noise filter applied

Figure 147: Example image solarization filter applied

156 |Draw Guide 24.8

Solarization filter
Solarization refers to an effect that looks when there is too much light during photo development
and the colors have become partly inverted. Dark areas appear light or light areas appear dark.
In the digital world of photography, solarization creates a change or reversal of color, similar to
the effect of the Invert image filter. Figure 147 shows the effect of a Solarization filter applied
using a Threshold value of 50%.
Selecting Solarization opens the Solarization dialog (Figure 148), where the degree of
solarization (Threshold value) can be specified. Entering a Threshold value above 70% reverses
the inversion effect on colors. Also, selecting Invert reverses the effect of the Solarization image
filter, as shown in the preview box in Figure 148.

Aging filter
The Aging filter creates a look that resembles photographs developed in the early days of
photography (Figure 149). All pixels are set to their gray values. The green and blue color
channels are then reduced by the amount specified in Aging degree in the Aging dialog. Red
color channel is not changed. Selecting the Aging filter opens the Aging dialog (Figure 150),
where the Aging degree can be defined and create an old look for an image.

Figure 148: Solarization dialog

Figure 149: Example image aging filter applied

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 157

 Figure 150: Aging dialog

Figure 151: Example image posterize filter applied

Figure 152: Posterize dialog

158 |Draw Guide 24.8

Posterize filter
Posterizing reduces the number of colors in an image. For example, a photograph will probably
look like a painting when the number of colors is reduced (Figure 151). Selecting Posterize
opens the Posterize dialog (Figure 152) where the number of Poster colors can be defined to
produce the effect required.

Pop Art filter

Changes the colors of an image by converting the image to a pop-art format (Figure 153).

Charcoal Sketch filter

Displays an image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black and the
original colors are suppressed (Figure 154).

Relief filter
Calculates the edges of an image in relief as if the image is illuminated by a light source
(Figure 155). Selecting Relief opens the Emboss dialog (Figure 156) where the position of the
Light source is selected producing shadows that differ in direction and magnitude.

Figure 153: Example image pop art filter applied

Figure 154: Example image charcoal sketch filter applied

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 159

 Figure 155: Example image relief filter applied

Figure 156: Emboss dialog

Figure 157: Example image mosaic filter applied

160 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 158: Mosaic dialog

Mosaic filter
The Mosaic filter joins groups of pixels and converts the pixels into rectangles of a single color
creating an image that appears to be a mosaic (Figure 157). The larger the individual rectangles
created, the fewer details in the mosaic graphic.
Selecting this image filter opens the Mosaic dialog (Figure 158), where the number of pixels for
Width and Height of the tiles is set. Selecting Enhanced edges enhances the edges of each tile,
creating a sharper definition.

Replacing colors
The Color Replacer is used to replace or change a color of an embedded image for another
color, or to make a color transparent. Up to four colors can be replaced or changed at the same
time. Areas of an image cannot be selected for editing as the Color Replacer only works on the
whole of an image.
Selecting replacement colors can only be from the available color palettes in LibreOffice. Custom
colors cannot be defined in the Color Replacer, but custom colors can be created before using
the Color Replacer. For more information on creating custom colors, see Chapter 11, Advanced
Draw Techniques.

Note
The Color Replacer can only be used on embedded images. If the Color Replacer
is used on a linked image, the following error message appears “This image is linked
to a document. Do you want to unlink the image in order to edit it?”. Click on Yes to
unlink and embed the graphic.

Color Replacer dialog

Pipette
Switches color selection on when selected.
Replace
Replaces selected source colors in a selected image with the colors specified in the
Replace with boxes.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 161

 Colors
Lists the source colors and the replacement colors.
Source color
Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that specified in
the Replace with box.
Tolerance
Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in a source image. To replace colors that
are similar to the color selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors,
enter a higher value.
Replace with
Lists the available color palettes and replacement colors.
Transparency
Replaces transparent areas in the selected image with the color selected.

Figure 159: Color Replacer dialog

Figure 160: Example image before replacing colors

162 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 161: Example image after replacing colors

Replacing colors

Note
Using the Color Replacer replaces all occurrences of a Source color that are in the
selected image. Default selection of Transparent in the Replace with boxes removes
selected color from an image creating transparent areas in a selected image.
1) Select an embedded image.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog
(Figure 159).
3) Click on Pipette at the top of the Color Replacer dialog to activate the color selection
mode.
4) Move the cursor over the color to be replaced in the selected image.
5) Click on the color and following happens. A maximum of four colors can be selected in an
image.
– A preview of a selected color appears in the box next to Pipette each time a color is
clicked on.
– Each selected color appears in a Source color preview box with a check mark.
6) Enter the amount of tolerance required for replacing each selected color in the Tolerance
boxes. The default selection is 10% tolerance.
7) In Replace with and for each selected color, select a color palette from the drop-down
list, then select the required color from the color palette. Transparent is the default
selection.
8) After selecting up to four colors for replacement, click Replace to replace the colors in
the selected image. Examples of the original image and after color replacement are
shown in Figures 160 and 161.
9) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not satisfactory, select Edit > Undo:
Image with transparency Color Replacer in the Menu bar and repeat the color
replacement.

Replacing transparent areas

1) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 163

 2) Select an image with transparent areas.
3) Select Transparency in the Color Replacer dialog so that a check mark appears next to
Transparency.
4) Select a color palette from the drop-down list next to Transparency, then select a color
from the selected palette.
5) Click on Replace and the transparent areas are filled with the selected color.
6) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not satisfactory, select Edit > Undo:
Image with transparency Color Replacer in the Menu bar and repeat the transparency
replacement.

Conversion
Contour conversion
Consider the following points before carrying out a contour conversion on an object:
• Contour conversion converts a selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons, with
four corner points.
• Converting an image to a contour, the converted image is set as a background graphic.
• If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, contour conversion of a text
object). Enter a polygon group before selecting an individual polygon within a group. For
more information on working with groups, see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects.
• After converting an image to a contour, the object can no longer be edited normally. The
converted image has to be edited using Edit > Points on the Menu bar to adjust its
shape. For more information on editing points, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects.
• Any object editing must be completed before carrying out a contour conversion because
any further editing is not possible on the converted object.
• No confirmation dialog is provided for a contour conversion.
A contour conversion is carried out as follows:
1) Carry out all necessary editing on the object before converting to a contour.
2) Make sure the object is selected.
3) Convert the object to a contour using one of the following methods:
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Contour on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on a selected object and select Convert > To Contour from context menu.

Polygon conversion
Polygon conversion is used to convert a selected image into a group of polygons filled with color.
The image is also converted to a vector graphic and can be resized with no loss of image quality
or distortion of any text. After conversion, the graphic can be broken into groups of polygons and
then split into individual polygons. Breaking and splitting allows editing or deletion of individual
colors within the graphic.

164 |Draw Guide 24.8

Conversion options and controls
Number of colors
Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. LibreOffice generates
a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. The range for the number of
colors is between 8 and 32.
Point reduction
Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value entered. The range for
point reduction is between 0 and 32 pixels.
Fill holes
Fills the blank areas in the graphic that can be created when applying a point reduction.
Tile size
Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. Tile sizes range between 8 and 128
pixels.
Source image
Preview of the original image.
Vectorized image
Preview of the converted image.
Preview
Creates a preview of the converted image in Vectorized image without applying any
changes.
OK
Converts the image to a vector graphic consisting of polygons. The result is a metafile in
SVM format (Star View Metafile) used by LibreOffice and allows transfer of the converted
image to other LibreOffice documents.

Converting
1) Select an image in a drawing.
2) Convert the image into a polygon using one of the following methods and open the
Convert to Polygon dialog (Figure 162).
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Convert > To Polygon from the context menu.
3) Select Number of colors and Point reduction to be used in the conversion.
4) Select Fill holes to prevent any blank areas appearing in the converted image.
5) Enter the number of pixels to use for Tile size.
6) Click Preview to check how the converted graphic will look.
7) Make any necessary changes to the settings and check the preview again.
8) If the converted image meets the expected requirements, click OK to convert the image
to a polygon and close the Convert to Polygon dialog.

Breaking
After converting an image to polygons, the vectorized image can be broken into groups of
polygons. Each polygon group consists of one color and becomes an object that can be used in
another drawing.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 165

 Figure 162: Convert to Polygon dialog
1) Convert an image to polygons.
2) Make sure the converted image is selected, then use one of the following methods to
break the image into groups of polygons:
– Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Break from the context menu.
3) Click on a color in the image and drag the group of polygons filled with that color out of
the image to create a new image.
4) Alternatively, press Delete and delete the color from the image.

Splitting
After converting an image to polygons and breaking the image into polygon groups, these
polygon groups can be split into individual polygons.
1) Convert an image to polygons.
2) Break the image into groups of polygons.
3) Select the image, then use one of the following methods to split the polygon groups into
individual polygons:
– Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Shapes > Split from the context menu.

166 |Draw Guide 24.8

 – Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+K)
4) Select an individual polygon (or several polygons) in the image and drag the polygon
from the image to create a new image in the drawing.
5) Alternatively, press Delete to delete the selected polygon(s) from the image.

Bitmap conversion
All drawing objects placed into a LibreOffice drawing are vector graphics and these vector
graphics can be converted to a bitmap (raster graphic) in PNG format. Any transparent areas in
the original vector graphic are lost during conversion even though the PNG format used by Draw
supports transparencies. Use one of the following methods to convert a vector graphic to a
bitmap. No confirmation dialog is provided for a bitmap conversion.
• Go to Shape > Convert > To Bitmap on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the graphic and select Convert > To Bitmap from the context menu.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 167

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 7,
3D Objects
Introduction
Draw does not have the functionality of other drawing or image editing programs, but can
produce and edit 3D drawings. Using Draw, 3D scenes and extruded 3D shapes are created and
edited. Depending 3D type selected, there are possibilities for further editing of an object
(rotation, illumination, perspective, and so on).
• Extruded 3D shapes are simpler to create and edit.
• 3D scenes allow for greater customization.

3D object types
3D scenes
3D scenes are created from objects that use dimensions for the x, y, and z coordinates and can
contain object types, such as cube, sphere, extrusion object or rotation object. These object
types do not exist outside a 3D scene.
The Status Bar displays 3D scene selected (Figure 163) when it is selected and has been
created from a 2D object using body rotation or conversion. Alternatively, it is a ready-made 3D
object that has been inserted into a drawing.
A 3D scene is similar to a group. Just like a group, a 3D scene is entered for editing individual
objects within a 3D scene and exited after editing is completed. See Chapter 5, Combining
Multiple Objects for more information on entering, editing and exiting groups.
When a 3D scene is created from a selection of several 2D objects, a group is automatically
created as a single 3D scene. Enter this 3D scene so that individual objects within the 3D scene
can be changed, edited and rotated.

Note
Individual objects cannot be ungrouped when a 3D scene has been created from a
selection of 2D objects.

3D shapes
2D shapes are flat with only width and height dimensions, but 3D shapes are solid objects that
have a depth, width, and height. A 3D shape is created when a 2D shape or an object from the
Fontwork Gallery is converted to 3D using Toggle Extrusion. The Status Bar displays Shape
selected when this type of 3D object is selected (Figure 164).

Figure 163: Status Bar — information with 3D scene selected

Figure 164: Status Bar — information with 3D shape selected

170 |Draw Guide 24.8

3D shapes are viewed and edited in 3D or 2D mode. To edit in 2D mode, switch off extrusion,
make the editing changes, then switch back to 3D mode using Toggle Extrusion.

Note
Toggle Extrusion is only used when a 2D shape, or a 3D object that has been
extruded from a 2D shape, or an object from the Fontwork Gallery is selected in a
drawing. Toggle Extrusion cannot be used for text, lines, arrows, curves, and
polygons.

Creating 3D objects

Notes
Before creating 3D objects in a drawing, it is recommended that the extra 3D tools
(To 3D; To 3D Rotation Object; Toggle Extrusion) are added to the Drawing
toolbar using Visible Buttons or the Customize dialog. For more information on
using Visible Buttons and the Customize dialog, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the
Getting Started Guide.
After installing the 3D tools onto the Drawing toolbar, the tools only become available
for use when a 2D object is selected in a drawing.
Ready made 3D objects can be repositioned, resized, and edited in the same way as
2D objects. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information.

3D ready made objects

3D ready made objects are 3D scenes inserted into a drawing using one of the following
methods. The selection and drawing of 3D objects is the same for all methods of inserting a 3D
ready made object.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 165)
and select a 3D object from the sub-toolbar that opens.
• Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Objects toolbar
(Figure 166). This toolbar has the same options available as the 3D Objects sub-toolbar
on the Drawing toolbar.
• Go to Shapes > Insert > 3D Objects on the Menu bar and select a 3D object from the
submenu.
• Go to the 3D Objects panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar (Figure 167) and select a
3D object.

Figure 165: Drawing toolbar

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 171

 Figure 166: 3D-Objects toolbar

Figure 167: Shapes deck on Sidebar

Converting 2D objects
Conversion tools for converting a 2D object into a 3D object are available as follows:
• On the Drawing toolbar.
• On the Transformations toolbar.
• Right-clicking on the object and selecting from the context menu.
• Goint to Shape on the main Menu bar and selecting Transformations or Convert from
the context menu.
• Using the 3D Effects dialog.
To convert a 2D object into a 3D object use one of the following tools.
To 3D
Creates a 3D scene containing an extrusion object (Figure 168).
To 3D Rotation Object
Creates a 3D scene using a default rotation axis. The position of the default axis cannot
be adjusted (Figure 169).

172 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 168: Example of using To 3D conversion

Figure 169: Example of using To 3D Rotation Object conversion

Figure 170: Example of using In 3D Rotation Object conversion

Figure 171: Example of using Toggle Extrusion

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 173

 In 3D Rotation Object
Creates a 3D scene using a rotation axis. The position of the rotation axis can be
adjusted to create different 3D objects (Figure 170).
Toggle Extrusion
Creates a 3D shape by extruding a 2D object into 3D. Only 3D shapes that have been
extruded can be converted back to a 2D object (Figure 171).
Convert To Rotation Object
Available in the 3D Effects dialog. Converts a selected 2D object into a 3D rotation
object. Also, selecting several ungrouped 2D objects can be converted into a single 3D
rotation object. For more information, see “3D effects” on page 176.

Extrusion
Extrusion converts a 2D object into a 3D scene by extruding a 2D object toward the observer.
The scene is rotated by 20 degrees around the horizontal axis to make the 3D effect more
visible. After selecting a 2D object, convert it to a 3D scene using one of the following methods:
• Right-click on the 2D object and select Convert > To 3D from the context menu.
• Click on To 3D in the Drawing toolbar.
• Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D on the Menu bar.
• Click on Convert to 3D in the 3D Effects dialog. For more information, see “3D effects”
on page 176.

Rotation
To 3D Rotation Object or Convert to Rotation Object converts a 2D object into a 3D scene by
rotating the object using the left edge of the bounding box around the object as the axis of
rotation. Examples of 3D conversion using either of these rotation tools are shown in Figure 169.
The actual 3D scene created depends on the angle and shape of the object being rotated. After
selecting a 2D object in a drawing, convert it to a 3D scene using rotation using one of the
following methods:
• Right-click on a 2D object and select Convert > To 3D Rotation Object from the context
menu.
• Click on To 3D Rotation Object in the Drawing toolbar. By default, To 3D Rotation
Object is not installed on the Drawing toolbar, but is available for installation in Visible
Buttons for the Drawing toolbar.
• Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.
• Click on Convert To Rotation Object in the 3D Effects dialog. For more information, see
“3D effects” on page 176.
• Go to Shape > Convert > In 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.

Toggle extrusion
Extrusion is where parallel surfaces are moved to create a 3D shape. In Draw, the 2D surface is
moved forwards out of the drawing level. At the same time the object is slightly tilted and central
projection turned on, creating the impression of a 3D shape. Draw uses a default value for this
extrusion (body depth) based on the size of the 2D object. The value can be changed after the
extrusion, see “Editing 3D objects” on page 175.

174 |Draw Guide 24.8

Extrusion conversion is carried out using Toggle Extrusion. Extrusion only works on Basic
Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block Arrows, Flowcharts, Callouts, Stars and Banners, and
Fontwork. These are included as a part of the default set of tools on the Drawing toolbar, or in
the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
1) Select a 2D object in a drawing created from Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block
Arrows, Flowcharts, Callouts, Stars and Banners, or Fontwork.
2) Click on Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar to convert the 2D object into a 3D
shape.
3) To convert a 3D conversion back into a 2D object, select the 3D object and click on
Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar.

Note
Extrusion cannot be used on text objects created using Insert Text Box or Insert
Vertical Text.

Editing 3D objects

Note
Where 3D scenes are created from more than one 2D object, a 3D scene group is
automatically created. This 3D scene group cannot be ungrouped and any editing
carried out affects all 3D objects within the group. To edit an individual 3D object
within this 3D scene group, enter the group. For more information on working with
groups, see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects.

Position, Size and Rotation

Editing the position, size and rotation of 3D objects is similar to 2D objects. See Chapter 3,
Working with Objects for more information.

Figure 172: 3D-Settings toolbar

Figure 173: Example of changing 3D settings

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 175

3D settings
Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Settings on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Settings toolbar
(Figure 172). The 3D-Settings toolbar activates when a 3D shape is selected created from a 2D
object using “Toggle extrusion” on page 174.
Any changes made using the editing tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar are applied to the selected
3D shape immediately displaying the 3D effect. Figure 173 shows an example of tilting left,
increasing extrusion depth, and changing 3D color using the 3D-Settings toolbar.
The tools available for editing 3D shapes are as follows.
Tilt Down
Tilts an object downward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is
used.
Tilt Up
Tilts an object upward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is used.
Tilt Left
Tilts an object left (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is used.
Tilt Right
Tilts the selected object right (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is
used.
Depth
Opens a pop-up menu where the extrusion depth can be set from an object by a fixed or
custom amount.
Direction
Opens a pop-up menu where the view direction can be set to create an extrusion in
either a perspective or parallel projection.
Lighting
Opens a pop-up menu where the direction and intensity of the lighting can be set when
creating an extrusion.
Surface
Opens a pop-up menu where the surfaces of the object can be set as Wire Frame, Matt,
Plastic, or Metal display.
3D Color
Opens a pop-up menu where the color used for the extrusion can be set. This color does
not have to be the same as the color used for the original 2D object.

3D effects
The 3D Effects dialog provides options for editing 3D ready made objects, or 3D scenes. This
dialog is also used to convert a 2D object to 3D using the tools in the bottom left corner of the
dialog. Open the 3D Effects dialog using one of the following methods:
• Click on 3D Effects on the Standard or Line and Filling toolbar, if this has been added to
the tollobar.
• Go to Format > 3D-Effects on the Menu bar.
Any 3D effects applied to a 3D scene are not carried out until Assign is selected in the top right
of the 3D Effects dialog. This allows for all 3D effect changes to be carried out before application
to a 3D scene.

176 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Notes
The 3D Effects dialog cannot be used on 3D shapes created using Toggle
Extrusion because the correct formatting results will not be achieved. If the 3D
Effects dialog is used in error, remove any incorrect formatting by going to Format >
Default Formatting on the Menu bar.
Any options grayed out in the pages in the 3D Effects dialog cannot be used for a
selected object.

3D conversion
In the bottom left corner of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 174) are tools for converting a 2D object
into a 3D scene and changing the projection used in a 3D scene.
Convert to 3D
Converts the selected object into a 3D scene. This tool works in the same way as using
“Extrusion” on page 174.
Convert to Rotation Object
Converts a 2D object into a 3D scene using body rotation. This tool works in the same
way as using “Rotation” on page 174.

Figure 174: 3D Effects dialog — Geometry page

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 177

 Perspective On/Off
Switches perspective projection on or off for a 3D scene. Perspective projection is a
technique to create a linear illusion of depth. As objects get further away from the viewer,
a perspective drawing decreases in size at a constant rate.

Note
The 3D Effects dialog has five pages to provide options for Geometry, Shading,
Illumination, Textures, and Material. The tools to change pages for the different
types of 3D effects are located at the top of the 3D Effects dialog.

3D Effects — Geometry
Clicking on Geometry in the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 174) opens the options available on the
Geometry page to change the geometry of a 3D object.
Geometry
Defines the properties of an object in a 3D scene.
Rounded edges
Enter the amount required to round the corners of a 3D shape as shown by the
example in Figure 175. The default setting for Rounded edges is 10%.
Scaled depth
Enter the amount required to increase or decrease the frontal area of a selected 3D
object. Figure 176 shows an example where the Scaled depth has been decreased to
50%, then increased to 150%. The default setting for Scaled depth is 100%.

Figure 175: Example of rounded edges

(1) Original object (2) 10% rounded edges (3) 75% rounded edges

Figure 176: Example of scaled depth

(1) Original object (3) 100% scaled depth
(2) 50% scaled depth (4) 150% scaled depth

178 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 177: Example of rotation angle
(1) Original object (3) Rotation angle changed to 180 deg
(2) Converted using To 3D Rotation Object

Figure 178: Example of increasing depth

(1) Original object (3) Depth increased to 3cm
(2) Converted using To 3D
Rotation angle
Enter the angle in degrees to rotate a 2D object that has been converted to 3D using
To 3D Rotation Object. Figure 177 shows an example of a 2D circle where the
Rotation angle is changed to 180 degrees.
Depth
Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 2D object after it has been converted to 3D.
Figure 178 shows an example of the original object converted to 3D using the tool
To 3D, then increasing Depth to 3cm.
Segments
Changes the number of segments that LibreOffice Draw uses to draw a 3D object. The
higher the number of segments, the smoother the object surface is. However, a high
segment number may increase the time it takes to generate the 3D object on a display.
Figure 179 shows the difference on a 3D sphere when the segments have been
increased from 12 to 24 segments horizontally and vertically.
Horizontal
Enter the number of horizontal segments used in the selected 3D object.
Vertical
Enter the number of vertical segments used in the selected 3D object.
Normals
Modifies the rendering style of the 3D surface.

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 179

 Figure 179: Example of using segments
(1) 12 segments (2) 24 segments

Figure 180: Examples of object specific, flat, and spherical effects

(1) Object Specific (2) Flat (3) Spherical

Figure 181: Examples of invert normals and double sided illumination

(1) Invert Normals off, Double Sided (3) Invert Normals off, Double Sided
Illumination off Illumination on
(2) Invert Normals on, Double Sided (4) Invert Normals on, Double Sided
Illumination off Illumination on
Object-Specific
Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object (Figure 180).
Flat
Renders the 3D surface as polygons (Figure 180).
Spherical
Renders a smooth 3D surface regardless of the shape of the object (Figure 180).
Invert Normals
Inverted normal is a normal that is pointing in the wrong direction (Figure 181). This
tells a computer that an outside face is actually an inside face when it is not. If there is
a hollow design, an inverted normal can be indicated because both surfaces facing are
in and out in the same model.

180 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Double-Sided Illumination
Lights the outside and the inside of the object (Figure 181). This has only an effect, if
the inside is drawn at all, see Double-Sided. This is a setting for the whole of the 3D
scene and not for a single object within the scene.
Double-Sided
3D object has outside (front) and inside (back) faces (Figure 181). With Double-Sided
switched off, only the outside face of the object is rendered. The effect, when looking
from outside, is that the object is solid, but, when looking from inside, the front face is
transparent. If there is no view to the inside face, normal for an extruded 3D object
with solid texture, Double-Sided should be switched off to improve performance during
rendering. Any 3D object created using rotation often allows an inside view and it is
recommended that Double-Sided is switched on.

3D Effects — Shading
The Shading page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 182) provides options to set the shading,
shadow, and camera effects on a selected 3D object.
Shading
Specifies the mode of shading applied to a 3D object (Figure 183).

Figure 182: 3D Effects dialog — Shading page

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 181

 Figure 183: Examples of shading mode
(1) Gouraud (2) Phong (3) Flat

Figure 184: Examples of shadow surface angle

(1) 0 deg shadow (2) 50 deg shadow
Gouraud
Gouraud shading mode is a method used to simulate the differing effects of light and
color across the surface of an object. It achieves smooth lighting on low-polygon
surfaces without the heavy computational requirements of calculating lighting for each
pixel.
Phong
Phong shading mode is an interpolation technique for surface shading calculating the
normal of a point in a polygon by interpolating the vertices normals. The angle
between normal and lighting direction determines how much of the lighting is used to
color the pixel.
Flat
Flat shading mode refers to depth perception in 3D models or illustrations by varying
the darkness level. It assigns a single color of shading to a single segment on the
surface of the object.
Shadow
Adds or removes a shadow from a selected 3D object (Figure 184). A shadow is
generated only from the first light source. Enter a Surface Angle from the light source to
the surface between 0 to 90 degrees to cast a shadow.

182 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 185: Example of using camera angles
(1) Default settings — distance 2.6 (2) Distance 10 cm; focal length 100
cm; focal length 10 cm cm
Camera
Sets the camera options for a selected 3D scene as if a camera is being used to take a
photograph (Figure 185). Settings affect only central perspective, not parallel projection.
Distance
Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected 3D
scene. The default setting for distance is 2.6cm.
Focal length
Enter the focal length of the camera lens. A small value corresponds to a fisheye lens
and a large value to a telephoto lens. The default setting for focal length is 10cm.

3D Effects — Illumination
The Illumination page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 186) defines how a 3D scene is
illuminated and illumination settings apply to all 3D objects in a scene. Light source direction,
color, and ambient light are specified for a 3D scene. By default, one light source is already
selected when the Illumination page opens. A maximum of eight sources can be used and each
light source can use a different color.
Light source location and color are shown in the lower right corner of the Illumination page. The
vertical slider bar adjusts the lighting angle and the horizontal slider bar rotates the light about
the object. Alternatively, click on the light point and drag the light source to the required position.
To change the preview from a sphere to a cube, click on the small square to the right of the
horizontal slider bar and below the vertical slider bar. Each light source selected is shown as a
small colored sphere in the specified color. The larger colored sphere indicates the active light
source.
Selecting a light source and setting the illumination effects is as follows:
1) Select a Light source to turn the light source on. The icon changes to an illuminated bulb.
2) Click again on the selected light source to adjust the color for the light source.
3) Select a color for the light from one of the color palettes in the Light source drop-down
list. A different color can be used for each light source selected.

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 183

 Figure 186: 3D Effects dialog — Illumination page
4) Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Ambient light drop-down list to set the
color of the surrounding light.
5) To deselect a light source, select a light source already selected and click on the light
source again.

3D Effects — Textures
The Textures page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 187) shows the surface texture properties
set for a selected 3D object. The settings in the Textures page are only available if the area fill
of a 3D object is set to Gradient, Image, Pattern, or Hatch. For more information on changing
area fill, see Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes.
Type
Sets the color properties of the texture.
Black & White
Converts the texture to black and white.
Color
Converts the texture to color.
Mode
Shows or hides shading.

184 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 187: 3D Effects dialog — Textures page
Only Texture
Applies the texture without shading.
Texture and Shading
Applies the texture with shading to lighten or darken the illumination.
Projection X
Sets the options for displaying the texture along the X axis. Only one of the three
following options can be selected.
Object-Specific
Automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape and size of the object.
This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.
Parallel
Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis and is mirrored on the rear side of the
object. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
Circular
Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around an object.
Projection Y
Sets the options for displaying the texture along the Y axis. Only one of the three
following options can be selected.

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 185

 Object-Specific
Automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape and size of the object.
This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.
Parallel
Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis and is mirrored on the rear side of the
object. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
Circular
Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around an object.
Filtering
Filters out noise that can occur when a texture is applied to a 3D object.
Filtering On/Off
Applies a soft focus filter blurring the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.

3D Effects — Material
The settings on the Materials page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 188) change the 3D object
appearance to represent different materials. Materials and Textures can be combined with each
other to achieve the desired result.

Figure 188: 3D Effects dialog — Materials page

186 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Material
Assigns a color from a color palette. For custom colors, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw
Techniques for more information on creating custom colors.
Favorites
Select a material type for the selected object from the Favorites drop-down list.
Object color
Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Object color drop-down list to apply
to the object.
Illumination color
Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Illumination color drop-down list.
This illuminates the object and brightens parts of the object which lie in shadow
making the object seem more illuminated.
Specular
Sets the light reflection properties for a selected object simulating the reflecting capacity
of the surface. The position of an illuminated point is determined by the setting of the first
light source.
Color
Select a color to be reflected from the object from one of the color palettes in the Color
drop-down list.
Intensity
Enter the intensity of the specular effect as a percentage.
Colors Dialog
Opens the Pick a Color dialog where custom colors are defined using the 2D graphic and
numerical gradient chart. Any colors created are stored in the custom palette. See
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more information on creating custom colors.

Note
Metallic and glass surfaces do not simulate well because the appearance of these
materials is produced using reflection.

Tip
Do not use a very high brightness value for individual colors. Colors are additive and
it is easy to end up with a colored area that is white.

Combining objects
Multiple 3D objects cannot be combined using Shape > Combine on the Menu bar, or the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+Shift+K). Multiple 2D objects have to be created
first, then a single 3D object created as follows (see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for
more information on combining objects):
1) Create multiple 2D objects and carry out all necessary editing changes.
2) Make sure all 2D objects are selected to create a single 3D object.
3) Create a single 3D object combining the selected 2D objects using one of the following
methods (examples of creating 3D objects are shown in Figure 189):
– Click on To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Drawing toolbar.

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 187

 Figure 189: Example of creating 3D object from multiple 2D objects
(1) Multiple 2D objects combined (3) 3D object created using To 3D Rotation
(2) 3D object created using To 3D Object
– Right-click on the selected multiple 2D objects and select Convert > To 3D or To 3D
Rotation Object from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.

Assembling 3D objects
3D objects that each form a separate 3D scene can be combined or assembled into a single 3D
scene. An example procedure for assembling 3D objects is as follows and shown in Figure 190:
1) Select a 3D object (for example, a cube) from 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar, or
Shapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in a drawing.
2) Select a second 3D object (for example, a sphere) from 3D Objects on the Drawing
toolbar, or Shapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in the drawing.
3) If necessary, set the area fill to None and the lines to Continuous to create wire frame
objects. This makes it easier to position both objects in the assembled 3D scene.
4) Select the second 3D object (sphere) and go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar, or right-click
on the object and select Cut from the context menu.
5) Double-click the first 3D object (cube) to enter the group, or go Shape > Group > Enter
Group on the Menu bar.
6) Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar, or right-click on the first 3D object and select Paste
from the context menu. The sphere now appears inside the cube and is now part of the
same group.
7) If required, edit the individual objects, or change their position within the group.
8) Double-click outside the 3D assembled scene to exit the group, or go to Shape > Group
> Exit Group on the Menu bar.

188 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 190: Example of assembling 3D objects

Note
The second object also reappears in its original position when Paste is carried out.
This object is NOT part of the assembled 3D scene and can be deleted if necessary.

Chapter 7, 3D Objects | 189

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 8,
Connections, Flowcharts,
and Organization Charts
Connectors and gluepoints
Connectors are lines or arrows where the ends of a line, or arrow, automatically lock to a
connection or gluepoint on the border of an object. Connector lines between objects remain
connected to objects, even when objects are moved or rearranged. Also, when an object with a
connector attached is moved or resized, the connector automatically adjusts its shape to
accommodate the changes. For example, create a flowchart, or an organization chart, using
connectors instead of simple lines removes the need to redraw lines between objects when
making changes to a chart.
When a connector is created or selected, the selection handles are different to the normal
selection handles used on lines or objects. The termination handles of a connector are round at
the start and end points of a connector, and square in the center of the lines of a connector, as
shown by the example of a straight connector in Figure 191. The square selection handles on
the selected connector are used to change the routing of a connector.

Connectors
LibreOffice Draw has a comprehensive selection of connectors, for example, when used in a
flowchart or organization chart. The default set of connectors can be accessed using one of the
following methods:
• Click the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open a pop-up
toolbar. The Connectors icon changes shape depending on the last connector used.
• Select a connector from the options available in the Connectors panel in the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar.

Connectors subtoolbar
If required, the connectors on the Drawing toolbar can be displayed as a Connectors subtoolbar
as follows:
1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open a
pop-up toolbar.

Figure 191: Example of connectors between objects

192 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 192: Connectors subtoolbar
(1) Connector Ends with Arrow (13) Connector Ends with Circle
(2) Straight Connector Ends with Arrow (14) Straight Connector Ends with Circle
(3) Curved Connector Ends with Arrow (15) Curved Connector Ends with Circle
(4) Line Connector Ends with Arrow (16) Line Connector Ends with Circle
(5) Connector (17) Connector Starts with Circle
(6) Straight Connector (18) Straight Connector Starts with Circle
(7) Curved Connector (19) Curved Connector Starts with Circle
(8) Line Connector (20) Line Connector Starts with Circle
(9) Connector Starts with Arrow (21) Connector with Circles
(10) Straight Connector Starts with Arrow (22) Straight Connector with Circle
(11) Curved Connector Starts with Arrow (23) Curved Connector with Circle
(12) Line Connector Starts Arrow (24) Line Connector with Circle
2) Click on the line at the top of the pop-up toolbar and drag the subtoolbar onto the
Workspace.
3) Release the toolbar to create the Connectors subtoolbar (Figure 192).

Connector types and groups

The full range of available connectors are accessed by clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right of
the Connectors subtoolbar and selecting Visible Buttons from the context menu. Depending on
the computer system being used, connectors already installed on the Connectors subtoolbar are
indicated either by a check mark against the name, or the connector icon is highlighted.
Connectors are grouped into four main groups as follows:
Connector
Standard connectors start with Connector. Line segments run vertically and horizontally.
Creates a connector with one or more 90 degree angle bends.
Line
Line connectors start with Line. Consists of a line segment with two smaller segments at
the ends and draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint. To adjust the length of the
line segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click on the connector and drag the
selection handle.
Straight
Straight connectors start with Straight. Consists of a single line and draws a straight line
connector.
Curved
Curved connectors start with Curved. Based on Bézier curves, a curved connector is
drawn and bends around objects.
Connectors are installed on the Connectors subtoolbar in the same order they appear in the
Visible Buttons drop-down list.

Adding connectors to objects

1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open the
options available for selecting connectors.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 193

 Figure 193: Example of object connector gluepoints
2) Select the type of connector required and move the cursor onto the first object. When the
cursor is over an object, small crosses appear as gluepoints around the object edges
replacing the object selection handles, as shown by the example in Figure 193.
3) Position the cursor over a gluepoint, then click and drag the cursor toward another object
to start creating a connector. When the cursor reaches the target object, small crosses
appear indicating the gluepoints around the object edges.
4) Move the cursor over the required gluepoint on the target object and release the
connector to draw the connector. The round selection handles at each end of the
connector are attached to the gluepoints on each object.
5) If necessary, use the square control handles that appear on the connector to adjust the
connector route so that it does not cover any other object in the connector route. See
“Modifying connectors” on page 194 for more information.

Notes
The start and end round selection handles of a connector cannot be swapped. To
change the start and end points of a connector, the connector has to be deleted and
a new connector drawn in the opposite direction.
The end point of a connector can also be positioned in an empty part of a drawing
where it is locked into place. This end point can then be moved and attached to an
object when required.

Modifying connectors
Connectors can be modified using one of the following methods:
• To detach or reposition a connector, click and drag one of the round selection handles of
a connector line to a different location.
• To change the connector route between objects so that the connector does not overlap
any objects on the route, click on one of the square selection handles on the connector
line and drag it to a new position.

194 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 194: Connector dialog
• To modify a connector, right-click on the connector and select Connector from the
context menu to open the Connector dialog (Figure 194). Use this dialog to change
connector type and connector properties.
The options available in the Connector dialog are as follows:
Type
Select the connector type and group from the drop-down list. See “Connector types and
groups” on page 193 for more information.
Line skew
Defines the skew of a connector line. The dialog preview displays the result of any
changes.
Line spacing
Sets the spacing around a connector.
Begin horizontal
Enter the amount of horizontal space required at the beginning of a connector.
End horizontal
Enter the amount of horizontal space required at the end of a connector.
Begin vertical
Enter the amount of vertical space required at the beginning of a connector.
End vertical
Enter the amount of vertical space required at the end of a connector
Preview box
Displays a preview of the selected connector and the objects the connector is connected
to. The preview changes as changes to the selected connector are made using the
Connector dialog. A left click zooms in on the preview and a right-click zooms out.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 195

 Figure 195: Gluepoints toolbar

Gluepoints
Gluepoints are not the same as object selection handles. The selection handles are for moving
or changing the shape of an object (see Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information).
Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an object so that when the object moves, the
connector stays fixed to that object.
All objects have gluepoints, as shown by the example in Figure 193 on page 194. Gluepoints are
not normally displayed on an object and only become visible when a connector is selected using
one of the following methods.
• Select Connectors on the Drawing toolbar. The connector icon displayed on the
Drawing toolbar is the previous connector type used.
• Select a connector type in the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
To add, customize or delete gluepoints, go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to
activate the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 195). This toolbar only becomes visible after using one of
the following methods:
• Select Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
• Select Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.

Notes
Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar is not part of the default set of
tools for the Drawing toolbar. To add Show Gluepoint Functions icon to the
Drawing toolbar, right-click in an empty area on the Drawing toolbar and select
Visible Buttons > Gluepoints from the context menu.
Each gluepoint added to an object can have only one horizontal position and one
vertical position. Only one of the horizontal position tools and one of the vertical
position tools can be selected and used at any one time.

Gluepoint types
When the Gluepoints toolbar opens, only the five tools on the left of Gluepoint Relative are
active. The remaining six tools on the right of the toolbar only become active when Gluepoint
Relative is deselected.
Insert Gluepoint
Inserts a gluepoint at the cursor position in an object when the button is clicked.
Exit Direction Left
Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Top
Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Right
Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint.

196 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Exit Direction Bottom
Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint.
Gluepoint Relative
When selected, the gluepoint moves when an object is resized maintaining its position
relative to the object borders. When deselected, a gluepoint can be repositioned after the
object is resized. This tool is selected by default when the Gluepoint toolbar opens.
The following six tools only become active when Gluepoint Relative is deselected.
Gluepoint Horizontal Left
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the left edge of the
object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Center
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the center of the
object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Right
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the right edge of the
object.
Gluepoint Vertical Top
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the top edge of the
object.
Gluepoint Vertical Center
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the vertical center of
the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Bottom
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the bottom edge of the
object.

Adding gluepoints
By default, objects have four gluepoints, as shown in the example in Figure 193 on page 194.
Additional gluepoints are added to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate the Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:
– Select Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
3) Select the object, then click on Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints toolbar.
4) Move the cursor to the required position on the selected object and the cursor changes
shape. Normally this is a cross, but the actual shape used depends on the computer
setup.
5) Click once to add a gluepoint. To add more gluepoints, move the cursor to a new position
and click.
6) When adding gluepoints is completed, move the cursor off the selected object and click
in an empty space to deselect the object.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 197

 7) Alternatively, right-click on a gluepoint previously added to the object and select Insert
Gluepoint from the context menu, then click and drag the new gluepoint to the required
position.
8) Select the type of gluepoint required from the options available on the Gluepoints toolbar.
See “Gluepoint types” on page 196 for more information.

Note
For objects with no fill, gluepoints are added to the border of an empty object.

Tip
When adding, moving or customizing gluepoints, it is recommended to use the zoom
function making it easier to work with gluepoints. See Chapter 3, Working with
Objects for more information. Also, gluepoints can snap to the grid making it easier to
position a gluepoint.

Customizing gluepoint exit direction

Customize the exit direction for a gluepoint that is already added to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate and open the
Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that is already added to an object and select the gluepoint for
customization.
3) Select the required exit direction for a connector attached to the gluepoint using one of
the following methods:
– Select the required exit direction on the Gluepoints toolbar.
– Right-click on a gluepoint and select an exit direction from the context menu.

Customizing gluepoint positioning

Note
Only gluepoints that are added to an object can be customized. The default
gluepoints (example shown in Figure 193 on page 194) included with an object
cannot be customized or deleted.

Customize the horizontal and vertical positioning for a gluepoint that is already added to an
object as follow:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate and open the
Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that on an object to select the gluepoint for customization.
3) Click on Gluepoint Relative on the Gluepoints toolbar to deselect the tool, or right-click
on the gluepoint and select Gluepoint Relative from the context menu to deselect the
tool.
4) Select the horizontal and vertical positioning tools required for the gluepoint using one of
the following methods. Only one horizontal positioning tool and one vertical positioning
tool can be used at any one time:
– Click and select the required horizontal or vertical positioning tool in the Gluepoints
toolbar.

198 |Draw Guide 24.8

 – Right-click on the gluepoint and select the required horizontal and vertical positioning
from the context menu.

Deleting gluepoints
1) Select a gluepoint for deletion that has previously been added to the object.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key, or go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar.

Connector text
Text is easily added and formatted to connectors making a flowchart or organization chart easier
to follow. See Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on working with and
formatting text.

Adding text
1) Select a connector and the control points become active.
2) Enter text mode using one of the following methods. A flashing text cursor appears close
to the connector and the Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 196) opens.
– Click on Insert Text Box or Insert Vertical Text (if added) on the Drawing toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2 to create horizontal text on the selected connector.
3) Type the required text for the connector.
4) If necessary, format the connector text. See “Formatting text” on page 199 for more
information on formatting and editing text text.
5) When adding and formatting text is complete, move the cursor away from the text and
connector, then click to end text mode. This also closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Note
With a default installation of LibreOffice, the Insert Text Box and Insert Vertical
Text tools may not be installed on the Drawing toolbar. To add text tools to the
Drawing toolbar, right-click in an empty area in the Drawing toolbar and go to Visible
Buttons, then select Text Box and/or Vertical Text from the context menu.

Formatting text
1) Select a connector with text added and activate the control points to enter text mode.
See “Adding text” on page 199 for more information on adding text to a connector.
2) Use the tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar, or the options available in Format
> Text on the Menu bar to format the text. By default, connector text is formatted with
horizontal central alignment and vertical central positioning for the connector text
paragraph.
3) Right-click on the connector text and select Text Attributes from the context menu to
open the Text dialog (Figure 197) and format the connector text using the options
available in the dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes to the text and close the Text dialog.
5) Move the cursor away from text and connector, then click to end the text mode. This also
closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 199

 Figure 196: Text Formatting toolbar

Figure 197: Text dialog — Text page

Notes
The options available for text animation are not recommended for connector text
unless the drawing is going to be displayed as part of a presentation. See the
Impress Guide for more information on text animation.
The options available for text columns are not recommended for connector text. Text
columns are normally used for text that is placed into a text box when adding
information to a drawing, or into an object such as a rectangle or circle. For more
information on text columns, see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.
The options available in the Text dialog are as follows:
Drawing Object Text
Fit to frame
Resizes the text to fit the entire area of a connector rectangle or frame.
Adjust to contour
Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected connector.

200 |Draw Guide 24.8

Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to leave between the connector and the borders of the text.
Text Anchor
Select one of nine positions to anchor the text within the connector rectangle.
Full width
Anchors the text to the full width of the connector rectangle. When selected, only the top,
middle and bottom center positions can be used to anchor the text.

Figure 198: Example flowchart

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 201

 Figure 199: Flowchart subtoolbar
(1) Flowchart: Process (15) Flowchart: Card
(2) Flowchart: Alternate Process (16) Flowchart`: Punched Type
(3) Flowchart: Decision (17) Flowchart: Summing Junction
(4) Flowchart: Data (18) Flowchart: Or
(5) Flowchart: Predefined Process (19) Flowchart: Collate
(6) Flowchart: Internal Storage (20) Flowchart: Sort
(7) Flowchart: Document (21) Flowchart: Extract
(8) Flowchart: Multidocument (22) Flowchart: Merge
(9) Flowchart: Terminator (23) Flowchart: Stored Data
(10) Flowchart: Preparation (24) Flowchart: Delay
(11) Flowchart: Manual Input (25) Flowchart: Sequential Access
(12) Flowchart: Manual Operation (26) Flowchart: Magnetic Disc
(13) Flowchart: Connector (27) Flowchart: Direct Access Storage
(14) Flowchart: Off-page Connector (28) Flowchart: Display

Flowcharts
An example flowchart is shown in Figure 198 and the following basic steps are used when
creating a flowchart:
• When adding objects or flowchart shapes to a flowchart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic
Shapes for information on how to draw and resize object shapes.
• Add text to each flowchart shape to make it easily identified in the flowchart. See
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more
information.
• Use connector lines in a flowchart. This allows repositioning of an object in a flowchart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the flowchart. See “Who is this
user guide for?” on page 8 for more information.
• Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a flowchart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
• Use the alignment and distribution functions to give a flowchart a more professional look.
See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.
• Use the Flowchart subtoolbar (Figure 199) and its a large selection of flowchart tools to
create a flowchart (also known as flow diagrams). Click on Flowchart on the Drawing
toolbar to open the Flowchart subtoolbar.

202 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 200: Example organization chart

Organization charts
Draw does not have a toolbar for organization charts, but these charts are easily created using
basic shapes, flowchart shapes, and connectors. Hierarchy in an organization is easily indicated
using shading and/or color. When using shading and color in an organization chart, make sure
the selection provides a good contrast between the text and the shading or color. This makes the
chart easy to read on a computer display, or in a printed document. An example of an
organization chart is shown in Figure 200.
• When adding objects to a chart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes for information on
how to draw and resize object shapes.
• Add text to each object in the organization chart to make it easily identified in the chart.
See Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for
more information.
• Use connectors in an organization chart. This allows repositioning of an object in a chart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the chart. See “Who is this user
guide for?” on page 8 for more information.
• Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a chart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
• Use the alignment and distribution functions to give an organization chart a more
professional look. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.
• Duplicate objects when more than one of the same shape and size is required. See
Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 203

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 9,
Adding and Formatting Text
Introduction
Text used in drawings is placed inside an object or text box. This chapter provides information on
how to create, format, use, delete text, and information for various types of text that can be
inserted into a drawing. Also, information is included on how to insert special forms of text such
as ordered or unordered lists, tables, fields, hyperlinks, columns, and Fontwork.

Note
When selecting text tools to add text to a drawing, Draw automatically switches to
text mode. Also, the Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 201) automatically opens
replacing the Line and Filling toolbar at the top of the drawing.

Text mode
Activating text mode
Before text is inserted into a drawing, text mode must be activated using one of the following
methods.
• For horizontal text only, go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.
• For horizontal text only, use the keyboard shortcut F2.
Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text, or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on the
Drawing toolbar (Figure 202), or Text toolbar (Figure 203).

Adding vertical text

If Insert Vertical Text is not available on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 202), it is added to the
toolbar as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > Language Settings > Languages) on the Menu bar to open the
Languages page in the Options dialog.
2) In Default Languages for Documents, select the option Asian. Accept the default
settings for this option.
3) Click OK to close the Options dialog and save the changes.
4) Right-click in an empty area on the Drawing toolbar, or the downward triangle ▼, and
select Visible Buttons from the context menu.
5) Select Vertical Text from the drop-down list of options to add Insert Vertical Text to the
Drawing toolbar.

Figure 201: Text Formatting toolbar

206 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 202: Drawing toolbar

Figure 203: Text toolbar

Adding vertical text

If Insert Vertical Text is not available on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 202), it is added to the
toolbar as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > Language Settings > Languages) on the Menu bar to open the
Languages page in the Options dialog.
2) In Default Languages for Documents, select the option Asian. Accept the default
settings for this option.
3) Click OK to close the Options dialog and save the changes.
4) Right-click in an empty area on the Drawing toolbar, or the downward triangle ▼, and
select Visible Buttons from the context menu.
5) Select Vertical Text from the drop-down list of options to add Insert Vertical Text to the
Drawing toolbar.

Text toolbar
It is recommended to have the Text toolbar (Figure 203) available in Draw when working with
text. If the Text toolbar is not available, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Text
from the context menu to add it to the Draw workspace.

Text boxes
Creating text boxes
When text is added to a drawing, a text box is automatically created. By default, the text box
either expands horizontally to accommodate a single line of horizontal text, or vertically to
accommodate a single line of vertical text.

Note
Text boxes are only for text and cannot contain illustrations, inline pictures, formulas,
tables, or objects.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 207

 Figure 204: Example of text information on Status Bar
1) Activate text mode in Draw for horizontal or vertical, see “Activating text mode” on
page 206. The Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens, replacing the Line and Filling
toolbar.
2) Click at the approximate position in the drawing to insert the text box. A text box is
created containing a flashing text cursor for the operating system and computer setup
being used.
3) Type or paste the text into the text box and the text box expands either horizontally or
vertically to accommodate a single line of text. Also, the left corner of the Status Bar
indicates text edit mode and the position of the text cursor (Figure 204).
4) To create multiple lines in the text box, use one of the following methods:
– Press the Enter key at the end of a line of text to create single line paragraphs inside
the text box. The text box expands to accommodate more lines of text.
– For horizontal text, click and drag the text cursor horizontally creating a text box with
the approximate width required. As the limits of the text box are reached, the text
automatically word wraps inside the text box and increases text box height as more
text lines are added.
– For vertical text, click and drag the text cursor vertically creating a text box with the
approximate height required. As the limits of the text box are reached, the text
automatically word wraps inside the text box and increases text box width as more text
lines are added.
5) Move, resize, rotate or format the text box as required. For more information, see the
following sections and Chapter 3, Working with Objects.
6) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar. For more
information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 217.
7) When adding and formatting text is completed, click outside the text box to save the
changes and deselect the text box.

Text box borders

By default, when a text box is created, the borders of the text box are only displayed when the
text box is selected. If necessary, use one of the following methods to create a visible border
around the text box.

208 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 205: Line and Filling toolbar

Line and Filling toolbar

1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in edit
mode.
2) If the Line and Filling toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on
the Menu bar to open the toolbar.
3) In Line Style on the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 205), select a line style from the
options in the drop-down list.
4) In Line Thickness on the Line and Filling toolbar, enter a line width for the text box
border.
5) In Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, select a color from one of the available
color palettes, or create a custom color.
6) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode and save the changes.

Line dialog
1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in edit
mode.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 206) using one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the text box border and select Line from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
3) Click on Line to open the Line page.
4) Click on Line to open the Line page.
5) In Style, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
6) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or create
a custom color.
7) In Thickness, enter a width for the line style selected.
8) In Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style, if required.
9) In Corner Style, select the type of corner style from the drop-down list.
10) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog, then click outside the text box to
exit edit mode.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 209

 Figure 206: Line dialog — Line page — Text box border

Figure 207: Example of using rounded corners on a text box

Note
For a corner style to be clearly visible in a text box border, it is recommended to set
the line thickness above 0.35cm, as shown by the example in Figure 207.

Line panel in Sidebar

1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in edit
mode.
2) In the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck in the Sidebar, then click
on Line to open the Line panel (Figure 208).
3) In Line, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
4) In Thickness, enter a width for the line style selected.

210 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 208: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar for Text Box

5) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or create
a custom color.
6) In Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style, if required.
7) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Moving text boxes

1) Click on a text box to select it. The border is displayed indicating that the text box is in
edit mode.
2) Move the cursor over the border. The cursor changes shape to the move symbol for the
computer setup (for example, a clenched hand).
3) Click on the border and drag the text box to a new position in the drawing. A ghosted
outline of the text box shows where it will be placed (Figure 209).
4) Release the text box when it is in the required position.
5) To accurately position a text box, use the Position and Size dialog, or the Position and
Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects
for more information.
6) When the text box is in the required position, click outside the text box to save the
changes and deselect the text box.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 211

 Figure 209: Example moving a text box

Figure 210: Example resizing a text box

Resizing text boxes

1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in edit
mode.
2) Move the cursor over one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape to the
resizing symbol for the computer setup (for example, a double-headed arrow). The
selection handles are used to resize the text box as follows:
3) Corner handles change the width and height of the text box simultaneously.
4) Top and bottom selection handles change the height of the text box.
5) Right and left selection handles change the width of the text box.
6) Click and drag the border to a new position to resize the text box. A ghosted outline of
the text box shows is displayed as the text box is resized, as shown by the example in
Figure 210.
7) Release the text box when it reaches the required size.
8) To accurately resize a text box, use the Position and Size dialog, or the Position and
Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects
for more information.
9) When the text box is at the required size, click outside the text box to save the changes
and deselect the text box.

Note
When resizing a text box, press and hold the Shift key to maintain text box
proportions, then click and drag a selection handle to resize. Release the cursor
before releasing the Shift key.

212 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 211: Example rotating a text box

Rotating text boxes

1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in edit
mode.
2) Click again on the text border and the selection handles change shape and color to
indicate rotation mode. Also, a rotation point appears in the center of the text box.
3) Click on a corner selection handle and drag to rotate the text box. A ghosted outline of
the text box being rotated around the rotation point appears and the current angle of
rotation is shown in the status bar (Figure 211).
4) If required, click and drag the rotation point to a new position and change rotation angle
of the text box. The rotation point can be positioned outside of the text box.
5) Release the text box when it is at the required rotation angle.
6) To accurately rotate a text box, use the Rotation page in Position and Size dialog, or the
Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information.

Note
When rotating a text box, the top, bottom, and side selection handles are visible, but
not available for rotating a text box. Also, text boxes cannot be sheared, slanted, or
flipped vertically/horizontally.

Formatting text boxes

The formatting options available for area fill and box borders of text boxes are the same as other
objects in a drawing. After formatting a text box to match the drawing requirements, the text
attributes are formatted to make the text appear correctly inside the text box. See Chapter 3,
Working with Objects for more information on formatting the area fill or borders of a text box.
1) Select a text box and use one of the following methods to open the Text dialog
(Figure 212).
– Right-click on the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Text Attributes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Text in the Text dialog to open the Text page and access to the formatting
options.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 213

 Figure 212: Text dialog — Text page — Drawing Object Text
3) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page to access options
for animating the text. For more information on using text animation in a drawing, see
“Text animation” on page 228.
4) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page to access options for
creating columns in a text box. For more information on using text columns in a drawing,
see “Text columns” on page 225.
5) Click OK to save the changes to text attributes and close the Text dialog.
6) Click in a blank space to deselect the text box and end the text editing mode.

Text box formatting options

Drawing Object Text
Fit width to text
Expands or reduces text box width to match the length of the text, if the text box is
smaller or larger than the text. Can be used with Fit height to text to automatically
adjust width and height of the text box to the text.
Fit height to text
Expands or reduces text box height to match the height of the text, if the text box is
smaller or larger than the text. Can be used with Fit width to text to automatically
adjust width and height of the text box to the text.
Fit to frame
Resizes text width and height to use the entire area of a text box without changing text
box width or height. This option is not available if Fit width to text and/or Fit height to
text options are selected.
Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to create margins between the text and the borders of a text
box.

214 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Text Anchor
Anchors the text to one of nine positions within a text box. The left and right anchor
positions can only be selected when Full width is NOT selected. A text anchor only
determines the position of the text within a text box and does not change the paragraph
alignment of text inside a text box.
Full width
When selected, text box width expands to fit the longest paragraph of text inside a text
box as a single line. When selected, only the top, middle or bottom center positions in
Text Anchor can be used to anchor text inside a text box.

Deleting text boxes

1) Click on the text box so that the selection handles are visible indicating that the text box
is in edit mode.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key. The text box is deleted without any warning.

Text in objects
By default, an object is not dynamic when first created in Draw and does not behave like a text
box. Any text placed inside a Draw object does not word wrap.
To keep text within the borders of an object, use paragraphs, line breaks, smaller text size,
increasing object size, or a combination of all methods. Actual method method available
depends on the type of object selected.

Note
Text can be added to most objects. However, text cannot be added to 3D objects, or
control elements such as buttons.

Adding text to objects

An example of adding text into a object is shown in Figure 213. The top object does not have the
word wrap option applied and the bottom object has the word wrap option applied.
1) Create an object in a drawing and make sure the object is selected with the selection
handles displayed.

Figure 213: Example of text word wrap inside an object

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 215

 2) Enter text mode on the selected object using one of the following methods:
– Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text, or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on
the Drawing or Text toolbar.
– For horizontal text, double-click on the selected object.
– For horizontal text, use the keyboard shortcut F2.
3) Type or paste text into the selected object.
4) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, the panels in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar, or the options in Format on the Menu bar. For more
information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 217.
5) If the text goes outside the object borders, access text formatting options for a Draw
object as follows:
a) Double click on the text inside the selected object to select the text.
b) Right click on the selected text and select Text Attributes to open the Text dialog for
Drawing Object Text (Figure 212 on page 214).
c) Format the text using the available options. For more information, see "Text options for
objects" on page 217.
6) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page and access
animation options for text. For more information on using text animation in a drawing, see
“Text animation” on page 228.
7) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page and access options
for creating columns inside an object. For more information on using text columns in a
drawing, see “Text columns” on page 225.

Figure 214: Text dialog — Text page — Custom Shape

216 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Note
The Text dialog for Custom Shape Text (Figure 214) used for adding text to objects is
similar to the Text dialog (Figure 212 on page 214) used for formatting text boxes.

Text options for objects

Custom Shape Text
Word wrap text in shape
Wraps text to fit inside an object. For example, if the width of an object is changed,
then the height of the object either increases or decreases allowing for an increase or
decrease in the number of text lines.
Resize shape to fit text
Resizes an object to fit the text that is being entered into the object. For example, if the
object already contains one multi-line paragraph of text and this option is selected,
then object width expands and height decreases until the text is a single line of text.
Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to leave between the text and borders of an object.
Text Anchor
Anchors the text to one of nine positions within a text box. The left and right anchor
positions can only be selected when Full width is not selected. A text anchor only
determines the position of text within a text box and does not change the paragraph
alignment of text inside an object.
Full width
When selected, object width expands to fit the longest paragraph of text inside an object
as a single line. When selected, only the top, middle or bottom center positions in Text
Anchor can be used to anchor text inside a text box.

Formatting text
Text formatting creates a more professional drawing without distracting elements. Text formatting
tools are available on the Text Formatting toolbar and drop-down menus in Format on the Menu
bar. For more information on text formatting, see the Writer Guide.
When several text boxes and/or objects in a drawing require the same text formatting, it is
recommended to use drawing styles. For more information on using and creating styles, see
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes.

Note
Using Edit > Paste on the Menu bar, or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V (macOS
⌘+V) pastes copied text directly into a drawing creating an OLE object and DOES
NOT create a Draw object. When creating text boxes, or adding text to Draw objects,
it is recommended to paste text into Draw objects as unformatted text.

Pasting text
Pasting copied text from another object, drawing, or document into a text box or object, the
copied text retains formatting from the source drawing or document. This copied text may not
match text formatting already in use. It is recommended to paste text into a drawing as
unformatted text, then apply formatting to match the text formatting already used in the target
drawing.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 217

 1) Copy and paste text as unformatted text into a drawing, or draw object using one of the
following methods:
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Unformatted Text on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Special on the Menu bar to open the Paste
Special dialog. Select Unformatted text and click OK to close the dialog.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+V (macOS ⌘+Shift+V) and the Paste
Special dialog opens. Select Unformatted text and click OK to close the dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Paste on the Standard toolbar and select
Unformatted text from the context menu.
2) Format the pasted text to the drawing requirements, or apply a drawing style.
Unformatted text is pasted into a text box at the cursor position, or inside a selected
object and formatted to the default drawing style.

Quick font resizing

After selecting text, increasing or decreasing font size can be quickly carried out using the tools
Increase Font Size (Ctrl+]) (macOS ⌘+]) and Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) (macOS ⌘+[)
on the Text Formatting toolbar.

Note
When using quick font resizing, any change in font size depends on the standard
font sizes available for the font in use in the target drawing object.

Selecting text
Text must be selected before it can be formatted using one of the following methods. Any
formatting changes apply only to the selected text.
• To format all the text in a text box or object, click once on the border of the text box or
object to display the selection handles. Formatting changes then apply to all text in the
text box or object.
• To format only part of the text, select text using one of the following methods:
– Click in the text and drag the cursor over the text to highlight the text.
– Double-click on text to select a complete word, or triple-click to select a whole
paragraph.
– Click in the text, then press and hold the Shift key, then use the arrow keys to select
text.

Paragraph formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual paragraph formatting is applied directly to selected paragraphs. This direct or
manual formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied using paragraph formatting
and drawing styles.
1) Select the text (see “Selecting text” on page 218) and format using one of the following
methods:
– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.

218 |Draw Guide 24.8

 – Go to Format on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the drop-down
menu. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context menu, or dialog providing
further formatting options to apply to the selected text.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character dialogs.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character panels in the Properties
deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click outside the text box, or object to deselect the text edit mode.

Paragraph dialog
1) Click anywhere in the paragraph being formatted.
2) Use one of the following methods to open the Paragraph dialog (Figure 215).
– Right-click on the selected text and select Paragraph from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options on the tabbed pages of the Paragraph dialog to format the text.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Paragraph dialog.
5) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Note
For information on the various text formatting options available in the pages of the
Paragraph dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Figure 215: Paragraph dialog — Indents & Spacing page

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 219

 Figure 216: Paragraph panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Paragraph panel in Sidebar

Use the Paragraph panel (Figure 216) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to format
paragraphs of text. Formatting options are limited, but similar in use to the formatting options
available in the Paragraph dialog. Any formatting applied to a paragraph using the Paragraph
panel is immediate.
1) Click anywhere in the paragraph being formatted.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) If necessary, click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Paragraph title bar to open
the Paragraph panel.
4) Format the text using the various options available in the Paragraph panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Paragraph
dialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the Paragraph
panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

Character formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual character formatting is applied directly to selected characters. This direct or
manual formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied using character or paragraph
formatting and drawing styles.
1) Select the characters for formatting, see “Selecting text” on page 218 for more
information.

220 |Draw Guide 24.8

 2) Format characters using one of the following methods.
– The various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar. Formatting applied to
characters is immediate.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context
menu or dialog where further formatting options are selected.
– Use the options available in the Character dialog. Clicking OK on the dialog applies
the formatting changes.
– Use the options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar. Formatting applied to characters is immediate.
3) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Character dialog
1) Select the characters for formatting and open the Character dialog (Figure 217) using
one of the following methods:
– Right-click on the characters and select Character from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.

Figure 217: Character dialog — Fonts page

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 221

 Figure 218: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
2) Use the options on the tabbed pages of the Character dialog to format the selected
characters.
3) Click OK to apply the formatting changes and close the dialog.
4) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in the
pages of the Character dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Sidebar Character panel

Use the Character panel (Figure 218) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to format
characters. Formatting options are limited, but similar in use to the formatting options available in
the Character dialog. Any formatting applied to characters using the Character panel is
immediate. Character formatting options are also available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
1) Select a text box or object so that the selection handles on the border are displayed.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Character title bar to open the
Character panel.
4) Format the text using the tools in the Character panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Character
dialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in the
Character panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

Unordered or ordered lists

Unordered (bulleted) and ordered (numbered) lists can be created in text boxes and objects.
When creating lists in objects, Draw objects are not dynamic and do not automatically expand as
a list is created. Creating unordered or ordered lists in Draw is similar to Writer. For more
information on unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

222 |Draw Guide 24.8

Figure 219: Lists panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 220: Bullet Library dialog for bullet lists

Figure 221: More Numbers dialog for numbered lists

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 223

Creating lists
Unordered or ordered lists are created in text boxes, or Draw objects as follows:
1) Select all the required text for a list.
2) Create a list using one of the following methods and default settings for lists:
– Click on Toggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting
toolbar.
– Click on Toggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List in the Lists panel in the
Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 219).
– Go to Format > Lists > Unordered List, or Ordered List on the Menu bar.
3) To change the format of the list, click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the list icons and
select a list style from the options available in the Bullets Library dialog (Figures 220), or
More Numbers dialog (Figure 221).

Adjusting list item level and position

The level for each item in an unordered or ordered list is demoted or promoted within a list, or
moved up or down in list order as follows:
1) Click on a list item being demoted, promoted, or moved up or down.
2) Demote a list item down one level at a time using one of the following methods:
– Use the Tab key.
– Go to Format > Lists > Demote on the Menu bar.
– Use Demote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) Promote a list item up one level at a time using one of the following methods:
– Use the key combination Shift+Tab.
– Go to Format > Lists > Promote on the Menu bar.
– Use Promote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
4) Change the position of a list item in the list order using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Lists > Move Up, or Move Down on the Menu bar.
– Use Move Up, or Move Down in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.

Bullets and Numbering dialog

Use the Bullets and Numbering dialog (Figure 222) for more control over list formatting. Select
text in a text box or object and open the dialog using one of the following methods:
• Go to Format > Bullets and Numbering on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected text and select Bullets and Numbering from the context
menu.
• Click on More Options on the right side of Lists panel title bar in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar.
• Click on More Bullets or More Numbering after clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right of
Toggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting toolbar, or in the
Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

224 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 222: Bullets and Numbering dialog

Note
For more information on the options available in the Bullets and Numbering dialog for
unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

Text columns
Text in a drawing can be formatted into columns inside text boxes and objects. However,
columns cannot be used on separate parts of text inside a text box or object. The whole of the
text box, or object has to be used for columns. An example of text columns inside a Draw object
is shown in Figure 223.
The type of columns used in Draw are continuous flow columns. This means that when text
reaches the bottom of a column, text automatically flows into the next column as more text is
added.

Text boxes
1) Click the border of a text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 225

 Figure 223: Example of text columns in a Draw object

Figure 224: Text dialog — Text Columns pagex

2) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open the
Text dialog, then click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 224),
– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel
(Figure 225).
3) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
4) Save the changes and deselect the text box using one of the following methods:
– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then click
outside the text box to deselect it.
– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the text
box to deselect it and save the changes.

Note
Any text inside a text box, or drawing object automatically flows into column format
when the changes are saved.

226 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 225: Columns panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Drawing objects
1) Click on an object to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating that
the object is in edit mode.
2) Double-click on the selected object to switch on text edit mode.
3) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:
– Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open the
Text dialog, then click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 224),
– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel
(Figure 225).
4) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
5) Save the changes and deselect the object using one of the following methods:
– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then click
outside the object to deselect it.
– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the object
to deselect it and save the changes.
6) Double-click again on the object to switch on text edit mode.
7) Type or use copy and paste to enter the required text. Any text entered appears in
column format.
8) If necessary, format the text to the drawing requirements.
9) Click outside the object to deselect it and save the changes.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 227

 Figure 226: Text dialog — Text Animation page

Text animation

Note
Text animation is not recommended in a drawing unless the drawing is going to be
displayed as part of a presentation. See the Impress Guide for more information on
text animation.

Creating text animation

1) Right-click on text in a text box, or drawing object and select Text Attributes from the
context menu to open the Text dialog.
2) Click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page in the Text dialog
(Figure 226).
3) In Effect, select how the text appears during the text animation.
4) In Direction, select which direction the text appears from during animation.
5) In Properties, select Start inside for the text to be visible and inside the drawing object
when applying the animation effect.
6) In Properties, select Text visible when exiting for the text to remain visible after applying
the animation effect.
7) In Animation cycles, select either Continuous, or enter the number of animation cycles for
the animated text.
8) In Increment, select the increment value in Pixels for scrolling the text.

228 |Draw Guide 24.8

 9) In Delay, specify Automatic, or enter the time delay to wait before repeating the
animation effect.
10) Click OK to save the changes and close the Text dialog.

Text animation options

Effect
Select the animation effect from the drop-down list to apply to the text in the selected
drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
Direction
Select a scrolling direction for the animated text.
Properties
Start inside
Text is visible and inside the drawing object when applying the animation effect.
Text visible when exiting
Text remains visible after applying the animation effect.
Animation cycles
Set the looping options for the animation effect.
Continuous
Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the
animation effect, deselect this check box, and enter the number of cycles in the
Continuous box.
Increment
Specifies the increment value in the Pixels box for scrolling the text.
Delay
Specifies the amount of time before repeating the animation effect.
Automatic
LibreOffice automatically determines the amount of time before repeating the
animation effect. To manually assign a delay period, unmark this check box, and then
enter a time value in the Automatic box.

Text callouts
A text callout is a short line of text connected by a line to highlight, or point out a feature in an
illustration or drawing. Two types of text callouts (Figure 227) are available –– Callouts for
horizontal text and Vertical Callouts for vertical text. Text callouts in Draw are a legacy from the
first versions of LibreOffice and the tools are only available on the Text toolbar (Figure 203 on
page 207).

Note
Custom shape callouts can also be used by selecting Callout Shapes on the
Drawing toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. These
custom shape callouts have the same purpose as text callouts, but have different
options available.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 229

 Figure 227: Examples of horizontal and vertical text callouts

Creating text callouts

1) Click on Callouts for horizontal text, or Vertical Callouts for vertical text on the Text
toolbar (Figure 203 on page 207).
2) Click in the drawing and drag the cursor to create the callout.
3) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode.
4) Type the required text, then click in a blank space in the drawing. The callout box adjusts
its size horizontally and/or vertically to fit the text within the callout box.
5) Select the callout and click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line, then
drag the end of the connector line to the required position.
6) With the callout still selected, click on the callout box and drag it to the required position.
7) If required, with the callout still selected, click on a selection handle on the callout box to
change the callout box width and height.
8) Click in a blank space in the drawing to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

Note
The Callout page in the Position and Size dialog is only available when a text callout
has been selected. It is not available for Callout Shapes that are available on the
Drawing toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Editing text callouts

1) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode to edit and format the text. See
“Formatting text” on page 217 for more information on text formatting.
2) Click in a blank space on the drawing to save the changes to the text.
3) Only select the text callout so that the selection handles are displayed.
4) Make sure the text used in the text callout is NOT selected.

230 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 228: Position and Size dialog — Callout page
5) Right click on the selected text callout and select an option from the context menu to
change the attributes for position, size, line, and area of the text callout. For more
information, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects, and Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes.
6) Click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line and drag it to change the
position of the line end or the length of the connector line.
7) Select the text callout and open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 228) using one of
the following methods:
– Right-click on the selected callout and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
8) Click Callout to open the formatting options available for text callouts.
9) Select the style of text callout from Straight Line, Angled Line, or Angled Connector
Line.
10) In Spacing, enter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line and
the callout box.
11) In Extension, select from the available options how the callout line from extends the
callout box.
12) If From top, or From left has been selected from the Extension drop-down list, enter a
distance value in the By: box to create a space between the start point of the connector
line and the callout box.
13) If Horizontal, or Vertical has been selected from the Extension drop-down list, enter a
position setting from the Position drop-down list to set the position of where the
connector line is attached to the text callout box.
14) In Length, enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box
to the angle point of the connector line.
15) Select Optimal to display the angle point in a connector line at an optimal distance from
the callout box.
16) Click in a blank space in the drawing to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 231

Text callout options
Callout Styles
Select the required callout style from the options available.
Spacing
Enter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line and the callout
box.
Extension
Select where and how the callout line extends from the callout box.
Length
Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the
inflection point of the line.
Optimal
Select this option to display a single line in the optimum position.

Note
The Length option is only available if Angled connector line is selected as the
callout style and Optimal is not selected.

Tables in Draw
Tables provide information easily and quickly when used in a drawing. Tables can be added
directly to a drawing eliminating the requirement to embed a Calc spreadsheet, or a Writer text
table. However, it is recommended to embed a spreadsheet into a drawing, especially when
greater functionality is required in the table. The tables provided by Draw do have a limited
functionality.

Inserting tables
Tables are placed at the center of a drawing and cannot be placed into objects or shapes. Also,
unlike text boxes and other objects, tables cannot be rotated, but can be repositioned.

Notes
When inserting tables into a drawing, the table is created using the default style with
settings already applied. Currently these defaults are hard coded in LibreOffice. The
table can be formatted to the drawing requirements after insertion.
If the Table toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Table on the Menu bar.
The Table toolbar is normally docked at the bottom of a Draw window.

Table dialog
1) Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar to open the Insert Table dialog (Figure 229).
2) Enter the number of rows and columns required.
3) Click OK to insert the table in the center of a drawing and close the dialog.
4) Move the table into position by clicking on the border and dragging it to its new position.

232 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 229: Insert Table dialog

Figure 230: Table toolbar

Figure 231: Table grid

Table grid
1) Click on Table on the Table toolbar (Figure 230) to open the Table grid (Figure 231).
2) Click and drag the cursor until the required number of columns and rows are selected,
3) Click again to insert the table into the center of a drawing and close the Table grid.
4) If necessary, click on More Options to open the Insert Table dialog to select the number
of rows and columns required.
5) Move the table into position by clicking on the border and dragging it to its new position.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 233

 Figure 232: Table Design panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Table Design panel

Several predefined table designs are provided in the Table Design panel in the Properties deck
on the Sidebar (Figure 232). The Table Design panel is only available when a table is selected.

Inserting table designs

1) Insert a table into a drawing or select a table in a drawing.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel.
3) Select a design for the table from the available design options.
4) Format the rows and columns using the available options in the Table Design panel.
5) Alternatively, right click on the selected table design and select the format options for the
rows and columns from the context menu.

Creating table designs

1) Insert a table into a drawing, then select the new table.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel, or click on Table Design on the Table toolbar.
3) Click on the plus sign in Table Design panel to create a new design.
4) Make sure the new design is selected, then format the rows and columns from the
available options listed below the Table Design panel.

234 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 233: Example table with banded rows and columns
5) Alternatively, right click on the new table design and select the format options for the
rows and columns from the context menu.

Table design options

Header row
Selected by default. The first row is normally a header row and is displayed with a
different background from the rest of the table.
Total row
When selected, changes the background of the last row to make it stand out from other
rows.
Banded rows
Selected by default. Alternate rows have different backgrounds making it easier to read
data entered into the rows, as shown by the example in Figure 233.
First column
When selected, highlights the first column of the table using a darker background.
Last column
When selected, highlights the last column of the table using a darker background.
Banded columns
When selected, alternate columns are highlighted with dark and light colors.

Table formatting
Format a selected table using the tools and options available on the Table toolbar, by going to
Format > Table on the Menu bar, or using the options available in the Table Properties dialog.

Table toolbar
The Table toolbar (Figure 230 on page 233) automatically opens when a table is selected
providing tools for creating and formatting a table. The default docked position for the toolbar is
at the bottom of the LibreOffice Draw Workspace.
Table
Inserts a new table in a drawing using the Insert Table dialog or the Table grid. See
“Inserting tables” on page 232 for more information on inserting tables.
Border Style
Changes the line style of the borders of selected cells. Click on the triangle▼ next to
Border Style to open a drop-down list and select from a range of predefined styles.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 235

 Border Color
Changes the color of the borders of selected cells. Click on the triangle▼ next to Border
Color to access the available LibreOffice color palettes. Select a color from a range of
predefined palettes or create a custom color.
Borders
Selects a predefined border configuration for the selected table, or cells. Click on the
triangle▼ next to Borders to open a drop-down list to select a border configuration.
Area Style/Filling
Select the cells to be filled, then select the type of fill from the drop-down list: None,
Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, Pattern, Use Slide Background.
Fill Color
Select a fill option from the drop-down menu. The fill options change to show the fillings
available for each Area Style/Filling type.
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. Note that the contents of the merged cells are
also merged. Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from the
context menu.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make sure the
cursor is positioned on a cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split Cells dialog
(Figure 234).
In Split cells into, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell and whether to
split the cell Horizontally or Vertically. If necessary, when splitting horizontally, select Into
equal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents of the split cell are kept in
the original cell (left or top cell).
Optimize
Evenly distributes the selected rows and columns in a table either horizontally or
vertically. Clicking on Optimize opens a pop-up toolbar which contains the following
tools:
Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal row height depends on
the font size of the smallest character in the row.

Figure 234: Split Cells dialog

236 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns. Minimal column width
depends on the shortest entry within a column.
Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal row height depends on
the font size of the largest character in the row.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. Optimal column width depends
on the longest entry within a column.
Distribute Rows Equally
Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the
selection.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in
the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Align Top, Center Vertically, Align Bottom
Sets the vertical alignment of text in selected cells.
Insert Row Above, Insert Row Below
Click in a cell or cells to select rows and use these two tools to insert a row or rows
above or below the selected rows. Alternatively, right-click on the selected rows and
select Insert > Insert Row Above or Insert Row Below.
Insert Column Before, Insert Column After
Click in a cell or cells to select columns and use these two tools to insert a column or
columns before or after the selected columns. Alternatively, right-click on the selected
columns and select Insert > Insert Column Before or Insert Column After.
Delete Row, Delete Column, Delete Table
Click in a cell or cells to select rows or columns, then click on a tool to delete the
selected rows or columns. To delete the whole table, place the cursor in a cell and select
Delete Table. Alternatively, right-click on the selected cells and select Delete > Delete
Row, or Delete Column, or Delete Table from the context menu.
Select Table, Select Column, Select Row
Select a table, column, or row if the same attributes are going to be applied to a table,
column, or row.
Table Design
Clicking on this tool opens the Table Design panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
See “Table Design panel” on page 234 for more information.
Table Properties
Clicking on this tool opens the Table Properties dialog. Alternatively, right-click on the
table and select Table Properties from the context menu.

Menu bar
Go to Format > Table on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the submenu.
Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal row height depends on the
font size of the smallest character in the row.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 237

 Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal row height depends on the
font size of the largest character in the row.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the
selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Select Row
Selects the row or rows where cells have been selected in the table.
Insert Rows
Inserts rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Delete Row
Deletes rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns. Minimal column width depends
on the shortest entry within a column.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. Optimal column width depends
on the longest entry within a column.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the
selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Select Column
Selects the column or columns where cells have been selected in the table.
Insert Columns
Inserts columns in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Delete Column
Deletes columns in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. The contents of the merged cells are also
merged. Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from the
context menu.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make sure that the
cursor is positioned on the cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split Cells dialog
(Figure 234 on page 236).
In Split cells into, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell and whether to
split the cell Horizontally or Vertically. If necessary, when splitting horizontally, select Into
equal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents of the split cell are kept in
the original cell (left or top cell).
Delete Table
To delete the whole table, place the cursor in a cell and select Delete Table. Alternatively,
right-click on the selected cells and select Delete Table from the context menu.
Select…
Selects the whole table.

238 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Properties…
Opens the Table Properties dialog.

Table Properties dialog

The Table Properties dialog has five tabbed pages that provide formatting options for Font, Font
Effects, Borders, Background, and Shadow. Open the Table Properties dialog using one of
the following methods:
The formatting options on each dialog page are as follows:
Font (Figure 235)
Select the required Family, Style, Size, and Language for text in the table. A sample of
the font selected is displayed in the preview box. See the Writer Guide for more
information on fonts.
Font Effects (Figure 236)
Select the required Font Color, Text Decoration, and Effects for the text in the table. A
sample of the font effects applied to the text is displayed in the preview box. See the
Writer Guide for more information on font effects.
Borders (Figure 237)
Select the required Line Arrangement, Line, and Padding for the table and cell
borders. These options are similar to the tools Border Style, Border Color, and
Borders on the Table toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information on the lines used for table and cell borders.

Figure 235: Table Properties dialog — Font page

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 239

 Figure 236: Table Properties dialog — Font Effects page

Figure 237: Table Properties dialog — Borders page

240 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 238: Table Properties dialog — Background

Figure 239: Table Properties dialog — Shadow page

Background (Figure 238)
Select a background as the area fill for the table and/or selected cells. This dialog page
provides the same functions as Area Style/Filling tools on the Table toolbar. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information on area style and filling used
for table and cell backgrounds.
Shadow (Figure 239)
Adds a shadow to the table. The options adjust the look and position of the shadow. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information on table shadows.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 241

 Figure 240: Position and Size dialog

Table position and size

Tables are placed into boxes when created. This allows tables to be formatted as a LibreOffice
Draw object. After selecting the table, use one of the following methods to change table position
and size. See “Text boxes” on page 207 and Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more
information positioning and resizing.
• Click on the table border and drag the table to a new position.
• Click and drag on a selection handle to change the table size.
• Open the Position and Size dialog and use the options available on the Position and
Size page (Figure 240). The options available in the Rotation, and Slant & Corner
Radius pages cannot be used for a table.
After selecting the table, use one of the following methods to open the Position and Size dialog:
• Right-click on the table and select Position and Size from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

Note
When the size of a table box is changed, the table and cell contents also increase or
decrease in size to match the table box size.

242 |Draw Guide 24.8

Deleting tables
Whole table
Make sure the table is selected and the selection handles are visible on the table border, then
delete the table using one of the following methods:
• Go to Format > Table > Delete Table on the Menu bar.
• Select Delete Table on the Table toolbar.
• Right-click on the table and select Delete > Delete Table from the context menu.

Row or column
Click in a table cell to delete the table row or column using one of the following methods. Make
sure the table selection handles are NOT displayed.
• Go to Format > Table > Delete Row, or Delete Column on the Menu bar
• Select Delete Row, or Delete Column on the Table toolbar.
• Right-click and select Delete > Delete Row, or Delete Column from the context menu.

Cell contents
Delete cell contents in a table as follows:
1) Select the cell or cells.
2) Press the Delete, or Backspace key on the keyboard.

Using fields
Fields allow for the automatic insertion of text into a drawing and are used when creating
templates and drawing masters. For more information on templates and master drawings, see
Chapter 11, Advanced Drawing Techniques.

Inserting fields
When a field is created, a text box for the field is inserted into the center of a drawing and can be
repositioned just like any other text box. See “Text boxes” on page 207 for more information.
1) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the type of field required.
2) If required, position and resize the field text box.
3) If required, format the text used for the field information. See “Formatting text” on
page 217 for more information.

Field types
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into a drawing as a fixed field. The date is not automatically
updated. Available date formats depend on the language setting in Tools > Options >
Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and select the required date format
from the context menu.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 243

 Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into a drawing as a variable field. The date is automatically
updated each time the file is opened. Available date formats depend on the language
setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and select
the required date format from the context menu.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into a drawing as a fixed field. The time is not automatically
updated. Available time formats depend on the language setting in Tools > Options >
Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and select the required time format
from the context menu.
Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into a drawing as a variable field. The time is automatically
updated each time the file is opened. Available time formats depend on the language
setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >
Preferences > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and select
the required time format from the context menu.
Author
Inserts the first and last names of the author of the drawing. This information is taken
from values entered in the LibreOffice user data. To modify this information go to Tools >
Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice
> User Data).
Page Number
Inserts the page number into the current drawing. Alternatively, go to Insert > Page
Number on the Menu bar. If a page number is to be added to every page in the drawing,
go to View > Master on the Menu bar and insert the page number field.
Page Title
Inserts the page title. The default name is Page # if the page has not been renamed.
Page Count
Inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.
File Name
Inserts the name of the file used for the drawing. The file name only appears after the file
has been saved.

Using hyperlinks
When inserting text that can be used as a hyperlink (for example, a website address or URL),
Draw automatically formats it creating the hyperlink, and applies color and underlining. There are
four types of hyperlinks and each hyperlink type requires a different procedure when inserting a
hyperlink.

Note
To prevent LibreOffice from automatically turning website addresses, or URLs into
hyperlinks, go to Tools > AutoCorrect Options > Options on the Menu bar and
deselect URL Recognition.

244 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 241: Hyperlink dialog — Internet page

Tip
To change the color of hyperlinks, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >
Application Colors, scroll to Unvisited links and/or Visited links, select the
checkboxes, then select new colors from the color palettes for the links and click OK.
Note this color change changes the color for all hyperlinks across all LibreOffice
modules.

Internet hyperlink
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K
(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Internet to open the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 241).
4) In Protocol, select either Web, or FTP.
5) In the URL text box, enter the required web address for the hyperlink.
6) In the Text box, enter a name for the hyperlink.
7) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” on
page 248 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are
being created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

Mail hyperlink
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 245

 Figure 242: Hyperlink dialog — Mail page
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K
(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Mail to open the Mail page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 242).
4) In Recipient text box, enter the email details of the recipient.
5) In the Subject text box, enter a subject title.
6) If required, click on Data Sources to open a data source browser, then drag the email
receiver data field from the data source browser into the Recipient text box.
7) If required, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” on
page 248 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are
being created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

Document hyperlink
Creates a hyperlink to another document or to another place in a document, commonly referred
to as a bookmark.
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K
(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Document to open the Document page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 243).

246 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 243: Hyperlink dialog — Document page

Note
Leave Path blank if the link is to a target in the same drawing.
4) In the Path text box, enter the file path for the document.
5) Alternatively, click on Open File to open a file browser and select the file as a target for
the hyperlink.
6) Optionally, to specify a target in a specific drawing, click on Target in Document to open
a dialog to select a target. However, if the name of the target is known, type it into the
Target text box.
7) If required, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” on
page 248 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are
being created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

New Document hyperlink

Creates a new document and a hyperlink to the new document.
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K
(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select New Document to open the New Document page of the Hyperlink dialog
(Figure 244).

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 247

 Figure 244: Hyperlink dialog — New Document page
4) In New Document select Edit now to edit the newly created document immediately, or
Edit later to only create the hyperlink.
5) Select the type of document to create from the File type drop-down list.
6) Click on Select Path to open a file browser and navigate to the folder where the new
document is going to be saved
7) Select the folder and click on Open. The selected folder appears in the File text box.
8) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” on
page 248 for more information.
9) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are
being created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
10) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

Further Settings
The Further Settings section in the Hyperlink dialog is common to all hyperlink types, although
some options are more relevant to specific types of links.
Frame
Enter a name for the frame in the Frame text box that the linked file opens in, or select a
predefined frame from the list. If the Frame text box is empty, the linked file opens in the
current browser window.
Form
Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text, or as a button.
Text
Specifies the visible text, or button caption for the hyperlink.

248 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Name
Applicable to HTML documents. It specifies the text added as a NAME attribute in the
HTML code behind the hyperlink.

Editing text hyperlinks

1) Select the hyperlink.
2) Right-click on the hyperlink and select Edit Hyperlink from the context menu to open the
Hyperlink dialog.
3) Make editing changes using the available options.
4) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are
being created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Hyperlink dialog.

Note
DO NOT click directly on the hyperlink text when editing or formatting hyperlinks.
Clicking on the hyperlink text opens the hyperlink.

Formatting hyperlinks
A hyperlink is inserted in the centre of the current slide. To edit the text, the size of a hyperlink
text box, or to reposition the hyperlink on the slide:
1) Click and drag a selection marquee over the hyperlink text to display a text box border
and selection handles.
2) Right-click on the selected hyperlink and select the type of formatting required from the
options available in the context menu.
3) To reposition hyperlink, click and drag on the text border to move the hyperlink on the
slide.
4) Select Position and Size from the context menu, or use the F4 key to open the Position
and Size dialog. Options can be selected to move the hyperlink, or resize the text box.

Image maps
An image map defines areas used as hotspots in images which are associated with a URL (web
address or a file on the computer). Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks. In
Draw, clicking on a hotspot opens the linked page in the appropriate program (for example,
default browser for HTML pages; Writer for ODT files; PDF viewer for PDF files).
Hotspots can be created in various shapes, for example rectangles, ellipses, and polygons.
Several hotspots can be included in the same image. When a hotspot is clicked on, the URL
opens in a browser window or frame that has been specified. The text can also be specified as a
hotspot name that appears when the cursor hovers over a hotspot.

Creating image maps

1) Select an image in a drawing to use as a hotspot.
2) Go to Tools > ImageMap on the Menu bar to open the ImageMap Editor dialog
(Figure 245). The main part of the dialog shows the selected image where hotspots will
be defined.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 249

 Figure 245: ImageMap Editor dialog
3) Select the type of hotspot area required from the icons at the top of the ImageMap Editor
dialog from the options Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, or Freeform Polygon.
4) Create the hotspot area in the selected image.
5) Enter the hyperlink address for the hotspot in the Address text box using the address
format: [Link]
6) Click on Apply to apply the settings.
7) Click on Save to save the image map to a file.
8) Click on Close in the ImageMap Editor dialog.

Image map tools

Apply
Applies the changes.
Open
Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView file format.
Save
Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA, or SIP StarView file format.

250 |Draw Guide 24.8

Select
Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Freeform Polygon
Creates a hotspot on the selected image in the shape selected.
Edit Points
Change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing anchor points.
Move Points
Moves individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
Insert Points
Adds an anchor point at the selected point on the outline of the hotspot.
Delete Points
Deletes a selected anchor point.
Undo
Cancels the previous action.
Redo
Reapplies the previous cancelled action.
Active
Toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive.
Macro
Assign a macro that runs when the hotspot is clicked on.
Properties
Define the properties of the selected hotspot.
Address
Enter the URL for the file that opens when the selected hotspot is clicked on. The
address format to be used: [Link]
Text
Enter the text that is displayed when the cursor hovers over a hotspot. If no text is
entered, the Address is displayed.
Frame
Enter the name of the target frame for the hotspot. Standard frame name can be
selected from the drop-down list and used instead.
_blank
Opens in a new browser window.
_self
Default selection and opens in the current window.
_top
File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
_parent
File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the
current frame is used.
Graphic view
Displays the image map so that the hotspots can be selected and edited.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 251

 Note
The value _self for a target frame works on the majority of the occasions. It is not
recommended to use the other values, if available, unless absolutely necessary.

Fontwork
Fontwork is used to create graphical text as objects in a drawing. Different settings for
Fontwork (line, area, position, size, and more) are available to match the drawing requirements.
Fontwork is also available in the Writer, Calc, and Impress modules in LibreOffice. However,
there are small differences in the way that each LibreOffice module displays Fontwork.

Creating Fontwork
1) Go to Insert > Fontwork on the Menu bar to open the Fontwork Gallery dialog
(Figure 246) and select a Fontwork style from the dialog.
2) Double click on the selected Fontwork, or select OK. This closes the Fontwork Gallery
dialog and the selected Fontwork appears in the center of the drawing.

Figure 246: Fontwork Gallery dialog

252 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 247: Example of creating Fontwork text

Figure 248: Fontwork toolbar

3) Double-click on the Fontwork object to switch on editing mode. The example Fontwork
text appears in the center of the image in text edit mode, as shown by the example in
Figure 247.
4) Highlight all of the text in edit mode to select it, then type in the required text to replace
the highlighted text.
5) Press the Esc key, or click outside the selected area to apply the new text and it appears
as a Fontwork object in the center of the drawing.
6) If necessary reposition and resize the Fontwork object to the drawing requirements. See
Cpter 3, Working With Objects and Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
[Link]

Fontwork toolbar
When a Fontwork object is selected, the Fontwork toolbar (Figure 248) opens on the Workspace.
If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Fontwork on the Menu bar.
The following tools are available for editing a Fontwork object.
Insert Fontwork Text
Opens the Fontwork Gallery dialog.
Fontwork Shape
Changes the shape of a selected Fontwork object. Click on the triangle▼next to
Fontwork Shape on the Fontwork toolbar to open the Fontwork pop-up toolbar. Select a
Fontwork shape for the available options. The Fontwork shapes are also available in the
Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar (Figure 249).
Fontwork Same Letter Heights
Changes the height of characters in a selected Fontwork object. Toggles between normal
height where the characters have different heights to where all characters have the same
height.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 253

 Figure 249: Fontwork Shape subtoolbar
Fontwork Alignment
Specifies the text alignment within the frame. Options available are Left Align, Center,
Right Align, Word Justify, and Stretch Justify.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Selects the spacing between characters and whether kerning pairs should be used.
Options available are Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, Very Loose, and Custom. For
Custom spacing, input a percentage value: 100% is normal character spacing; less than
100% character spacing is tighter; more than 100% character spacing is looser.
Toggle Extrusion
Converts the Fontwork object into a 3D shape using extrusion. See Chapter 7, 3D
Objects for more information.

Modifying Fontwork
A Fontwork object is treated like any other object in Draw. It can be resized, rotated, skewed,
slanted, flipped, and so on. For more information on modifying a Fontwork object, see Chapter 3,
Working With Objects, Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes, and Chapter 5, Combining
Multiple Objects.
• Fontwork consists of text, but only minimal text formatting options can be used with
Fontwork text, for example font type, font size, Bold, or Italic.
• Some of Fontwork shapes can be modified and this is indicated by a dot appearing on a
selected shape. For example, change angles of a trapezoid, or parallelogram basic
shapes by moving the dot displayed when the selection handles are visible.

254 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 10,
Printing, Exporting and
Emailing
Introduction
The dialogs and procedures for printing, exporting and emailing drawings from Draw are
EXAMPLES only. Actual dialogs and procedures do depend on the following:
• Type of computer and how rthe computer is setup.
• Computer operating system and software application being used.
• Type of printer connected to the computer.
• How the printer is connected to the computer, for example cable or wi-fi.

Default printer setup

Before printing any drawings from Draw, it is recommended to setup a default printer that is
connected to the computer. An example printer setup procedure for Draw is as follows:
1) Go to File > Printer Settings on the Menu bar to open the Printer Setup dialog. An
example Printer Setup dialog is shown in Figure 250.
2) Select the required printer from the printers listed in the Name drop-down list.
3) If necessary, click on Properties in the Printer Setup dialog to open a properties dialog
for the selected printer to select the options required for paper and the printer.
4) Click OK to save the printer selection and close the Printer Setup dialog.

Figure 250: Example Printer Setup dialog

Figure 251: Standard toolbar with Print Directly installed

256 |Draw Guide 24.8

Quick printing
To quickly print a document or drawing, without changing print settings already selected, click on
Print Directly on the Standard toolbar (highlighted in Figure 251). Print Directly sends the
entire document to the default printer defined for the computer.
If Print Directly is not visible on the Standard toolbar, it is added to the toolbar as follows:
1) Right-click in an empty area on the Standard toolbar and select Visible Buttons from the
context menu.
2) Select Print Directly from the list of available tools and the Print Directly tool is added
to the Standard toolbar.

Linux or Windows printing

For more control over printing when using Linux or Windows operating system, open a Print
dialog using one of the following methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P.
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

Notes
The options selected in the Print dialog only apply to the printing of the current
document open in Draw. Any print options selected in the Print dialog overrides the
default LibreOffice printer settings that have been set using Tools > Options >
LibreOffice > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Print) and
Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice Draw > Print).

General options
Figure 252 displays an example of printing options that may be available on the General page of
the Print dialog in Windows/Linux.
Printer
Select the printer to use from the printers available in the drop-down list.
Status:
Indicates if the selected printer is the default printer.
Properties
Click on Properties to open the properties dialog for the printer being used. The
options available in this dialog depends on the type of printer connected to the
computer and the computer operating system being used.
Range and Copies
All Pages
Prints all the pages in the document.
Selection
Prints the pages selected in Draw.
Pages
Select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,
7, 9 for page number selection.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 257

 Figure 252: Example Print dialog — General page — Windows/Linux
Number of copies
Enter number of printed copies required for the document.
Collation and Paper Sides > Include
Select from the drop-down list Odd and Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even Pages.
Collation and Paper Sides > Paper sides
Select from the drop-down list Print on one side (simplex), Print on both sides (duplex
long edge), or Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
Collation and Paper Sides > Order > Collate
Collates multiple printed copies into separate documents. Only available when multiple
copies of a printed document are required.
Collation and Paper Sides > Order > Create separate print jobs for collated output
Only available when multiple copies of a printed document are required.
Collation and Paper Sides > Order > Print reverse order.
Prints the document pages in reverse order.

258 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Page Layout
Paper size
Select the paper size to use from drop-down list.
Orientation
Select from the drop-down list Automatic, Portrait, or Landscape.
Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.
Order
Select from the drop-down list the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet of
paper.
Draw a border around each page
When multiple pages are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around
each page.
Brochure
Prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or booklet.

LibreOffice Draw options

Figure 253 displays an example of printing options that may be available on the LibreOffice
Draw page of the Print dialog for the current drawing being printed:
Contents
When selected, prints the Page name and/or Date and time on the drawing.

Figure 253: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Draw page — Windows/Linux

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 259

 Color
Prints the drawing in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
Size
Print the drawing using one of the following options:
Original size
Prints the drawing using its original size.
Fit to printable page
Drawing size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the drawing is too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated pages
Used to print multiple copies of a drawing on a page.

macOS printing
For more control over printing using macOS, open and use the Print dialog using one of the
following methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut ⌘+P.
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

General options
Figure 254 displays an example of the printing options that may be available on the General
page of the Print dialog in macOS.
Printer
Select the printer to be used from the drop-down list. If the default printer is being used,
then this printer will already be selected.
Presets
Select from the drop-down list a printing preset. The presets available depend on the
type of printer connected to the computer. This also includes any custom presets that
have been created.
Copies
Enter the number of copies to be printed.
Pages
All
Prints all the pages in the document.
Range from
Select a range of page number(s) to print.
Selection
Select the pages to print from the Pages pane.
Print in Color
Select this option to print the drawing in color if the printer selected is capable of color
printing. Deselect this option to print the drawing in monochrome.

260 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 254: Example Print dialog — General page — macOS
Double-sided
Select this option to print the drawing double sided if the printer selected is capable of
double sided printing.
On
When selected, prints the drawing pages double-sided using long edge binding.
On (Short)
When selected, prints the drawing pages double-sided using short edge binding.

LibreOffice options
LibreOffice Draw options
Click on LibreOffice Draw to open the printing options available for Draw (Figure 255).
Print selection only
Prints the selected pages in Pages pane.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 261

 Figure 255: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Draw page — macOS
Contents
Prints the Page name and/or Date and time on the drawing.
Color
Prints the drawing in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
Size
Prints the drawing using one of the following options:
Original size
Prints the drawing using its original size.

262 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Fit to printable page
Drawing size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the drawing is too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated pages
Used to print multiple copies of a drawing on a page.

More options
To access more printing options in Draw, click on More to open the More options page
(Figure 256).

Figure 256: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice More page — macOS

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 263

 Brochure
When selected, prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or
booklet.
Include
Select which pages to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Front sides/right pages;
Back sides/left pages. Only available when Brochure is selected.
Use only paper tray from printer preferences
When selected, the printer tray selected on the printer overrides the selected tray in the
printer properties on the computer.
All Pages
All the pages in the drawing are printed.
Pages
Enter the page number(s) in the text box that are to be printed. For multiple pages, use
the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 — 5, 7, 9 for page number selection.
Selection
Prints the pages selected in the Pages pane.

Figure 257: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Media & Quality page — macOS

264 |Draw Guide 24.8

Media & Quality options
Click on Media & Quality to open a drop-list down with the following printing options
(Figure 257).
Feed from
Select from the drop-down list the paper tray to use if the printer has more than one
paper tray.
Media Type
Select from the drop-down list the paper type that has been loaded into the paper tray
being used, for example Envelope, Photo, Plain Paper.
Quality
Select the level of printing quality required.

Figure 258: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Layout page — macOS

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 265

Layout options
Click on Layout to open a drop-list down with the following options for the document printing
layout (Figure 258).
Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.
Layout Direction
Select the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Border
When multiple pages are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around each
page.
Reverse page orientation
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong order, select this option and print the
document again.
Flip horizontally
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong orientation, select this option and print the
document again.

Paper Handling options

Click on Paper Handling to open a drop-list with the following options when printing multiple
page documents (Figure 259).
Collate Sheets
When selected collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
Pages to Print
Select which pages in the document to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Odd only;
Even only.
Page Order
Select the page printing order from the drop-down list: Automatic; Normal; Reverse.
Scale to fit paper size
Adjusts the printed page to fit the paper size.
Destination Paper Size
Select a paper size from the options available in the drop-down list. Only available if
Scale to fit paper size has been selected.
Scale Down Only
Scales down the drawing to fit the page size. Only available if the selected page size is
smaller than the drawing size.

Watermark options
Provides options to print watermark text on the drawing pages, for example Confidential if the
document is of a sensitive nature.

Printer info options

Provides information about the printer being used, for example ink levels, printer name, and
printer location.

266 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 259: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Paper Handling page — macOS

Printing examples
The following printing instructions are examples ONLY. Actual printing method may differ from
these examples because printing depends on computer operating system, computer setup, and
the connected printer. For more information on printing, see “Linux or Windows printing” on
page 257, or “macOS printing” on page 260, and the Writer Guide.

Individual page
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) In Printer, Select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page number of the page to be
printed.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 267

 4) In Ranges and Copies, enter how many copies to be printed in the Number of copies
box.
5) Click Print to print the individual page and close the Print dialog.

All pages
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) In Printer, select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select All Pages.
4) In Ranges and Copies, enter how many copies to be printed in the Number of copies
box.
5) Click Print to print all pages in the document and close the Print dialog.

Range of pages
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) In Printer, select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page numbers of the pages to print
using the format, for example, 1,3,7 or 2–5,7,9.
4) In Ranges and Copies, enter how many copies to be printed in the Number of copies
box.
5) Click Print to print the selected pages and close the Print dialog.

Selection printing
1) Select the pages in the Pages panel in LibreOffice Draw.
2) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
3) Select the printer to use from the drop-list if more than one printer is connected to the
computer.
4) In Ranges and Copies, select Selection and then select Odd and Even Pages, Even
Pages, or Odd Pages from the Include drop-down list.
5) In Ranges and Copies, enter how many copies to be printed in the Number of copies
box.
6) Click OK to print the pages and close the Print dialog.

Multiple pages on a single sheet

1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) In Printer, select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Page Layout, select the number of pages to print per sheet of paper from the Pages
per sheet drop-down list. The preview panel shows how the pages will look when printed
on a page.
4) In Page Layout, select how the multiple pages are printed on a page from the Order
drop-down list.

268 |Draw Guide 24.8

 5) If necessary, select Draw a border around each page to distinguish each page printed on
a sheet of paper.
6) In Ranges and Copies, enter how many copies to be printed in the Number of copies
box.
7) Click Print to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Brochure printing
In LibreOffice Writer, Impress, and Draw, a document can be printed as a brochure, which is also
known as booklet printing. The pages are arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in
half, the pages are in the correct pagination order to form a brochure or booklet.

Tip
Plan a document so it looks professional when printed as a brochure. Choose
appropriate margins, font sizes, and so on because pages are normally printed at
half size on a sheet of paper. Experiment to get the best document format to match
the capabilities of the printer being used.

Simplex printer
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) In Printer, select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click on Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
4) In Layout, make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as
specified in the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but
is important for brochures to create the correct page layout.
5) In Paper Quality, select the type of paper from the Media drop-down list.
6) If required, in Color, select either Black & White or Color printing option.
7) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
8) In Page Layout, select Brochure.
9) In Range and Copies, select the following:
d) In Include, select Even pages, or Odd pages from the drop-down list.
e) In Paper sides, select Print on one side (simplex) from the drop-down list.
10) Click Print to print the even or odd pages.
11) Take the printed pages out of the printer and put back into the printer in the correct
orientation to print on the blank side. This may require some testing to find out what the
correct arrangement is for the selected printer.
12) If the Even Pages were printed, now select Odd Pages in Include. If Odd Pages were
printed, now select Even Pages in Include.
13) Click Print to finish printing the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog.
14) Make sure the printed pages create a brochure when all the pages are placed in the
correct order.

Duplex printer
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 269

 2) In Printer, select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is
connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
4) Make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as specified in
the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but is important
for brochures to create the correct page layout.
5) In Paper Quality, select the type of paper from the Media drop-down list.
6) If required, in Color, select either Black & White or Color printing option.
7) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
8) In Range and Copies, select the All Pages option.
9) In Range and Copies, select one of the following options from the Paper sides
drop-down list. Actual options available for duplex printing depend on the printer model
and the computer system being used:
– Print on both sides (duplex long edge).
– Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
10) In Page Layout, select the Brochure option.
11) Click Print to print the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog.

Black and white or grayscale printing

Printer settings
The following example procedure explains how to print documents in black and white or
grayscale on a color printer:
1) Open the Print dialog and select General to open the General page.
2) Select the printer to use from the drop-down list if more than one printer is connected to
the computer.
3) Click on LibreOffice Draw to open the printing options page for LibreOffice Draw.
4) In Color, select Grayscale, or Black & white from the available options.
5) Click Print to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Tips
Some color printers may only allow printing in color regardless of the settings
selected. More details can be found in the information for the selected printer.
Grayscale is the best option for printing any colored text or graphics in a document
on a monochrome printer. Colors printed in shades of gray give more detail. When
printing color in black and white some of this detail is lost.

LibreOffice settings
Use the Print page in the Options LibreOffice Draw dialog to change the LibreOffice settings to
print all colored text and graphics as grayscale, or black and white.
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences
> LibreOffice Draw > Print) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Draw Print
dialog (Figure 260).

270 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 260: Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog
2) In Quality, select either the option Grayscale, or Black & white.
3) Click OK to save the change and close the Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog.
4) Print the document using one of the above procedures and the document is printed as
grayscale, or black and white.

Exporting
PDF format
LibreOffice can export documents as a PDF (Portable Document Format) file. This standard file
format is ideal for sending a file to be viewed on another computer using PDF viewing software.

Directly as PDF
Export the complete document using default PDF settings as follows:
1) Click on Export Directly as PDF on the Standard toolbar, or go to File > Export As >
Export Directly as PDF on the Menu bar.
2) Enter a file name and location for the PDF file and click on Save to export the file as
PDF.

Note
The page range, image compression, or other printing options are not available
when creating a PDF file using Directly as PDF.

Controlling PDF content and quality

For more control over the content and quality when creating a PDF file, use the options available
in the PDF Options dialog (Figure 261). For more information on available options, see the
Getting Started Guide.
1) Go to File > Export As > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
dialog.
2) Select the required options available in the various pages of the PDF Options dialog.
3) Click on Export and a file browser window opens.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 271

 Figure 261: PDF Options dialog — General page
4) Navigate to the required location and enter a file name for the PDF being created.
5) Click on Save to export the file as PDF. The file browser window and the PDF Options
dialog close.

Notes
When exporting in Other formats, a dialog may open providing options that can be
selected when a LibreOffice Draw file is exported.
The content of the exported file depends on the elements selected on the drawing. If
no elements are selected, the complete drawing file is exported.

Other formats
LibreOffice can export files in various formats, which are listed in the drop-down list of the file
browser window. For more information on exporting graphics, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.
1) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open a file browser window.
2) Navigate to the directory where the drawing is going to be saved.
3) Specify a file name for the exported drawing in the File name text box.
4) Select the required file format from the Save as type drop-down list.
5) Click on Save or Export to save the file and close the file browser window.

272 |Draw Guide 24.8

Emailing documents
LibreOffice provides several ways to send documents quickly and easily as an email attachment
in ODF format (LibreOffice default format), or as a PDF. For more information on emailing
documents, see the Getting Started Guide.

Open Document format

1) Go to File > Send > Email Document on the Menu bar. LibreOffice opens the default
email program with the document attached to a new email.
2) In the email program, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

PDF format
1) Go to File > Send > E-mail as PDF on the Menu bar. and the PDF Options dialog
opens.
2) Create a PDF file of the drawing using the options available in the PDF Options dialog,
see “PDF format” on page 271 for more information. The default email application opens
with the PDF file attached to a new email.
3) In the email application, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

Digital signatures
A digital signature is a mathematical scheme for verifying the authenticity of digital versions of
drawings or documents.
Signing a drawing digitally, a personal key or certificate is required. This personal key is stored
on a computer is a combination of a private key and a public key. These keys are added to a
drawing when a digital signature is applied. A certificate is obtained from a certification authority,
which may be a private company or a government institution.
Applying a digital signature to a drawing, a checksum is computed from the drawing content plus
the personal key being used. The checksum and public key are stored together with the drawing.
Opening the drawing on another computer with a recent version of LibreOffice, the program
computes the checksum again and compares it with the stored checksum. If both checksums
are the same, the program opens the original, unchanged drawing.
Also, the program can display the public key information from the certificate. This information is
compared with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority.
Whenever the drawing is changed, this change breaks the digital signature.
For a more detailed description of how to obtain, use and manage a certificate and signature
validation, see the LibreOffice Getting Started Guide and Applying Digital Signatures in
LibreOffice Help ([Link]
&DbPAR=WRITER&System=UNIX).

Removing personal data

Sometimes it is necessary to remove personal data, versions, notes, hidden information, or
recorded changes from drawing files before files are distributed, or PDF version is created. Use
the two following procedures to remove this type of data from a drawing file.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 273

 Figure 262: Options LibreOffice Security dialog

Figure 263: Security Options and Warnings dialog

274 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 264: Properties dialog — General page

Setting security and warning options

1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Security (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > Security) to open the Options LibreOffice Security dialog (Figure 262).
2) Click on Options to open the Security Options and Warnings dialog (Figure 263).
3) Select the required options to allow LibreOffice to warn when drawing files contain
sensitive information and/or automatically remove personal information on saving.
4) Click OK to close the Security Options and Warnings dialog and save the selected
options.
5) Click OK to close the Options LibreOffice Security dialog.

Removing personal data and drawing file information

1) Open a drawing file and go to File > Properties on the Menu bar to open the Properties
dialog (Figure 264).
2) In the General page, deselect the option Apply user data.
3) Click on Reset Properties to change the following file properties:
– Remove any information in the created and modified fields.
– Delete modification and printing dates.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 275

 – Reset editing time to zero.
– Reset creation date to the current date and time.
– Reset version number to 1.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog.

Removing version information

To remove version information from a drawing file, use one of the following methods:
1) Go to File > Versions on the Menu bar to open a properties dialog for the drawing file.
2) Select the versions in the Existing Versions list for deletion and click Delete. The dialog
automatically closes.
3) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the drawing file using a different name.

Redaction
Documents are redacted to remove or hide any sensitive information. Redaction allows the
selective disclosure of information in a document while keeping other parts of the document
secret.
When a redacted document is exported as a new document, any redacted portions are removed
and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels preventing any attempt to restore or copy the original
contents. A redacted document is often exported in PDF format for publication, or sharing.
Any documents that are redacted in Writer, Calc, or Impress are automatically transferred as a
copy to Draw for redaction.

Note
When a redacted document is exported as a new PDF file, all information in the
redacted areas is removed and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. The redacted
areas prevent any attempt to restore, or copy the original contents.

Documents, spreadsheets, or presentations

1) Open the document to be redacted in Writer, Calc or Impress, then go to Tools > Redact
on the Menu bar and the following happens:
– The document is copied, prepared and transferred to Draw as an untitled file.
– Draw opens with the untitled document displayed.
– Redaction toolbar (Figure 265) automatically opens. If the Redaction toolbar is not
displayed, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Redaction.
2) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and select either Rectangle or Freeform, or
click on Rectangle Redaction or Freeform Redaction in the Redaction toolbar.
3) Draw the required shapes to redact the document sensitive areas. The redaction shape
is gray allowing the sensitive areas in the document to be visible before redaction.
4) Click on Export Preview PDF to create a PDF copy of the document and save as a PDF
file. Review the sensitive information in the gray redacted areas before redaction is
finalized.
5) Delete the preview PDF copy after reviewing the redaction areas in the file.

276 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 265: Redaction toolbar
6) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and use one of the following options in the
Redaction toolbar:
– Select either Redacted Export (White), or Redacted Export (Black) option.
– Click on Redacted Export (White), or Redacted Export (Black) icon.
7) Navigate to the folder in the file browser window that opens where the redact document
is to be saved and enter a name for the document.
8) Click on Save to create the redacted PDF file and the following happens:
– Gray redaction areas are converted to white, or black and the document is exported as
a PDF
– There is no selectable text in the PDF file and any redacted content is non-existent.

Drawings
Open a drawing file in in Draw and follow Steps 2) thru 8) in “Documents, spreadsheets, or
presentations” on page 276 to create a redacted PDF copy of the drawing file.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 277

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 11,
Advanced Draw Techniques
Drawing pages
Pages pane
Drawings created in Draw can consist of multiple pages and stored as one file on a computer.
The pages in a drawing are displayed as thumbnails in the Pages pane. Drawing pages can be
added, renamed, deleted, and arranged in a sequence using the Pages pane.
By default the Pages pane (Figure 266) appears docked on the left of the Workspace. If the
Pages pane is not visible, go to View > Page Pane on the Menu bar. The Pages pane can
become a floating window using one of the following methods:
• Windows and Linux only — press and hold the Ctrl key, then double-click in the title
bar of the Pages pane to create a floating window.
• macOS only — press and hold the ⌘ key, then double-click in the title bar of the Pages
pane to create a floating window.
• Windows, Linux and macOS — click in the title bar and drag the Pages pane to create
a floating window.
To close the Pages pane, click on the X on the right side of the title bar, or deselect View > Page
Pane in the Menu bar.

Selecting pages
To make a page appear in the Workspace, select a page using one of the following methods:
• Select a page in the Pages pane.

Figure 266: Draw main window

(1) Pages pane (3) Sidebar (5) Layers bar
(2) Workspace (4) Status bar

280 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 267: Navigator dialog

Figure 268: Navigator deck in Sidebar

• Use the keyboard shortcut F5, or go to View > Navigator on the Menu bar to open the
Navigator dialog (Figure 267) and select a page from the displayed list.
• Click on Navigator in the Sidebar to open the Navigator deck in the Sidebar (Figure 268)
and select a page from the displayed list.

Navigating pages
To navigate a multi-page drawing and select a page for editing, use one of the following
methods:
• Select the required page in the Pages pane.
• Select the required page in the Navigator dialog (Figure 267), or the Navigator deck in
the Sidebar (Figure 268).
• Go to Page > Navigate on the Menu bar and select one of the following options:
– To First Page — moves to the first page in the drawing.
– To Previous Page — moves backward to the previous page.
– To Next Page — moves forward to the next page.
– To Last Page — moves to the last page in the drawing.
– Go to Page — enter the page number in the text box and press the Enter key to
move to the selected page.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 281

 Figure 269: Insert Pages dialog

Adding pages
Inserting new page
Insert a new page into a drawing using one of the following methods. A new page is added after
the selected page in the Pages pane, or at the end of the pages if no page is selected.
• Go to Page > New Page on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in the Pages pane and select New Page from the context menu.
• Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > New Page from
the context menu.
• Go to Page > Insert Page from File on the Menu bar and open the Insert File dialog.
Navigate to the folder where the file is located. Select the file and click on Open to open
the Insert Pages dialog (Figure 269). Select the required pages and click OK.

Duplicating pages
Select a page in the Pages pane, then use one of the following methods to insert the duplicate
page after the selected page:
• Go to Page > Duplicate Page on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a page in the Pages pane and select Copy from the context menu.
Right-click in a blank area of the Pages pane and select Paste from the context menu.

Renaming pages
When pages are inserted into a drawing, they are automatically named as Page 1, Page 2, and
so on in the Pages pane, Navigator dialog, or Navigator deck in the Sidebar. As the page order
is changed, pages are automatically renumbered making it difficult to identify the pages.

282 |Draw Guide 24.8

It is recommended to give each page a memorable name to identify pages as follows:
1) Select a page for renaming in the Pages pane.
2) Use one of the following methods and rename the selected page:
– Go to Page on the Menu bar and select Rename Page from the submenu.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Rename Page from the
context menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > Rename Page
from the context menu.
3) In the Rename Page dialog that opens, enter a new name for the page and click OK.

Changing page order

Use one of the following methods and change the page order in a drawing:
• Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then click and drag the page thumbnail to
change the page order.
• Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then go to Page > Move on the Menu bar
and select one of the following options:
– Page to Start — moves the selected page to the beginning of a drawing.
– Page Up — moves selected page up one place in the page order of a drawing.
– Page Down — moves selected page down one place in the page order of a drawing.
– Page to End — moves selected page to the end of a drawing.

Deleting pages
1) Select a page for deletion in the Pages pane.
2) Use one of the following methods to delete the selected page:
– Go to Page > Delete Page on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Delete Page from the
context menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > Delete Page
from the context menu.

Note
When deleting pages in a drawing, there is no confirmation of deletion for the
selected page.

Master pages
A master page is a page used as a starting point for all drawing pages to control basic formatting
of pages based on a master page. It is similar to a page style in Writer, or master slide in
Impress. A drawing with multiple pages can have more than one master page allowing a different
look assigned to individual pages in a drawing, for example title page, contents page, and
drawing pages.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 283

 Figure 270: Master View toolbar
Master pages have a defined set of characteristics. For example, background objects (such as
logos, decorative lines), text formatting, blocks of standard text, and fields such as page
numbering, date, or filename.

Master page view

Go to View > Master on the Menu bar and open the master page view. This also opens the
Master View toolbar (Figure 270). If this toolbar does not open, go to View > Toolbars > Master
View on the Menu bar. To return to normal page mode, click on Close Master View in the
Master View toolbar, or go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.

Creating master pages

Each drawing created uses the default master page. When a drawing has multiple pages,
master pages can be created and added to the drawing as follows:
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master
View toolbar.
2) Create a new master page using one of the following methods. After creation, the new
master page is automatically selected.
– Click on New Master in the Master View toolbar (Figure 270).
– Go to Page > New Master on the Menu bar.
3) Add the required graphic objects, logos, fields, text and so on to the selected master
page, then save the drawing.
4) Assign the new master page to a drawing page. See “Changing master pages” on
page 285 for more information.
5) Rename the master page, see “Renaming master pages” on page 284.

Renaming master pages

Each new master page created has the default name of Default 1, Default 2, and so on. It is
recommended to rename new master pages. The default master page that was created when
the drawing was created can also be renamed.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master
View toolbar.
2) Use one of the following methods and open the Rename Master Slide dialog:
– Click on Rename Master in the Master View toolbar (Figure 270).
– Right-click on a master page in the Pages pane and select Rename Master from the
context menu.
3) Enter a name for the master page in the Name text box in the Rename Master dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Rename Master Slide dialog.

284 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 271: Available Master Pages dialog

Changing master pages

When a drawing uses several master pages, each page in the drawing can use a different
master page.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
2) In the Pages pane, select the page to change the master page.
3) Right-click on the page in the Workspace and select Change Master Page from the
context menu to open the Available Master Pages dialog (Figure 271).
4) In the Select a Page Design preview box, select a master page design for the selected
page.
5) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
6) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Page Design preview box that have not been assigned to a page.
7) Click OK to change the selected master page and close the Available Master Pages
dialog.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 285

Deleting master pages
Deleting master pages is only available when there is more than one master page in a drawing.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master
View toolbar (Figure 270 on page 284).
2) Use one of the following methods to delete a master page. The deletion of the master
page is immediate and there is no confirmation
– Select and right-click on a master page in the Pages pane and select Delete Master
from the context menu.
– Click on Delete Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Go to Page > Delete Master on the Menu bar.

Note
The default master page created when the drawing was first created cannot be
deleted. Also, if the drawing only uses one named master page, then that named
master page cannot be deleted.

Master pages from templates

Master pages from templates available in LibreOffice can be used for drawings. If the master
pages from a template use a different page size, the master pages loaded into a drawing are
adapted to the drawing page size. This may cause some objects to be stretched, or incorrectly
positioned when adapted to fit the drawing page size.

Figure 272: Load Master Page dialog

286 |Draw Guide 24.8

 1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master
View toolbar.
2) Right-click on a master page displayed in the drawing and select Change Master Slide
from the context menu to open the Available Master Pages dialog (Figure 271 on
page 285).
3) Click on Load… to open the Load Master Page dialog (Figure 272).
4) Select a template category from the list displayed in Categories.
5) Select a template from the list displayed in Templates.
6) If necessary, click on Preview to display a preview of the selected template.
7) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog. The Available Master Slides dialog opens
displaying the selected template in Select a Slide Design.
8) Select the master page required in Select a Slide Design.
9) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
10) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Slide Design that have not been assigned to a page.
11) Click OK to assign the selected master page to a drawing page and close the Available
Master Slides dialog.

Inserting fields
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master
View toolbar.
2) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select a field type from the options available
on the submenu. The selected field appears in the middle of the drawing page.
3) Select the inserted field so that the border is displayed.
4) Click on the border and drag the field to the required position.
5) If necessary, format the text used in the field to the drawing requirements. For more
information, see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.
The field types that are available for insertion as follows:
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into the master page as a fixed field. The date is not
automatically updated.
Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into the master page as a variable field. The date is automatically
updated each time the file is opened.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into the master page as a fixed field. The time is not
automatically updated.
Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into the master page as a variable field. The time is automatically
updated each time the file is opened.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 287

 Figure 273: Page Properties dialog — Page page
Author
Inserts the first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data into the active page. Go
to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > User Data) on the Menu bar to enter user data details.
Page Number
Inserts the page number into every page of the drawing. To change the number format,
go to Page > Page Properties on the Menu bar to open the Page Properties dialog
(Figure 273). Click on the Page tab and select a number format from the drop-down list
in Layout Settings.
Page Title
Inserts the page title. A page title is created in Normal view by going to Page > Rename
Page on the Menu bar and entering a title in the Name text box in the Rename Page
dialog that opens. For more information, see “Renaming pages” on page 282.
Page Count
Inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.
File Name
Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after the file has been saved.

Templates
A drawing template is used as the starting point for all new drawings. For example, a template
can include a company logo, name and information on the first page of a drawing with the
remaining pages in a drawing only showing the company logo and name. Templates can contain
anything that regular drawings can contain, such as text, graphics, a set of styles, and so on.
All document types created using LibreOffice are based on templates. If a template is not
specified when a new document is started, then the default template for that type of document is
used. This default template uses a set of properties that are hard coded into LibreOffice. If
necessary, the default template for drawings, which is hard coded into LibreOffice, can be
changed. See “Default template” on page 291 for more information. For more information on
templates and obtaining templates from other sources, see the Getting Started Guide.

288 |Draw Guide 24.8

The only template available in Draw is the default template and no predefined drawing templates
are installed with LibreOffice. However, templates can be created using methods described in
the following sections. Drawing templates can also be installed from other sources, see
"Importing templates" on page 296 for more information.

Creating templates
Using Save As Template dialog
1) Open a drawing to use as a basis for a template, or open and edit a template to use as a
basis for a new template.
2) Add any extra content and styles, or edit the content and styles to the template
requirements.
3) Use one of the following methods to open the Save As Template dialog (Figure 274):
– Go to File > Templates > Save As Template on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Save on the Standard toolbar and select Save as
Template from the drop-down menu.
4) Enter a name for the template in the Enter Template Name text box.
5) Select a template category from the list available in the Select Template Category box.
6) If the new template is to be used as the default template in LibreOffice Draw, select the
option Set as default template.
7) Click on Save to save the template and close the Save As Template dialog.

Using Save As command

1) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Ctrl+S
(macOS ⌘+Ctrl+S) to open the Save as dialog.

Figure 274: Save As Template dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 289

 2) Navigate to the LibreOffice templates folder. Actual location of the LibreOffice template
folder depends on the computer system and setup.
3) Enter a filename using the extension OTG in the Name box.
4) From the drop-down list, select ODF Drawing Template (.otg) as the file type.
5) Click on Save to save the template and close the dialog.

Note
When saving a drawing as a template, the template must be saved in the LibreOffice
templates folder for the template to be recognized and located by the LibreOffice
Template Manager. See “Template folder location” on page 294 for more information.

Creating drawings from templates

Start Center
Open LibreOffice and create a new drawing from a template displayed in the Start Center using
one of the following methods:
• Click on Templates in the Start Center to open a display of available templates for all
LibreOffice applications. Click on the required template and a new document opens
using the relevant LibreOffice module for the template.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Templates in the Start Center, then select Draw
Templates to display Draw templates. Click on the required template and a new drawing
opens using Draw.

Figure 275: Templates dialog

290 |Draw Guide 24.8

Templates dialog
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog (Figure 275):
• Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-down list.
4) Select a template from the options available in the preview box.
5) Click on Open, or double click on the template to create a new drawing using the
selected template and close the Template dialog.
6) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the new drawing as a file using the
extension ODG.

Default template
If a new drawing is created without selecting a template, LibreOffice creates the drawing using a
set of properties hard coded into LibreOffice. However, any drawing template can be used as the
default template for Draw. The selected template must be located in the templates folders used
for LibreOffice applications and categories. See “Template folder location” on page 294 for more
information.

Setting default template

1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-down list.
4) Select a template from the options available in the preview box.
5) Right-click on the selected template and select Set as default from the context menu.
There is no confirmation that the selected template is now the default template for new
drawings. The default template is indicated by check mark at the top left corner of the
template icon.
6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
uses the new default template.

Note
If a new drawing is suitable to use as the default template, then the drawing must be
saved as a template first before it can be used as the default template. See “Creating
templates” on page 289 for more information.

Tip
To reset all default templates for all LibreOffice modules, click on Manage in the
Templates dialog and select Reset All Default Templates from the drop-down list.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 291

Resetting default template
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-down list.
4) Right-click on the default template. The default template is indicated by check mark at
the top left corner of the template icon.
5) Select Reset Default from the context menu. There is no confirmation that LibreOffice
Draw has been reset to using LibreOffice default properties. The check mark is removed
from the template icon.
6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
uses the LibreOffice default template.

Editing templates
Template styles and template content can be edited and, if necessary, reapplied to drawings that
were created using that template. Content in a drawing that is not included in the template
cannot be reapplied.

Note
Templates that were supplied with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only templates that
have been created using LibreOffice, or imported into LibreOffice, can be edited or
deleted.

Editing
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select a drawing template that was created using LibreOffice, or imported into
LibreOffice.
3) Right-click on the selected template and select Edit from the context menu to open the
template in Draw.
4) Edit the template as any other drawing.
5) Go to File > Save on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S)
to save the template.
6) Alternatively, save the edited template as a new template. See “Creating templates” on
page 289 for more information.

Updating drawings from modified template

If a drawing is opened and the template has been modified, a confirmation dialog opens asking
to update the styles in the drawing to the formatting used in the modified template.

292 |Draw Guide 24.8

 • Select Update Styles to update any styles in the drawing that have been changed in the
template and close the confirmation dialog.
• Select Keep Old Styles so that styles in the drawing that have been changed in the
template are not updated. The confirmation dialog closes and does not appear when the
document is reopened. Also, the drawing is no longer connected to the template.

Note
If Keep Old Styles is selected, the template is still listed under File > Properties >
General. The template has to be reassigned to reconnect the document to the
template.

Changing templates assigned to drawings

If necessary, the template originally used for a drawing can be changed to a different template,
or the original template used for the drawing reassigned.
• To manually change, or reassign a template, create a new drawing from the required
template and copy the contents from the old drawing into the new drawing.
• Download the Template Changer extension from the LibreOffice website at
[Link] and
install it into LibreOffice. Restart LibreOffice to activate the extension. Open the drawing
and use File > Templates > Change template (current document) on the Menu bar to
change the template. For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Figure 276: Options LibreOffice Paths dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 293

Organizing templates
LibreOffice can only locate templates that are in LibreOffice template folder. Template categories
can be created and used to organize templates, for example creating separate categories for
different projects or clients. Templates can also be imported and exported.

Template folder location

The template folder location in LibreOffice varies with the computer operating system. Locating
the template folder on a computer is as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Paths (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > Paths) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Paths dialog
(Figure 276).
2) Scroll down to Templates in Paths used by LibreOffice to identify the template folder
used by LibreOffice. The following are examples of the template folder location using
different operating systems:
– Windows 11
C\Users\peter\AppData\Roaming\LibreOffice\4\user\template
– Ubuntu 23.04
/home/peter/.config/libreoffice/4/user/template;/home/peter/Templates
– macOS Ventura 13.5
/Users/peter/Library/Application Support/LibreOffice/4/user/templates

Creating template categories

1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) In Manage, select New Category from the context menu.
4) Enter a name in the Enter new category name text box in the dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the new category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Note
In LibreOffice template categories, the default options Rename Category and
Delete Category are grayed out. This indicates that template categories cannot be
renamed or deleted.

Renaming template categories

Template categories originally installed with LibreOffice cannot be renamed. Only template
categories that have been created after the LibreOffice installation can be renamed.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.

294 |Draw Guide 24.8

 3) Select the category for renaming from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) In Manage, select Rename Category from the context menutest.
5) Enter a name in the Enter new category name text box in the dialog that opens.
6) Click OK to save the renamed category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Deleting template categories

Template categories installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only template categories that
have been created after the LibreOffice installation can be deleted.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the template category for deletion from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) In Manage, select Delete Category from the drop-down list.
5) Click on Yes in the warning message to confirm the deletion of the category.

Moving templates
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.

Figure 277: Select Category dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 295

 3) Select the template category for moving from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) Right-click on the template that is going to be moved and select Move from the context
menu to open the Select Category dialog (Figure 277).
5) Select a category from Select from Existing Category, or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
6) Click OK to move the template to the selected category and close the Select Category
dialog.

Importing templates
Using the Extension Manager, templates can be downloaded from many sources, including the
official LibreOffice template repository. For more information about using the Extension Manager
to import templates, see the Getting Started Guide.
Save the template on a computer, then import the template into the LibreOffice template folder
as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Click on Manage and select Import from the context menu to open the Select Category
dialog (Figure 277).
4) Select a category from Select from Existing Category, or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
5) Click OK and a file browser window opens.
6) Navigate to the folder containing the template, select the template and click Open. The
file browser closes and the template appears in the selected template category in the
Templates dialog.

Note
Exporting a template does not remove it from the Templates dialog, or template
folder. Exporting places a copy of the template in the location specified.

Exporting templates
Export a template from a template category to another location in a computer, or network, as
follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the required template category from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.

296 |Draw Guide 24.8

 4) Right-click on the required template and select Export from the context menu to open a
file browser window.
5) Navigate to the destination folder where the template is going to be exported to.
6) Click OK and the exported template appears in the selected folder.
7) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog.

Deleting templates
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:
– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the required template category from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) Right-click on the template being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
5) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion of the template.
6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog.

Note
Templates installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only templates that have
been created or imported after the installation of LibreOffice can be deleted.

Multiple layers

Notes
When a new layer is added, the layer is added to all pages in a drawing. However,
when an object is added to a layer in a selected page, it is only added to the selected
drawing page.
If an object is to appear on all drawing pages, for example, a company logo, add the
object to the master page by going to View > Master on the Menu bar. See “Master
pages” on page 283 for more information.
Layers in Draw allow assembly of related elements in a drawing. Layers are individual
workspaces in a drawing that can be hidden from view, prevented from printing, or locked so that
changes cannot be made.
Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on a drawing, except for the Controls
layer. The Controls layer is always in front of all other layers in a drawing. The stacking order of
objects on a drawing is determined by the order in which objects were added. The stacking order
of objects are rearranged by going to Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar.

Figure 278: Example of Draw Layers tab

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 297

Layers in a drawing are indicated by tabs located at the bottom of the Workspace and above the
Status bar, as shown by the example in Figure 278. By default, the Layout tab is always
selected when a drawing is opened. Click on another tab to select another layer in the drawing.

Default layers
Normal view
In Normal view, LibreOffice Draw provides three default layers that are visible to the user. These
default layers cannot be deleted or renamed.
Layout
The default workspace where objects are normally placed.
Controls
Used for form controls that have been assigned an action. Objects on this layer are
always in front of objects on other layers. To prevent form controls from being visible on a
drawing, deselect the Visible option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog. To
prevent form controls from being printed, deselect the Printable option in the Insert
Layer or Modify Layer dialog.
Dimension Lines
When dimension lines are drawn, the dimension lines are automatically placed on this
layer. To prevent dimension lines from being visible on a drawing, deselect the Visible
option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog. To prevent dimension lines from being
printed, deselect the Printable option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog.

Master view
In Master view, LibreOffice provides a single layer, Background objects. This layer is used to
places objects that appear on every page in a drawing, for example company logo, date, page
number, drawing title, and so on.

Figure 279: Insert Layer dialog

298 |Draw Guide 24.8

Inserting layers
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Insert Layer dialog (Figure 279):
– Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom of the Workspace area and select Insert
Layer from the context menu.
– Go to Insert > Layer on the Menu bar.
2) Enter meaningful names for the layer in the Name and Title text boxes.
3) If necessary, enter a description for the new layer in the Description text box.
4) Select Visible for the layer to be visible in a drawing. When Visible is not selected, the
layer is hidden and its name in the layer tab changes color to blue.
5) Select Printable for the layer to print when the drawing is printed. The name of a layer is
underlined in the layer tab bar when Printable is not selected. For example, not printing
a layer is useful if the layer is a draft layer for guides or annotations used in creating the
drawing, but is not required for the final printed output.
6) Select Locked to prevent any objects on a layer from deletion, editing, or moving. No
additional objects can be added to a locked layer. The name of a locked layer is changes
to Italic text in the layer tab bar. For example, locking a layer is useful when a base plan
is to be protected while adding a new layer with other details.
7) Click OK to close the Insert Layer dialog and the new layer automatically becomes active

Modifying layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be modified.
2) Use one of the following methods to open the Modify Layer dialog. The Modify Layer
dialog is similar to the Insert Layer dialog:
– Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom of the Workspace area and select Modify
Layer from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Layer on the Menu bar.
– Double click on the layer tab.
3) Make the necessary changes to the attributes for the layer.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Modify Layer dialog.

Working with layers

Selecting a layer
Click on the layer name tab in the Layers tab bar to select and activate the layer. Objects added
to the drawing are only added to the active layer. Form controls are automatically added to the
Controls layer and dimension lines are automatically added to the Dimension Lines layer.
If there are several layers in a drawing, a layer tab may not be visible on the Layers tab bar. Use
the navigation icons on the left of the Layers tab bar to navigate to the required layer.

Hiding layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be hidden and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Deselect Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to blue. Any
objects placed on a hidden layer are no longer visible on the other layers of the drawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the layer name tab to hide the layer.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 299

Showing hidden layers
1) Select the hidden layer that is going to become visible and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Select Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to the default
text color. Any objects placed on a hidden layer are now visible in the other layers of the
drawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the layer name tab to make the layer
visible.

Locking layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be locked and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Select Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is underlined. Locking a
layer prevents any modification of the layer.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key and click on the name tab to lock the
layer.

Unlocking layers
1) Select the locked layer and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Deselect Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is no longer underlined.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key and click on the name tab of the locked
layer to unlock it.

Note
Only layers that have been added to a drawing can be renamed or deleted. The
default layers Layout, Controls, and Dimension Lines cannot be renamed or
deleted.

Renaming layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be renamed and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Enter a new name in the Name text box and click OK to save the change.
3) Alternatively, right-click on the name tab of the layer and select Rename Layer from the
context menu. The text becomes editable allowing the name to be changed. Click
outside the tab area to save the change.
4) Alternatively, hold down the Alt key (macOS ⌥) and click on the name tab. The text
becomes editable allowing the name to be changed. Click outside the tab area to save
the change.

Deleting layers
1) Right-click on the name tab of the layer that is going to be deleted and select Delete
Layer from the context menu.
2) Confirm the deletion of the layer. The layer and all of the objects on the layer are deleted
from the drawing.

Moving objects between layers

If objects are selected on a layer, the Status bar indicates how many objects are selected. The
position of the moved objects does not change in the drawing and the layer where the objects
have been placed is displayed in the Status bar. Move the selected objects from one layer to
another layer using one of the following methods:

300 |Draw Guide 24.8

 • Click and drag the selected objects to the name tab of the destination layer.
• Go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar, or right-click on the selected objects and select Cut
from the context menu. Select the destination layer, then go to Edit > Paste on the Menu
bar, or right-click on the Workspace and select Paste from the context menu.

Dimensioning
Dimensioning objects in Draw and then displaying dimensions creates drawing similar to an
engineering drawing. When dimensions are created, they are automatically placed on the
Dimension Lines layer.

Dimensioning objects
1) Dimension an object using one of the following methods. The cursor changes shape
depending on computer operating and system, for example a cross:
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Lines and Arrows subtoolbar (Figure 280) and click on Dimension Line.
– Click on Dimension Line in the Lines and Arrows panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 281).
2) Position the cursor at one corner of an object, then click and drag the cursor to draw the
dimension line. To restrict drawing the dimension line in the horizontal or vertical
direction, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor.
3) Release the cursor when the end of the dimension line is reached and the dimension line
is drawn. The dimension is automatically added (as shown by the example in
Figure 282). Also, the dimension line is placed automatically on the Dimension Lines
layer.
4) To edit the text of the dimension, double-click on an unselected dimension line to enter
text edit mode and make any necessary changes. Click outside the dimension line to
save the changes.

Figure 280: Lines and Arrows subtoolbar

Figure 281: Lines and Arrows panel in Shapes deck on Sidebar

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 301

 5) To configure the dimension line, see “Configuring dimensioning” on page 303.

Note
After editing the dimension text, entering text and then deleting text, save and close
the drawing. Reopen the drawing to enable dimension automatic measurements.

Figure 282: Example of dimension lines

Figure 283: Graphic Styles dialog — Dimensioning page

302 |Draw Guide 24.8

Configuring dimensioning
Drawing object styles
1) Open the Graphics Styles dialog (Figure 283) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T) to open the Styles deck on the Sidebar,
then right-click on a style and select Modify from the context menu.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck, then right-click on a style and
select Modify from the context menu.
2) Click on Dimensioning to open the Dimensioning page in the dialog.
3) Make the changes required to dimensioning using the various options in the Line and
Legend sections on the Dimensioning page.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.
5) To reset the dimensioning options to the default properties of the template, open the
Graphics Style dialog, then click on Standard.

Dimension line dialog

1) Draw a dimension line. See “Dimensioning objects” on page 301 for more information.
2) Right-click on the dimension line and select Dimensions from the context menu to open
the Dimension line dialog (Figure 284).

Figure 284: Dimension Line dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 303

 3) Make the required changes for dimensioning using the various options in the Dimension
line dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension line dialog.

Dimensioning options
The dimensioning options in the Dimensions page in the Graphics Style dialog and the
Dimension Line dialog are as follows. The preview in the dialogs changes as the following
options are changed showing how the dimension line appears in a drawing.
Line
Sets distances between the dimension line, guides and the object.
Line distance
Specifies distance between the dimension line and the object or baseline. A minimum
of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. The lower the value,
the closer the dimension line is to the object or baseline.
Guide overhang
Specifies distance the guide extends above or below the dimension line. A minimum of
-10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values cause
the guide overhang to extend above the dimension line. Negative values cause the
guide overhang to be below the baseline.
Guide distance
Specifies length of the right and left guides below the dimension line toward the object.
A minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive
values extend the guides above the baseline and further away from the object.
Negative values extend the guides below the baseline and closer to the object.
Left guide
Specifies length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. A minimum of -10mm to
a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values extend the guide
below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values move the guide away
from the object.
Right guide
Specifies length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. A minimum of -10mm
to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values extend the
guide below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values move the guide
away from the object.
Measure below object
Reverses positions and lengths of the dimension line and guides set in Line options.
Decimal places
Specifies number of decimal places used for the display of line properties.
Legend
Sets the properties of the dimension text.
Text position
Determines position of the dimension text to the dimension line and guides. The
AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal must be deselected before a text position can be
assigned.
AutoVertical
Determines optimal vertical position for the dimension text.

304 |Draw Guide 24.8

 AutoHorizontal
Determines optimal horizontal position for the dimension text.
Parallel to line
Displays, when selected, text parallel to the dimension line or, when deselected, at 90
degrees to the dimension line.
Show measurement units
Shows or hides dimension measurement units. A measurement unit is selected from
the drop-down list.

Note
The dimensioning options are linked to the current drawing and any dimensioning
changes made apply only to the current drawing. New drawings start with the Draw
standard properties. If the dimensioning options are to be used for future drawings,
save the drawing as a template.

Tip
When dimensioning objects, it is recommended to use the zoom function, guide lines
and snap functions so dimension lines can be accurately placed on an object. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.

Drawing to scale
In Draw, the Workspace drawing area is normally Letter or A4 page size, depending on the
computer setup and the default printer connected to the computer. However, depending on the
actual size of the drawn objects, it is often convenient to reduce or enlarge the drawing by
scaling (for example 1:10 or 2:1).

Note
When drawing to scale, dimension configuration values in the Graphics Style and
Dimension Line dialogs are also to scale. For example, a value of 10mm in the dialog
results in a dimension value of 300mm if the scale has been set to 1:30.

Figure 285: Options LibreOffice Draw dialog — General page

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 305

 Figure 286: Example of drawing to scale
To specify the drawing scale go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General) to open the Options dialog
(Figure 285), then select a value from the Scale drop-down list. The default setting for this option
is 1:1. When a change is made to the drawing scale, it is reflected in the horizontal and vertical
rulers on the Workspace.
Any change in the drawing scale has no effect on the basic drawing operations. Draw
automatically calculates the necessary values (for example, dimension lines). The spacing of the
grid points is independent of drawing scale as the grid is only a visual drawing aid and not a
drawing element.
An increase in scale (for example 1:4) allows large objects to be drawn that would not fit into the
paper size for a drawing. A decrease in drawing scale (for example 4:1) allows small objects to
be drawn accurately at an increased size and make them easier to understand. Examples of
drawing to scale are shown in Figure 286 where all three rectangles are the same size in the
drawing.
1) Left rectangle — drawn at the default 1:1 scale and dimensioned.
2) Center rectangle — drawing scale changed to 1:4. Dimensions are automatically
increased by Draw to display the decrease in scale.
3) Right rectangle — drawing scale changed to 4:1. Dimensions are automatically
decreased by Draw to display the increase in scale.

Multiple views of a drawing

Several views of the same drawing can be opened and used in Draw. These views are displayed
in separate windows and are useful in displaying different views of the drawing, for example,
master page and normal page open at the same time. Make sure the correct view is active when
saving a drawing.
To open a new window for the same drawing file, go to Window > New Window on the Menu
bar. Any change to a drawing in one window is immediately displayed in all open windows.
The filename for each open window is automatically numbered as shown by the example in
Figure 287 and the active window has a marker by its filename in the list. If other LibreOffice
documents are open at the same time, then these documents are also be included in the list.
Switch between windows by clicking on a name in the list, or by clicking on the window itself if
visible.

306 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 287: Example of multiple windows in Draw
Use one of the following methods to close a window:
• Go to Window > Close Window on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+W (macOS ⌘+W).
• Click on File > Close in the Menu bar of the window.

Gallery
Draw includes several images in the Gallery. These images are grouped into themes listed in
alphabetical order (for example Arrows, BPMN, Bullets, Diagrams, and so on). Click on a
theme to display its images as icons or in a detailed view.
• To display an icon view of the images in the Gallery deck (Figure 288), click on Icon
View at the bottom left of the Sidebar.
• To display an detailed view of the images in the Gallery deck (Figure 290), click on
Detailed View at the bottom left of the Sidebar.

Using the Gallery

1) Click on Gallery on the Sidebar, or go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
2) Select a theme from the available options.

Figure 288: Gallery deck in Sidebar — Icon View

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 307

 Figure 289: Gallery deck in Sidebar — Detailed View
3) Use one of the following methods to place an image into a drawing:
– Click on an image in the Gallery deck and drag the image into a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Insert from the context menu. The image is placed
at the center of a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Copy from the context menu then paste the image
into the drawing. The image is placed at the center of the drawing.
4) Edit the gallery image to the drawing requirements. For more information on editing
images and pictures, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.

Creating themes and adding images

1) Open the Gallery deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on New at the bottom right of the Gallery deck to open the Properties of New
Theme dialog (Figure 290).
3) On the General page, enter a name for the theme in the text box.
4) Click on Files to open the Files page (Figure 291).
5) Click on Find Files to open a Select Path dialog.
6) Navigate to the folder that contains the images required and click OK to select the folder
and the Select Path dialog closes. A list of files contained in the folder now appear in the
Files page as shown by the example in Figure 291.
7) If necessary, select the file format required for the images from the options available in
the drop-down list. By default, all formats for image files are selected.
8) If required, click on Preview to display each selected image file.
9) Select the files required for the new theme. If necessary, press the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘)
to select multiple files.

308 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 290: Properties of New Theme dialog — General page

Figure 291: Properties of New Theme dialog — Files page

10) Click on Add. The selected files disappear from the file list and the images appear in the
Gallery.
11) If all the files in the list are to be added, click Add All. All files disappear from the list and
the images appear in the Gallery.
12) Click OK when finished adding files and close the Properties of New Theme dialog. The
name of the new theme appears in the Gallery deck.

Deleting gallery themes and images

1) Right-click on a theme, or image in the Gallery and select Delete from the context menu.
2) Click on Yes in the confirmation dialog and the theme, or image is deleted from the
Gallery.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 309

 Notes
If an object is added to a theme, the object loses its connection to Draw graphic
styles and all properties are set as direct formatting.
Only themes and images that have been added to Draw can be deleted or renamed.
Themes and images included with the LibreOffice installation cannot be deleted or
renamed.
An image is a linked file and only the link is deleted from the Gallery. The original
image file is not deleted.

Updating the Gallery

All images in the Gallery are linked files. Occasionally, it is beneficial to update a theme that has
been added to Draw to make sure that all files are still accessible. Right-click on a theme that
has at least one file added to the theme and select Update from the context menu.

Renaming themes
To rename a theme that has been added to LibreOffice Draw, right-click on the theme name and
select Rename from the context menu.

Colors
Draw (like all LibreOffice modules) uses colors grouped into color palettes. Colors can be
created to suit drawing requirements. All custom colors created are placed in the custom color
palette. The following explains the color models that are used to create a custom color.
Red, Green, Blue (RGB)
The RGB color model is based on the additive color model of light waves and is
designed for electronic displays and computers. This means, the more color added, the
closer a color moves towards white. RGB is created using scales from 0 to 255. When
black is used, the values are R=0, G=0, and B=0. When white is used, the values are
R=255, G=255, and B=255. LibreOffice uses the RGB color model internally for printing
in all LibreOffice modules.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (Black) (CMYK)
The CMYK color model is a subtractive color model where colors are subtracted to
change, or create a color. It is mainly used in printing, which is why printer ink cartridges
are labeled CMYK. CMYK works on a scale of 0 to 100. When black is used, the values
are C=100, M=100, Y=100, and K=100. When white is used, the values are C=0, M=0,
Y=0, and K=0.
Hue, Saturation, Brightness (HSB)
The HSB color model is an alternative representation of the RGB color model. HSB was
designed to be more closely aligned with the way human vision perceives color-making
attributes. Use HSB values to fine tune any custom colors that are created.

Tip
More information on color models and color values can be found at
[Link]

310 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 292: Color Bar (Color Palette)

Changing colors in objects or lines

When changing colors in objects, color palettes are used to select colors. These color palettes
are installed with LibreOffice and are used in all the LibreOffice modules. Using color palettes is
similar across all types of objects, but accessing the color palettes does vary according to the
type of object selected.

Note
The colors available in the Color Bar are from the Standard color palette that is part
of the LibreOffice installation.

Color Bar
Although LibreOffice includes tools to precisely specify a color, it also includes a Color Bar
(Figure 292) to quickly changing color in object area fills, borders, or lines. The Color Bar is also
called the Color Palette.
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar to open the Color Bar. When the Color Bar
opens, it is labeled Color Palette.
3) Left click on a color to change the area fill color, or right-click on a color to change the
border or line color of a selected object.
4) Left click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to remove the color from
an object fill, or right-click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to
remove the color from an object border,
5) To close the Color Bar, go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar and deselect Color
Bar.

Area dialog
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog (Figure 293) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
3) Click on Area, then click on Color to open the Color page.
4) In Colors, select a color palette from the Palette drop-down list.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 311

 Figure 293: Area dialog — Color page
5) Click on a color from the ones displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from Recent Colors.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The selected fill color appears
in the selected object.

Area panel on the Sidebar

1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 294).
3) Select Color from the Fill drop-down list.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Fill Color to open the palette last used.
5) If necessary, select a color palette from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected fill color is applied to the object.

Fill Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars

1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Fill Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, or the
Draw toolbar to open the last color palette used.

312 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 294: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
3) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected fill color is applied to the selected object

Line dialog
1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 295) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line or object and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on Line to open the Line page.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color in Line Properties to open the last color
palette used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected line color is applied to the line or object border.
7) Click OK to save the color change and close the Line dialog.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 313

 Figure 295: Line dialog — Line page

Figure 296: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Line panel on the Sidebar

1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 296).

314 |Draw Guide 24.8

 3) In Line, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color to open the last color palette used.
4) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Line Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars

1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, or the
Draw toolbar to open the last color palette used.
3) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
4) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Changing text color

Changing text color is very similar to changing the color of an area fill, object border, or line. The
Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens and replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when text
is selected in a drawing. If the Text Formatting toolbar does not open, go to View > Toolbars on
the Menu bar and select Text Formatting.

Character dialog
1) Select a text box, or switch on text mode for a Draw object.
2) Highlight the text characters where the text color is going to be changed.
3) Open the Character dialog (Figure 297) using one of the following methods:
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the highlighted text and select Character from the context menu.
4) Click on Font Effects to open the Font Effects page.
5) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the last color palette used.
6) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
7) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected color is applied to the selected text.
8) Click OK to save the color change and close the Character dialog.

Character panel on the Sidebar

1) Select a text box, or switch on text mode for a Draw object.
2) Highlight the text characters where the text color is going to be changed.
3) Open the Character panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 297).
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the color palette last used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and the
selected color is applied to the selected text.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 315

 Figure 297: Character dialog — Font Effects page

Figure 297: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

316 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 298: Pick a Color dialog

Creating colors

Notes
When using the Line or Character dialog to open the Pick a Color dialog, the custom
color created cannot be saved into the Custom Palette, or renamed with a more
meaningful name. The custom color created is named using the hex value that is
displayed in the Pick a Color dialog. Only the Area dialog has the ability to rename
custom colors and save custom colors into the Custom Palette.
LibreOffice uses the RGB color model for printing in color. The RGB values of a
selected color are displayed the preview boxes.

Using Pick a Color dialog

1) Select an object, or text and open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 298) using one of the
following methods:
– Open the Area dialog, then click on Color to open the Color page and click on Pick.
– Open the Area panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to the
right of Fill Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottom of
the color palette.
– Open the Line dialog, then open a color palette in Color and click on Custom Color
at the bottom of the color palette.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 317

 – Open the Line panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to the
right of Line Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottom
of the color palette.
– Open the Character dialog, then open a color palette in Font color and click on
Custom Color at the bottom of the color palette.
– Open the Character panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to
the right of Font Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the
bottom of the color palette.
2) Select a color range on the vertical color bar in the Pick a Color dialog that approximately
matches the custom color being created.
3) Click and drag the small target circle in the color box until the color matches the custom
color required. The values for RGB, HSB and CMYK change as the small target circle is
dragged around the color box helping to create the exact color, if the color values are
known.
4) Alternatively, if the color values, or hex number, are known, enter these values in the
appropriate text box. The values in all the text boxes change to match the new values.
For example, after entering HSB values, the RGB, CMYK and Hex values also change to
match.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Pick a Color dialog.

Using Area dialog

1) Open the Area dialog and click on Color to open the Color page (Figure 293 on
page 312).
2) In New, enter the RGB values or, if known, the Hex value into the text boxes. The color
changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
3) Alternatively, in New, use the minus and plus signs for the RGB values to decrease or
increase the values. The color changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
4) Click OK to change the color and close the Area dialog.

Adding custom colors

1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page (Figure 293 on page 312).
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in Recent Colors.
3) In Custom Palette, click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the color in the text box.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. The custom color appears in
the Custom Palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Renaming custom colors

Only a custom color can be renamed using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page (Figure 293 on page 312).
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom Palette.
3) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the custom color in the text box,

318 |Draw Guide 24.8

 5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. A new custom color appears in
the Custom Palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Notes
Renaming a custom color does not actually rename the custom color, but adds a
new custom color to the Custom Palette.
Before renaming, deleting, a custom color, make sure the custom color is NOT being
used in another LibreOffice document.
It is important to use a memorable names for custom colors so that the custom color
is easily recognized in the Custom Palette. By default, a custom color is given a hex
number, which makes it difficult identifying colors when there is more than one
custom color.

Deleting custom colors

Only a custom color can be deleted using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page (Figure 293 on page 312).
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom Palette.
3) Click on Delete. There is no confirmation given when deleting custom colors.
4) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Bézier curves
Bézier2 curves can be used in Draw. A curve is defined by means of a start point, an end point,
and, where necessary, control points. For points on the curve the terms Nodes and Anchors are
often used. For more information and an explanation of the mathematical background of Bézier
curves, see [Link]

Figure 299: Example Bézier curve

2 Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, an engineer working with the Renault car manufacturer,
who developed the technique in the 1960s. The technology was intended to make modeling the
surface of vehicles easier.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 319

Bézier curves are very useful for experimenting with the shape and form of curves. In point
mode, the curve alignment can be changed by dragging the points with the cursor. The example
shown in Figure 299 displays an example of a Bezier curve with the start point selected and a
control point attached to the start point by a dashed line. Moving control points changes the
curvature and shape of a Bezier curve.

Drawing Bézier curves

1) Click on Curve in the Curves and Polygons panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar,
or Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Click at the start point for the curve and drag the cursor to the approximate position of
the end point for the curve.
3) Release the cursor and drag the end point of the curve to its end position.
4) Double-click when the end position of the curve is reached and a curve is drawn. The arc
of the curve is determined by the distance dragged to create the end point.
5) Switch to points editing mode using one of the following methods:
– Go to Edit > Toggle Edit Point Mode on the Menu bar.
– If added to the toolbar, click on Toggle Edit Point Mode on the Drawing toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.

Note
The Edit Points toolbar does not open until a point has been selected on a curve.
6) Open the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 300) using one of the following methods.
– Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Edit Points.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
– If added to the toolbar, click on Points on the Drawing toolbar.
7) Click once on the curve to display the start and end points. The start point of the curve is
larger than the end point.
8) Click on a start or end point to display the control points. Control points appear at the end
of a dashed line connected to the selected point, as shown in the following examples.
9) Click on the control point and drag it to a new position to change the shape of the curve.
10) When the shape of the curve is satisfactory, release the cursor to fix the curve.
11) Click anywhere on the workspace to deselect the curve and stop editing points.

Figure 300: Edit Points toolbar

Edit Points tools

After the initial opening of the Edit Points toolbar, when an object is selected that has been
converted to a curve or polygon, the toolbar is displayed. The tools available on the Edit Points
toolbar allow the editing of a Bézier curve and changing of the curve shape. A point on a Bézier
curve has to be selected for all the tools on the Edit Points toolbar to become available.

320 |Draw Guide 24.8

Move Points
Click and drag on a point to move it to another location.
– The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement and changes shape as the
selected point changes position.
– Click and drag on the curve between points to move the entire curve without distorting
the form.
Insert Points
Activates the insert mode when selected and inserts smooth points onto a curve. Insert
mode remains active after inserting points. Select Move Points to deactivate insert
mode.
– The inserted point can be moved while insert mode is activated.
– If a corner or symmetrical point is required, insert a smooth point first and convert the
point to a corner or symmetrical point.
Delete Points
Deletes selected points. If several points are to be deleted, hold down the Shift key
whilst selecting points and before clicking on Delete Points.

Figure 301: Example converting curved segment to line

Figure 302: Example corner point

Convert To Curve
Converts a curve into a straight line or a straight line into a curve (Figure 301).
– Select a single point and the curved segment after the point converts to a straight line,
or coverts a straight line segment to a curve after the point.
– When converting a segment from a curve to a straight line, each point at each end of
the segment becomes a control point similar to the start or end point.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 321

 – When converting a segment from a straight line to a curve, each control point at each
end of the segment becomes a smooth point.
Close Bézier
Closes a freeform line or curve by connecting the start point with the end point creating
an object with area fill.
Split Curve
Splits a curve into two or more curves. Select a point or points and click on Split Curve
to create separate segments of a curve. Deselect the curve, then select a segment to
move or edit it.
Corner Point
Converts a selected point into a corner point (Figure 302). Corner points have two
movable control points independent from each other allowing a corner to be created in a
curve.
Smooth Transition
Converts a corner or symmetrical point into a smooth point (Figure 303). Both control
points are parallel aligned and can only move simultaneously. The control points may
differ in length, allowing the curvature degree to be varied.
Symmetric Transition
Converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point (Figure 304). Both
control points are parallel aligned having the same length. These control points can only
be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.
Eliminate Points
Allows selection of several points before using the Delete Points tool. This is useful
when deleting a straight line segment to create a complete curve.

Figure 303: Example smooth transition point

Figure 304: Example symmetric transition point

322 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 305: Example comment in Draw

Adding comments
Comments in Draw are similar to comments in the Writer, Calc and Impress modules. For more
information about adding, navigating, and replying to comments, see the Getting Started Guide.
Comments in Draw cannot be printed. To reply to a comment in Draw, a new comment has to be
added to the drawing.
1) Go to Insert > Comment on the Menu bar and a comment box (Figure 305) appears in
the upper left-hand corner of a drawing. Draw automatically adds the user name and
date at the bottom of the comment and places a comment marker on the drawing page.
2) Type or paste a comment into the comment text box.
3) To apply basic formatting to the text, right-click on the text and select the formatting
option from the context menu.
4) To delete a comment, use one of the following methods:
– Right-click in the comment box and select Delete from the context menu.
– Right-click on the comment marker and select Delete from the context menu.
– Click on the triangle ▼ in the bottom right of the comment box and select Delete from
the context menu.
5) To move a comment, click on the comment marker and drag it to a new position.
6) To hide comments, use one of the following methods:
– Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Comments to hide the comment and the
comment marker.
– Click on the drawing outside of the comment to hide the comment. The comment
marker remains visible.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 323

 7) To show comments, go to View > Comments on the Menu bar and click on the comment
marker.

Note
For the user name and initials to appear in a comment, enter the user data in Tools
> Options > LibreOffice > User Data dialog (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > User Data). If more than one person edits the document, each author
is automatically allocated a different background color.

Coordinate system
X and Y axes
The x-axis is the horizontal position of an object and the y-axis is the vertical position of an
object. The rulers do not show a minus sign if there are negative coordinates. However, the
minus sign for negative coordinates is shown in the position field in the Status Bar and the
Position and Size dialog.

Workspace
The Draw Workspace is larger than the drawing page. The area outside the drawing page is
one page width right and left and a half page above and below the drawing page. The size of the
drawing page is indicated by highlighted portions in the horizontal and vertical rulers.
Objects in Draw can be drawn partly or wholly outside the drawing page and these objects are
saved with the drawing. However, when the drawing is printed or exported, any object or portion
of an object not on the drawing page is not included. This allows the Workspace area around
the drawing page to be used for drafts when creating objects.

Object position
The coordinates of objects and snap guides are shown relative to the origin. The default origin
for coordinates (0.00/0.00 position) is the top-left corner of the drawing page without margins or
the top left corner of the drawing page where the margins intersect. To change the default origin,
click and drag the intersection of the rulers in the top left corner of the Workspace to the desired
position. Guide lines appear as the intersection is dragged from its default origin to its new
position. This origin setting is only for the current view and is not saved in the document.
The area inside the default origin is the area used for the grid when the options Snap to Grid
and Display Grid are selected.
To reset the default origin back to its original setting at the top-left corner of the page,
double-click in the top-left corner on the Workspace where the horizontal and vertical rulers
meet.

Accuracy
Draw internally uses integer values in 1/100 mm. This means that it may not be possible to get
an exact position for 1/8 inch. Also, many dialog fields are restricted to two decimals.
To work with the maximum possible accuracy, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw >
General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General) and set the option
Unit of measurement to Millimeter. The rulers then show metric units after this option has been
selected, To use another measurement unit for the rulers, right-click on a ruler and select the
measurement unit from the context menu. The horizontal and vertical rulers can have different
measurement units.

324 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Draw Guide 24.8

Chapter 12,
User Interface Variants
Introduction
By default, commands and tools used in Draw are grouped in a user interface consisting of
cascading menus and toolbars. The functions and use of these cascading menus and toolbars
are described in previous chapters of this user guide.
This chapter describes the user interface variants that are available for Draw. A user has the
option to select a user interface that suits their requirements and methods of creating drawings
in Draw.

Note
When changing the user interface, the variant can be applied only to Draw, or
applied to all the modules in LibreOffice.

Selecting user interface variants

1) Go to View > User Interface on the Menu bar to open the Select Your Preferred User
Interface dialog (Figure 306).
2) In UI variants, select the required variant. An example of the selected user interface is
shown in the Preview box with a short description.
3) Click on Apply to Draw to apply the selected user interface to LibreOffice Draw only.
4) Alternatively, click on Apply to All to apply the selected user interface to all LibreOffice
modules. The LibreOffice window changes to match the selected user interface.
5) Click on Close to close the dialog.

Figure 306: Select Your Preferred User Interface dialog

Note
If the option Enable experimental features has been selected in the Tools >
Options > Advanced (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice >
Advanced), several experimental variants appear in UI variants. Being
experimental, these user interfaces are not described in this chapter.

326 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 307: Standard Toolbar user interface

Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar user interface is the default view when LibreOffice is installed on a
computer and Draw is opened for the first time. For more information on the Draw Workspace,
see Chapter 1, Introducing Draw. Figure 307 shows an example of the default Standard Toolbar
user interface in Draw and consists of the following:
• Menu bar at the top of the Workspace.
• Standard, and Line and Filling toolbars positioned below the Menu bar.
• Drawing toolbar positioned vertically on the left side of the Workspace.
• Sidebar on the right of the Workspace.

Tabbed

Note
When using the Tabbed user interface, Draw toolbars are no longer visible. If
required, it is possible to open toolbars by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar, or select Toolbars on the quick menu.
The Tabbed user interface provides a user interface that is similar to other office software
applications, for example Microsoft Office. The user interface tabs consist of tools grouped by
context. This context changes automatically depending on the LibreOffice module and the object
selected. Figure 308 shows an example of the default Workspace view using the Tabbed user
interface in Draw.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 327

 Figure 308: Tabbed user interface

Figure 309: Tabbed user interface — Quick Menu

The Tabbed user interface includes a menu bar, tab bar, and tool icons grouped in context for
use in Draw. If the tool icons on a tab page exceed the width of the Draw window, a double
chevron >> appears at the right end of the tab row. Click on this double chevron >> to display
the remaining options for the Tabbed user interface.
At the left end of the Tab bar, icons are available giving access to some commonly used tools —
Menubar; Open; Save; Undo; Redo. Clicking on Menubar at the left end of the tab bar either
hides or opens the main menu bar at the top of the Workspace.

328 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 310: Customize dialog — Notebookbar page
On the right side at the top of the Workspace, click on the 3 horizontal lines (≡) to access
commonly used commands and links, as shown by the example in Figure 309. Some commands
have context menus with more commands available. This is indicated by a triangle ►, or a
single chevron >, on the right of a command.
The Tabbed user interface is customized using the Notebookbar page of the Customize dialog
(Figure 310) to show or hide the individual tools on the various tabs. Go to Tools > Customize
on the Menu bar to open the Customize dialog. For more information on customization, see the
Getting Started Guide and the Writer Guide.

Fixed tabs
File tab
The File tab (Figure 311) provides commands to create new documents and manage existing
documents. On the right of the File tab there are two menus as follows:
• File — contains the same commands as the tools available on the tab.
• Help — provides links to a variety of resources.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 329

 Figure 311: Tabbed user interface — File tab

Figure 312: Tabbed user interface — Home tab

Figure 313: Tabbed user interface — Insert tab

Home tab
The Home tab (Figure 312) provides tools and commands for cutting, copying, pasting,
inserting, and formatting all types of objects such as images, tables, charts, text, and so on.
Also, drawing styles can be applied and updated to match drawing requirements. At the right end
of the Home tab bar, click on Home to open a drop-down menu containing additional tools.

Insert tab
The Insert tab (Figure 313) provides tools and commands for inserting many types of objects
such as images, tables, charts, and so on. At the right end of the Insert tab bar, click on Insert
to open a drop-down menu with some of the same tools.

330 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 314: Tabbed user interface — Layout tab

Figure 315: Tabbed user interface — Review tab

Layout tab
The Layout tab (Figure 314) provides tools and commands for creating a drawing layout. At the
right end of the Layout tab bar, click on Layout to open a drop-down menu with some of the
same tools.

Review tab
The Review tab (Figure 315) provides tools and commands for spell checking text, inserting and
deleting review comments, and redaction. At the right end of the Review tab bar, click on
Review to open additional text editing commands. Some of these commands appear only if
Asian or Complex Text Layout are selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings >
Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).

View tab
The View tab (Figure 316) provides tools and commands for displaying a drawing on screen. At
the right end of the View tab bar, click View to open a drop-down menu providing additional tools
for displaying a drawing screen.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 331

 Figure 316: Tabbed user interface — View tab

Figure 317: Tabbed user interface — Tools tab

Extension tab
The Extension tab is a fixed tab containing only the Extension Manager. When selected, the
Extension Manager dialog opens allowing for installation and deletion of extensions that are
compatible with LibreOffice.

Tools tab
The Tools tab (Figure 317) provides tools for macros; color replacer; media player; and so on. At
the right end of the Tools tab bar, click on Tools to open a drop-down menu with some of the
same tools, plus extra tools for organizing macros and dialogs, image map, data sources, filter
settings, extension manager, and options.

Additional tabs
The following additional tabs only open when a specific type of object in a drawing is selected.
These additional tabs are displayed between the View and Extension tabs.

Draw tab
The Draw tab (Figure 318) is only available when a draw object is selected. It provides tools and
commands for editing, transforming, grouping, aligning, and distributing draw objects. At the right
end of the Draw tab bar, click on Draw to open a drop-down menu with a similar set of tools and
commands for editing, transforming and converting draw objects.

332 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 318: Tabbed user interface — Draw tab

Figure 319: Tabbed user interface — Image tab

Image tab
The Image tab (Figure 319) is only available when an image is selected such as a photograph,
Fontwork, OLE object, or QR code. It provides tools for working with images, such as cropping,
borders, area styles, colors, and so on. At the right end of the Image tab bar, click on Image to
open a drop-down menu with some of the same tools.

Object tab
The Object tab (Figure 320) only becomes available when a compatible object is selected in a
drawing, for example a chart. It provides tools to position, resize, select colors, and so on for the
selected compatible object. At the right end of the Object tab bar, click Object to open a menu
with extra tools and commands matching the type of object selected.

Table tab
The Table tab (Figure 321) only becomes available when a compatible table is selected in a
drawing. It provides tools to position, resize, select colors, and so on for the selected table. At
the right end of the Table tab bar, click on Table to open a drop-down menu with extra tools for
editing a table.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 333

 Figure 320: Tabbed user interface — Object tab

Figure 321: Tabbed user interface — Table tab

Figure 322: Tabbed user interface — Media tab

Media tab
The Media tab (Figure 322) only becomes available when a media object is selected in a
drawing. It provides tools for positioning and running an audio or video file. At the right end of the
Media tab bar, click on Media to open a drop-down menu with extra tools for editing a media
object.

334 |Draw Guide 24.8

Single Toolbar & Sidebar
When selected, the Single Toolbar and Sidebar user interfaces (Figure 323 and 324) only show
the Menu bar with no toolbars. However, toolbars can be added to the user interface by going to
View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selecting the required toolbar from the options available.
For more information on toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.

Figure 323: Single Toolbar user interface

Figure 324: Sidebar user interface

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 335

Tabbed Compact
The Tabbed Compact user interface uses the same tabs as the Tabbed user interface, but the
tools on each tab are arranged as a single row of tools. Some of these tools have drop-down
menus with extra options. Figure 325 shows an example of the File tab in the Tabbed Compact
user interface. When displayed, clicking on the double chevron >> on the right of the tab bar
displays more tools and commands for editing an object.
The tab menu on the right of the Tabbed Compact user interface provides the same options as
the tab menus in the Tabbed user interface, see “Tabbed” on page 327 for more information.

Figure 325: Tabbed Compact user interface

Figure 326: Groupedbar Compact user interface

336 |Draw Guide 24.8

Groupedbar Compact
The Groupedbar Compact user interface provides access to tools and commands in groups
using icons for frequently used tools and drop-down menus for other tools and commands.
Figure 326 shows an example of a Compact Groupedbar user interface with a text object
selected in a LibreOffice Draw document and is organized as sets of tools and menus. The tools
and menus that are available change to suit the type of object selected. Clicking on the double
chevron >> displays more tools for editing an object.

Contextual Single
The Contextual Single user interface displays a single toolbar for the type of selected object.
Figure 327 shows an example of Contextual Single user interface when a drawing object is
selected. Clicking on the double chevron >> displays more options for editing an object.

Figure 327: Contextual Single user interface

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 337

 Draw Guide 24.8

Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts
Introduction
LibreOffice can be used without requiring a pointing device, for example mouse, trackpad, or
trackball, or keyboard shortcuts. For example, tasks as varied and complex as docking and
undocking toolbars and windows, or changing the size or position of objects can be carried out
with keyboard shortcuts. Although LibreOffice has an extensive set of keyboard shortcuts, each
LibreOffice module has keyboard shortcuts that are specific to that module.
For help with LibreOffice keyboard shortcuts, or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only, search
the LibreOffice Help using the “shortcut” or “accessibility” as keywords.
Keyboard shortcuts can also be defined in LibreOffice. For example, assign keyboard shortcuts
to standard Draw functions or macros and save them for use with Draw, or with other modules in
LibreOffice. To customize keyboard shortcuts, see the Getting Started Guide for more
information.

macOS keyboard shortcuts

Some keystrokes and menu items are different in macOS from those used in Windows or Linux
operating systems. This due to the way the different operating systems work and the different
types of keyboards used. Also, labelling on the keyboards may vary depending on the age of a
computer and style of keyboard being used. The following information shows the most common
variations in macOS for keyboard shortcuts and labelling.

Shift, Control and Alt keys

Windows or Linux macOS
Control or Ctrl ⌘ or Cmd or Command
Alt ⌥ or Option or Alt
Shift or ⇧ Shift or ⇧
Caps Lock ⇪ or Caps Lock
Control or Ctrl ⌃ or Control or Ctrl

Home and End keys

Windows or Linux macOS
Home Fn+Left Arrow
End Fn+Right Arrow

Page Up and Page Down

Windows or Linux macOS
Screen Up Fn+Up Arrow
⌥ or Option or Alt+Fn+Up
Page Up
Arrow
Screen Down Fn+Down Arrow
⌥ or Option or
Page Down
Alt+Fn+Down Arrow

340 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Note
Some keyboard shortcuts are not available for macOS computers and are indicated
in the following tables by a blank cell.

Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts

Draw function keys
Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
F1 F1 Opens LibreOffice Draw help.
Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
F2 F2
Formatting toolbar.
F3 F3 Enters a group of objects for editing.
Shift+F3 Shift+F3 Opens the Duplicate dialog of a selected object.
Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exits a group of objects.
Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
F4 F4
object.
F5 F5 Opens the Navigator.
Forward navigation of the emphasis within the on
F6 F6
screen elements.
Backward navigation of the emphasis within the on
Shift+F6 Shift+F6
screen elements.
Starts the spelling checker. Only available in text
F7 F7
editing mode.
Switches on or off the automatic spell checking. Only
Shift+F7 Shift+F7
available in text editing mode.
Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language being
Ctrl+F7 ⌘+F7
used. Only available in text editing mode.
F8 F8 Opens the Edit Points toolbar.
Ctrl+Shift+
⌘+Shift+F8 Fits text to frame of a selected object.
F8
Shift+F10 Shift+F10 Opens the context menu of a selected object.
F11 ⌘+T Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Draw keyboard shortcuts

Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Plus (+) Fn+Shift++ Zooms in.
Minus (-) Fn+–– Zooms out.
Times (*) on
Times (×) on
numeric Fits the drawing to fill the Workspace view.
number pad
keyboard

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 341

 Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Divide (/) on
Divide (÷) on
numeric Zooms in on the selected object.
number pad
keyboard
Ctrl+Shift
⌘+Shift+G Groups selected objects.
+G
Shift+Ctrl+Al
⌘+Shift+⌥+G Ungroups selected group.
t+G
Enters a group to edit individual objects in the group.
Ctrl+click ⌘+click
Click outside the group to return to normal view.
Ctrl+Shift
⌘+Shift+K Combines selected objects.
+K
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+ Splits a selected object that has been combined from
Alt+K ⌥+K a group of two or more objects.
Ctrl++ ⌘++ Brings current selection forward.
Ctrl
⌘+Shift++ Brings current selection to the front.
+Shift++
Ctrl+- ⌘+- Sends current selection backward.
Ctrl+
⌘+Shift+- Sends current selection to the back.
Shift+-
⌥+Fn+Up Switches to previous page. No function on the first
Page Up
Arrow page.
⌥+Fn+Down
Page Down Switches to next page. No function on the last page.
Arrow
⌘+Fn+Up
Ctrl+Page Up Switches to previous layer.
Arrow
Ctrl+Page ⌘+Fn+Down
Switches to next layer.
Down Arrow
Arrow Arrow Moves a selected object in the direction of the arrow.
Ctrl+Arrow Ctrl+Arrow Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow.
With Pages pane selected, switches to the previous
Left Arrow Left Arrow
page in a drawing. No function on the first page.
With Pages pane selected, switches to the next page
Right Arrow Right Arrow
in a drawing. No function on the last page.
When selecting objects, adds or removes object to or
Shift Shift
from a selection of objects.
Hold down Shift then click and drag a selection
Shift Shift handle when resizing an object to maintain the
proportions of the object.
Hold down the Shift key while moving a selected
Shift Shift object to constrain the movement in multiples of 45
degrees.

342 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Hold down the Shift key before selecting several
Shift Shift adjacent objects or characters. Click at the start of a
selection, move to the end of the selection.
Hold down the Ctrl (⌘) key, then click and drag a
Ctrl ⌘
selected object to create a copy of the object.
Hold down the Alt (⌥) key and draw or resize an
Alt ⌥
object from the centre of the object.
Hold down the Alt (⌥) key when selecting an
Alt ⌥
object that is behind the currently selected object.
Hold down the Alt (⌥)+Shift keys when selecting
Alt+ Shift ⌥+Shift an object that is in front of the currently selected
object.
Selects objects in the order in which they were
Tab Tab
created.
Selects objects in the reverse order in which they
Shift+Tab Shift+Tab
were created.
Esc Esc Exits current mode.
Enters text mode if a text object in the drawing is
Enter Enter
selected.
Inserts a new page after the selected page in a
Ctrl+Enter ⌘+Enter
drawing.
Home Fn+Left Arrow Selects the first page in a drawing.
Fn+Right
End Selects the last page in a drawing.
Arrow

Editing text keyboard shortcuts

Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Inserts a custom hyphen (soft hyphen) in text at the
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
cursor position.
Ctrl+Shift Inserts a non-breaking hyphen (hard hyphen) in text
⌘+Shift+-
+- at the cursor position.
Inserts a non-breaking space, which is not used for
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+
hyphenation and is not expanded if the text is
Space Space
justified.
Shift+Enter Shift+Enter Inserts a line break without paragraph change.
Left arrow Left arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Shift+Left Shift+Left Moves the cursor one character to the left and
arrow arrow selects the character.
Ctrl+Left Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous
⌥+Left arrow
arrow word.
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌥+Shift+ Moves the cursor to the left and selects the word on
Left arrow Left arrow the left.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 343

 Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Right arrow Right arrow Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Shift+Right Shift+Right Moves the cursor one character to the right and
arrow arrow selects the character.
Ctrl+Right ⌥+Right
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.
arrow arrow
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌥+Shift+ Moves the cursor to the right and selects the word on
Right arrow Right arrow the right.
Up arrow Up arrow Moves the cursor up one line.
Shift+Up Shift+Up Moves the cursor up one line in the text and selects
arrow arrow the lines of text.
Ctrl+Up arrow ⌥+Up arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Ctrl+Shift+Up ⌥+Shift+Up
Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor
arrow arrow
position to the beginning of the paragraph.
Down arrow Down arrow Moves the cursor down one line.
Shift+Down Moves the cursor down one line in the text and
⌥+Down arrow
arrow selects the lines of text.
Ctrl+Down
⌘+Down arrow Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.
arrow
Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌥+Shift+
Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor
Down arrow Down arrow
position to the end of the paragraph.
Ctrl+ Deletes the text from the cursor position to the
⌘+Backspace
Backspace beginning of the word.
Ctrl+Shift+ ⌘+Shift+ Deletes the text from the cursor position to the
Backspace Backspace beginning of the sentence.

Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts

Function key and keyboard shortcuts listed in the following tables are available for each menu
item on the Menu bar. The tables give menu item or sub-item, operating system validity, and
effect or purpose of the shortcut.

Note
The menus listed below are in the same order as displayed on the Menu bar from left
to right.

LibreOffice
The LibreOffice menu is only available for computers using macOS.
Menu item or
macOS Effect
sub-item
Preferences ⌘+, Opens the Options dialog.
Hide LibreOffice ⌘+H Temporarily hides LibreOffice, but does not close LibreOffice.

344 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Menu item or
macOS Effect
sub-item
Closes LibreOffice. Make sure all LibreOffice files are saved
Exit LibreOffice ⌘+Q
before using.

File menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
New Ctrl+N ⌘+N Opens a new drawing.
Shift+ Opens the Drawings category in the
Templates ⌘+Shift+N
Ctrl+N Templates dialog.
Opens a file browser allowing
Open Ctrl+O ⌘+O
navigation to a folder and file selection.
Manage Shift+ Opens the Drawings category in the
⌘+Shift+N
Templates Ctrl+N Templates dialog.
Save Ctrl+S ⌘+S Saves the open drawing.
Opens a file browser allowing
Ctrl+
Save As ⌘+Shift+S navigation to a folder and save the
Shift+S
open drawing as a new file.
Opens the Print dialog allowing
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
selection of how the drawing is printed.
Closes LibreOffice. Make sure all files
Exit LibreOffice Ctrl+Q ⌘+Q
are saved before using.

Edit Menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘+Z Undoes the previous editing action.
Reverses the action of the last Undo
Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘+Y
command.
Deletes the selected object and places
Cut Ctrl+X ⌘+X
it on the clipboard.
Copies the selected object to the
Copy Ctrl+C ⌘+C
clipboard.
Inserts the contents of the clipboard at
Paste Ctrl+V ⌘+V the location of the cursor replacing any
selected text or objects.
Pastes the contents of the clipboard at
Paste Special
Ctrl+ the cursor position in a format that is
> Paste ⌘+Shift+V
Shift+V specified using the Paste Special
Special
dialog.
When an object is selected, opens the
Duplicate Shift+F3 Shift+F3 Duplicate dialog providing options for
duplicating a selected object.
Selects all the pages and objects in a
Select All Ctrl+A ⌘+A
drawing.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 345

 Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Find Ctrl+F ⌘+F Opens the Find toolbar.
Replace Ctrl+H ⌘+⌥+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog.
Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is
an object on the drawing that uses
Points F8 F8
editable points, for example a freeform
line.
Ctrl+ Allows a read only drawing to be edited
Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M
Shift+M if the user has writer permission.

View menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Ctrl+ Switches the rulers off and on in the
Rulers ⌘+Shift+R
Shift+R Workspace.
Sidebar Ctrl+F5 ⌘+F5 Opens or closes the Sidebar.
Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Styles F11 ⌘+T
Sidebar.
Navigator F5 F5 Opens the Navigator dialog.

Insert menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Switches to text edit mode and opens
Text Box F2 F2
the Text Formatting toolbar.
Inserts a new comment box onto the
Comment Ctrl+Alt+C ⌘+⌥+C
selected page.
Hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘+K Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
Insert non- Ctrl+Shift+S ⌘+Shift+ Inserts a non-breaking space at the
breaking space pace Space cursor position.
Insert Narrow
Alt+Shift+ ⌥+Shift+ Inserts a narrow non-breaking space at
No-break
Space Space the cursor position.
Space
No-width Inserts a narrow no-width optional
Ctrl+/ ⌘+/
Optional Break break at the cursor position.

Format menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Bold Ctrl+B ⌘+B Applies Bold format to selected text.
Italic Ctrl+I ⌘+I Applies Italic format to selected text.

346 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Reduces the font size of the selected
Superscript Ctrl+Shift+P ⌘+Shift+P text and raises the text above the
baseline.

Ctrl+ Reduces the font size of the selected

Subscript ⌘+Shift+B text and lowers the text below the
Shift+B
baseline.
Increases the point size of selected
Increase Size Ctrl+] ⌘+]
text.
Decreases the point size of selected
Decrease Size Ctrl+[ ⌘+[
text.
Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to
Line Spacing 1 Ctrl+1 ⌘+1
a single line.
Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to
Line Spacing 5 Ctrl+5 ⌘+5
one and half lines.
Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to
Line Spacing 2 Ctrl+2 ⌘+2
two lines.
Sets the paragraph alignment to left
Left Ctrl+L ⌘+L
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to center
Center Ctrl+E ⌘+E
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to right
Right Ctrl+R ⌘+R
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to
Justified Ctrl+J ⌘+J
justified.
Clear Direct Removes direct formatting that has
Ctrl+M ⌘+M
Formatting been applied without using styles.
Opens the Graphic Styles dialog to edit
Edit Style Alt+P ⌥+P
a selected style.
Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Manage Styles F11 ⌘+T
Sidebar.
Position and Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
F4 F4
Size selected object.

Shape menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of
Bring to Front ⌘+Shift++
Shift++ other objects.
Moves a selected object in front of the
Bring Forward Ctrl++ ⌘++
forward object.
Send Moves a selected object behind the
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
Backward backward object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of
Send to Back ⌘+Shift+-
Shift+- other objects.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 347

 Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Ctrl+
Group ⌘+Shift+G Groups selected objects.
Shift+G
Ctrl+Alt+ ⌘+⌥+Shift
Ungroup Ungroups selected group.
Shift+G +G
Enter Group F3 F3 Enters a group of objects for editing.
Exit Group Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exits a group of objects.
Ctrl+ Combines two or more selected objects
Combine ⌘+Shift+K
Shift+K into a single shape.
Ctrl+Shift+A ⌘+⌥+Shift Splits a combined object into individual
Split
lt+K +K objects.
When an object is selected, opens the
Duplicate Shift+F3 Shift+F3 Duplicate dialog providing options for
duplicating a selected object.

Tools menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Starts spelling checker. Only available
Spelling F7
in text editing mode.
Switches on or off the automatic spell
Automatic
Shift+F7 Shift+F7 checking. Only available in text editing
Spell Checking
mode.
Opens the thesaurus dialog for the
Thesaurus Ctrl+F7 ⌘+F7 language being used. Only available in
text editing mode.
Extension
Ctrl+Alt+E ⌘+⌥+E Opens the Extension Manager dialog.
Manager
Options Alt+F12 Opens the Options LibreOffice dialog.

Windows menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
Closes Closes the active window. If there is
Ctrl+W ⌘+W
Window only one window, closes LibreOffice.

Help menu
Menu item or Windows
macOS Effect
sub-item Linux
LibreOffice Opens a browser application at the
F1 F1
Help LibreOffice Help pages.
Search Opens a dialog to search for a
Shift+Esc
Commands command.

348 |Draw Guide 24.8

General function key and keyboard shortcuts
Opening menus and menu items
Windows
macOS Effect
Linux
Esc Esc Closes an open menu.
Repeatedly pressing F6 cycles the focus through the
following objects:
F6 F6 Menu bar (Windows and Linux operating systems only).
Each toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right.
Each free window from left to right.
Repeatedly pressing Shift+F6 cycles the focus in the
Shift+F6 Shift+F6
opposite direction.
Ctrl+F6 ⌘+F6 Cycles the focus back to the drawing.
F10 Switches the access on or off for the Menu bar.

Accessing Menu bar commands

• Press F6 selects the first item (File) on the Menu bar.
• Press the right arrow selects the next menu to the right.
• Press the left arrow selects the previous menu to the left.
• Press the Home and End keys selects the first or last item on the Menu bar.
• Press the down arrow to open a selected menu. An additional press on the down arrow
or up arrow moves the selection through the menu commands.
• Press the right arrow to open any submenus on the selected menu. Submenus are
indicated by a triangle ► or chevron ˃ next to the menu item.
• Press Enter to execute the selected menu command.

Accessing toolbar commands

• Press F6 repeatedly until the first tool on a toolbar is selected.
• Using the right and left arrows selects a tool on a horizontal toolbar, or the up and down
arrows selects a tool on a vertical toolbar.
• Pressing the Home key selects the first tool on a toolbar, or the End key selects the last
tool on a toolbar.
• Pressing Enter activates the selected tool.
• Pressing the right arrow opens any sub-toolbar on a selected toolbar. Sub-toolbars are
indicated by a triangle ▼ next to the tool.
• Pressing Ctrl+Enter inserts a selected draw object. The draw object is placed in the
center of the drawing, with a predefined size.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 349

Controlling dialogs
When any dialog is open, one element (for example a button or option field) indicates focus by
highlighting, a check mark, or a dotted box around the field or button name.
Windows
Effect
Linux
Activates the selected option. Where no option is selected,
Enter
Enter is the equivalent to clicking on OK.
Closes a dialog without saving any changes made while it
Esc
was open, the equivalent to selecting Cancel.
Moves focus up and down a list.
Up/Down arrow keys Increases or decreases the value of a variable.
Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog.
Left/Right arrow keys Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog.
Tab Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog.
Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a
Shift+Tab
dialog.
Alt+Down Arrow Shows the options available in a drop-down list.
Checks or selects an empty checkbox.
Spacebar
Clears or deselects a checked checkbox.

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts

The Draw toolbars are listed in the same order displayed in the context menu that opens when
View > Toolbars is selected on the Menu bar.
Draw provides several toolbars for the creation and editing of drawings. Some tools on the Draw
toolbars can be activated using a function key, or keyboard shortcut.

Drawing
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Switches to text edit mode and opens
Insert Text Box F2 F2
the Text Formatting toolbar.
Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is
an object on the drawing that uses
Edit Points F8 F8
editable points, for example a freeform
line.

Find
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Find and Finds and replaces all instances of text
Ctrl+H ⌘+⌥+H
Replace in a drawing.

350 |Draw Guide 24.8

Form Design
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of
Bring to Front ⌘+Shift++
Shift++ other objects.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of
Send to Back ⌘+Shift+-
Shift+- other objects.
Ctrl+
Group ⌘+Shift+G Groups selected objects.
Shift+G
Ctrl+Alt+ ⌘+⌥+Shift+
Ungroup Ungroups selected group.
Shift+G G
Enter Group F3 F3 Enters a group of objects for editing.
Exit Group Ctrl+F3 ⌘+F3 Exits a group of objects.

Image
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Position and Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
F4 F4
Size selected object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of
Bring to Front ⌘+Shift++
Shift++ other objects.
Moves a selected object in front of the
Bring Forward Ctrl++ ⌘++
forward object.
Send Moves a selected object behind the
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
Backward backward object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of
Send to Back ⌘+Shift+-
Shift+- other objects.

Line and Filling

Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Position and Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
F4 F4
Size selected object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the front of
Bring to Front ⌘+Shift++
Shift++ other objects.
Moves a selected object in front of the
Bring Forward Ctrl++ ⌘++
forward object.
Send Moves a selected object behind the
Ctrl+- ⌘+-
Backward backward object.
Ctrl+ Moves a selected object to the back of
Send to Back ⌘+Shift+-
Shift+- other objects.
Styles F11 ⌘+T Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 351

Standard
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
New Ctrl+N ⌘+N Opens a new drawing.
Ctrl+ Opens the Templates dialog to create a
Templates ⌘+Shift+N
Shift+N new drawing using a template.
Opens the Open file browser to allow
Open Ctrl+O ⌘+O navigation to a folder and selection of a
drawing.
Save Ctrl+S ⌘+S Saves the open document.
Ctrl+ Opens the Save as file browser to save
Save As ⌘+Shift+S
Shift+S the open drawing as a new drawing.
Ctrl+ Switches on edit mode when a drawing
Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M
Shift+M is in read only mode.
Opens the Print dialog to select how to
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P
print the drawing.
Deletes the selected object and places
Cut Ctrl+X ⌘+X
it on the clipboard.
Copies the selected object to the
Copy Ctrl+C ⌘+C
clipboard.
Places the object on the clipboard into
Paste Ctrl+V ⌘+V
the document.
Removes direct formatting that has
Clear Ctrl+M ⌃+M
been applied without using styles.
Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘+Z Undoes the previous editing action.
Reverses the action of the last Undo
Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘+Y
command.
Starts the spelling checker. Only
Spelling F7 F7
available in text editing mode.
Switches on or off the automatic spell
Auto
Shift+F7 Shift+F7 checking. Only available in text editing
Spellcheck
mode.
Switches to text edit mode and opens
Text Box F2
the Text Formatting toolbar.
Insert
Ctrl+K Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
Hyperlink
Position and Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
F4
Size selected object.
Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is
an object on the drawing that uses
Edit Points F8
editable points, for example a freeform
line.

352 |Draw Guide 24.8

Standard (Viewing Mode)
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Opens the Save as file browser so you
Ctrl+
Save As ⌘+Shift+S can save the open document as a new
Shift+S
document.
Ctrl+ Switches on edit mode when a
Edit Mode ⌘+Shift+M
Shift+M document is in read only mode.
Opens the Print dialog so that you can
Print Ctrl+P ⌘+P select how you want to print the
document.
Copies the selected object to the
Copy Ctrl+C ⌘+C
clipboard.
Find and
Ctrl+H ⌘+⌥+F Opens the Find and Replace dialog.
Replace

Text Formatting
Windows
Tool name macOS Effect
Linux
Increases the point size of selected
Increase Ctrl+] ⌘+]
text.
Decreases the point size of selected
Decrease Ctrl+[ ⌘+[
text.
Bold Ctrl+B ⌘+B Applies Bold format to selected text.
Italic Ctrl+I ⌘+I Applies Italic format to selected text.
Reduces the font size of the selected
Ctrl+
Superscript ⌘+Shift+P text and raises the text above the
Shift+P
baseline.
Reduces the font size of the selected
Ctrl+
Subscript ⌘+Shift+B text and lowers the text below the
Shift+B
baseline.
Removes direct formatting that has
Clear Ctrl+M ⌃+M
been applied without using styles.
Sets the paragraph alignment to left
Left Ctrl+L ⌘+L
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to center
Center Ctrl+E ⌘+E
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to right
Right Ctrl+R ⌘+R
aligned.
Sets the paragraph alignment to
Justified Ctrl+J ⌘+J
justified.
Select All Ctrl+A ⌘+A Selects all the text in a text box.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 353

 Draw Guide 24.8

Appendix B,
Toolbars
Introduction
Draw provides several toolbars for creating drawings. Each toolbar has a default set of tools
when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. To improve the usability of a toolbar, additional tools
can be added, see “Editing toolbars” on page 359 for more information.

Notes
The icons displayed on the Draw toolbars illustrated in this appendix may differ from
what is displayed on a computer screen. Toolbar icons depend on the computer
operating system being used and how LibreOffice has been set up. For more
information on customizing LibreOffice and toolbars, see the Getting Started Guide.
Some toolbars when selected do not display until an object of the correct type is
selected in a presentation. For example, the Image toolbar only displays when an
image, or graphic, using an image file format is selected.
When selecting some tools on a toolbar, a subtoolbar may be available providing
more tools for editing an object. For example, clicking on Color in the Image toolbar
opens the Color subtoolbar to adjust the color settings of an image.

Using toolbars
Displaying toolbars
Two methods of opening toolbars in Draw are used, as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar. A sub-menu opens with an alphabetical list of
toolbars available for creating drawings in Draw.
2) Click on a toolbar name to display it and make it active. Active toolbars are indicated by
highlighting or a check mark next to the toolbar name, depending on computer setup.

Closing toolbars
To close a toolbar, use one of the following methods:
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and deselect the toolbar.
• Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
• Click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating toolbar.

Moving toolbars
Docked toolbars
By default, some toolbars are docked into position in the Draw main window. By default in the
main window, the Standard toolbar is docked horizontally at the top and the Drawing toolbar is
docked vertically at the left side. Docked toolbars can be undocked and moved into a new
docked position on the main window, or left as a floating toolbar.
1) Move the cursor over the small vertical handle at the left end of the toolbar, or horizontal
handle at the top of a toolbar (highlighted in Figure 328). The cursor changes shape to
the moving cursor used for the computer system and setup.
2) Alternatively, right click on a docked toolbar and select Undock Toolbar from the context
menu.

356 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 328: Example of toolbar moving handles

Figure 329: Example of creating floating subtoolbars

3) Click and drag the toolbar to a new docked position, or leave as a floating toolbar. A
hashed border appears around the toolbar indicating toolbar position as it is dragged.
4) Release the toolbar when it is in the required position.

Note
If these toolbar moving handles are not not visible at the left end or top of a docked
toolbar, then the toolbar is locked into position. A docked toolbar must be unlocked
before it can be moved to a new position in the main window. See “Locking toolbars”
on page 358 for more information.

Floating toolbars
To move a floating toolbar, click on the title bar and drag it to a new floating location. Release the
toolbar when it is in the required position. A floating toolbar does not have to be positioned on
the Draw main window for it to function.

Floating subtoolbars
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool indicating that more tools are
available on a subtoolbar, for example Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar. Subtoolbars can
be turned into floating toolbars and moved into a new position as follows:
1) Move the cursor over the horizontal handle at the top of the subtoolbar (highlighted in
Figure 329). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system and
setup.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 357

 2) Click and drag the subtoolbar to a new location creating a floating subtoolbar.
3) Release the subtoolbar when the required position is reached.
4) To close the floating subtoolbar, right-click on the triangle ▼ in the subtoolbar title bar
and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
5) Alternatively, click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating subtoolbar

Docking floating toolbars

To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:
• Click on the title bar and drag it to a docking position at the top, bottom, left side, or right
side of the main window. When the toolbar reaches its docking position, a hashed border
appears at the docking position. Release the toolbar to dock it in the required position.
• Right-click on the toolbar and select Dock Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar
moves into a docked position. If the position is not suitable, move the toolbar to a new
docked position.
• To dock all floating toolbars that are active, right-click on a toolbar and select Dock All
Toolbars from the context menu.

Locking toolbars
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar has been docked into position, the toolbar can also be locked into position
preventing the toolbar from becoming a floating toolbar.
• To lock a toolbar into a docked position, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and
select Lock Toolbar Position in the context menu. The small vertical or horizontal bar at
the left end or top of the toolbar disappears indicating that the toolbar is locked.
• To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and click on Lock Toolbar
Position in the context menu. A small vertical or horizontal bar appears at the left end or
top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. This bar is also is used to move
the toolbar.

Notes
The Lock Toolbar Position is used for locking and unlocking toolbars is an on/off
switch.
Some toolbars cannot be docked or locked into position. This is indicated by the
options Dock Toolbar and/or Lock Toolbar Position being grayed out making both
options unavailable.
Using the Lock Toolbars option affects all toolbars and subtoolbars available in all
LibreOffice modules.

Locking toolbars and subtoolbars

To prevent all toolbars and subtoolbars from becoming floating toolbars or subtoolbars, they can
be locked. Locked toolbars and subtoolbars can be unlocked using the same method below. The
Lock Toolbars option is used as a lock/unlock switch.
1) Save the drawing that is open in Draw.
2) Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars from the context
menu.

358 |Draw Guide 24.8

 3) Select Restart Now in the Restart LibreOffice dialog that opens to activate the Lock
Toolbars option.
4) To unlock all toolbars and subtoolbars so they can be repositioned, repeat Steps 1 thru 3.
The Lock Toolbars option is an on/off switch.

Editing toolbars
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, it includes a set of toolbars suitable for each
LibreOffice module. Each toolbar has a default set of visible tools. Tools can be added or
deleted, and toolbars can be customized.

Adding tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the
toolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool required and the tool appears in the toolbar. The list of available tools
closes automatically. A check mark next to the tool, or highlighting around the tool,
indicates that the tool listed in Visible Buttons is already installed on the toolbar.

Note
When adding tools using Visible Buttons, the tool is added to the toolbar at the
same position as the tool appears in the Visible Buttons list. That is, the first tool in
the list appears at the left end of the toolbar and the last tool in the list appears at the
right end of the toolbar.

Removing tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the
toolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on a tool no longer required to deselect and it is removed from the toolbar. The
highlighting or check mark is also removed. The list of available tools closes
automatically.

Customizing toolbars
Extra tools and commands that are not available in Visible Buttons can be added to a toolbar
using customization (View > Toolbars > Customize on the Menu bar). Customization also
allows the creation of new toolbars if a specific set of tools are required for a specific task. For
information on customizing toolbars, see the Getting Started Guide.

Toolbars
• To open the default list of toolbars already installed in Draw, go to View > Toolbars on
the Menu bar. An example of the default list of toolbars in Draw is shown in Figure 330.
• The number of tools visible on a toolbar depends on the computer setup and operating
system being used to create a drawing.
• The tools displayed on toolbars displayed in this appendix are examples only. Actual
tools displayed in a toolbar depend on computer setup, operating system and user
preferences.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 359

 Figure 330: Example of default list of toolbars in Draw
• The tools already installed on a toolbar are indicated in Visible Buttons either by the
tool icon being highlighted or by a check mark. This indication depends on computer
setup and computer operating system being used.
• On some toolbars, tool icons may have a triangle ▼ to the right of the icon. Click on this
triangle ▼ to open a list of options, another toolbar, or a subtoolbar.
• Some tools also have a keyboard shortcut to make the tool available for ues. For a full
list of keyboard shortcuts available in Draw, see Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts.
• Each toolbar and subtoolbar displayed in this appendix shows the full list of available
tools for that toolbar or subtoolbar.

3D-Objects
The 3D-Objects toolbar (Figure 331) provides the tools for creating 3D objects in a drawing. Go
to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar. Alternatively, clicking on the triangle ▼ next
to 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar opens a subtoolbar providing access to 3D tools.

Figure 331: 3D-Objects toolbar

360 |Draw Guide 24.8

(1) Cube (4) Cone (7) Shell
(2) Sphere (5) Pyramid (8) Half Sphere
(3) Cylinder (6) Torus

3D-Settings
The tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 332) are only active when an object has been
converted to 3D using Toggle Extrusion and the converted object is selected.

Figure 332: 3D-Settings toolbar

(1) Toggle Extrusion (5) Tilt Right (9) Surface
(2) Tilt Down (6) Depth (10) 3D Color
(3) Tilt Up (7) Direction
(4) Tilt Left (8) Lighting
For the following tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the icon
for access to various options as follows:
Depth
3D extrusion depth — 0cm; 1cm; 2.5cm; 5cm; 10cm; Infinity; Custom. The measurement
unit depends on the ruler settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General).
Direction
3D extrusion direction and type — Parallel; Perspective.
Lighting
Lighting direction and lighting level of 3D extrusion — Bright; Normal; Dim.
Surface
Surface type of 3D extrusion — Wire Frame; Matt; Plastic; Metal.
3D Color
Color of 3D extrusion. Select a color from one of the available color palettes.

Align Objects
The Align Objects toolbar (Figure 333) provides tools for aligning several objects with each other
in a drawing.

Figure 333: Align Objects toolbar

The tools available on the Align Objects toolbar, from left to right, are as follows:
Left
Aligns the left edges of selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw, the left
edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 361

 Centered
Horizontally centers selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw, the center of
the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
Right
Aligns the right edges of selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw, the right
edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
Top
Vertically aligns top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw,
the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
Center
Vertically centers selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw, the center of
the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
Bottom
Vertically aligns the bottom edges of selected objects. If only one object is selected in
Draw, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.

Comments
The Comments toolbar (Figure 334) provides tools for adding, deleting, editing and navigation of
comments in a drawing. To use comments, it is recommended to add the name and initials of all
users in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >
LibreOffice > User Data). Adding user names identifies comments that have been inserted.

Figure 334: Comments toolbar

(1) Comment (3) Next Comment (5) Delete All Comments
(2) Previous Comment (4) Delete Comment

Distribute Selection
The Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 335) provides tools to distribute three or more selected
objects along a horizontal axis or vertical axis. Also, the spacing between objects can be evenly
distributed horizontally and vertically.

Figure 335: Distribute Selection toolbar

Distribute Horizontally Left
Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Distribute Horizontally Center
Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.

362 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Distribute Horizontally Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from
one another.
Distribute Horizontally Right
Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Distribute Vertically Top
Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Distribute Vertically Center
Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Distribute Vertically Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one
another.
Distribute Vertically Bottom
Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.

Drawing
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 336) provides the tools used to create graphic objects in a
drawings. By default, this toolbar is docked on the left side of the Workspace. Some tool shapes
on the Drawing toolbar change depending on the last tool that was previously selected and
used.
If required, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool icon to open a pop-up toolbar, then select
the required shape to add to a drawing. Click on the handle at the top of a pop-up toolbar and
drag to an empty area on the main window. For more information, see “Floating subtoolbars” on
page 357 and Figure 329 on page 357.

Figure 336: Drawing toolbar

(1) Select (15) Connectors (28) Select at least three objects
(2) Zoom & Pan (16) Basic Shapes to distribute
(3) Zoom (17) Symbol Shapes (29) Shadow
(4) Text Box (18) Block Arrows (30) Crop Image
(5) Vertical Text (19) Flowchart (31) Filter
(6) Insert Fontwork (20) Callouts (32) Points F8
(7) Line Color (21) Stars and Banners (33) Show Gluepoint Function
(8) Fill Color (22) 3D Objects (34) To Curve
(9) Line (23) Position and Size (35) To Polygon
(10) Rectangle (24) Rotate (36) To 3D
(11) Ellipse (25) Flip (37) T0 3D Rotation Object
(12) Line Ends with Arrow (26) Align Objects (38) Toggle Extrusion
(13) Lines and Arrows (27) Arrange (39) Insert
(14) Curves and Polygons (40) Controls

Appendix B, Toolbars | 363

Edit Points
The Edit Points toolbar (Figure 337) provides tools for editing the points of a curve or polygon, or
an object that has been converted to a curve or polygon. The toolbar only becomes active when
an object is selected. Click on Edit Points on the Drawing or Standard toolbar, or use the
keyboard shortcut F8 to open the toolbar.

Figure 337: Edit Points toolbar

(1) Edit Points (5) Convert to Curve (9) Smooth Transition
(2) Move Points (6) Close Bezier (10) Symmetric Transition
(3) Insert Points (7) Split Curve (11) Eliminate Points
(4) Delete Points (8) Corner Point

Find
The Find toolbar (Figure 338) opens by default and is docked in the bottom left corner of the
LibreOffice Draw main window above the Status bar. This toolbar can be undocked from its
default position and made into a floating toolbar.

Figure 338: Find toolbar

(1) Close Find Bar (4) Find Next (7) Find and Replace
(2) Find Text (5) Find All
(3) Find Previous (6) Match Case

Fontwork
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 339) is used to create graphical text objects in a slide and provide
the tools for editing a graphical text object. This toolbar only becomes active when a Fontwork
graphical text object has been selected on a drawing.

Figure 339: Fontwork toolbar

(1) Insert Fontwork Text (3) Fontwork Same Letter (5) Fontwork Character Spacing
(2) Fontwork Shape Heights (6) Toggle Extrusion
(4) Fontwork Alignment
Some tools on the Fontwork toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool. Click on this
triangle to open a subtoolbar, or drop-down option list.
Fontwork Shape
Select the required shape for a Fontwork graphical text object from the options available.
Fontwork Alignment
Select the paragraph alignment from the options available.

364 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Fontwork Character Spacing
Select the required character spacing from the options available.

Form Controls
The Form Controls toolbar (Figure 340) provides the tools required to create an interactive form.
This allows controls to be added to a form in a drawing. For example, a button that opens a
document, drawing, spreadsheet, or slide.

Figure 340: Form Controls toolbar

(1) Select (10) Option Button (20) Currency Field
(2) Design Mode (11) List Box (21) Pattern Field
(3) Toggle Form Control (12) Combo Box (22) Table Control
Wizards (13) Push Button (23) Navigation Bar
(4) Form Design (14) Image Button (24) Image Control
(5) Control Properties (15) Formatted Field (25) File Selection
(6) Form Properties (16) Date Field (26) Spin Button
(7) Label (17) Numerical Field (27) Scrollbar
(8) Text Box (18) Group Box
(9) Check Box (19) Time Field

Form Design
The Form Design toolbar (Figure 341) opens a form in Design Mode so that it can be edited.
Controls of the form cannot be activated, or its contents edited when in Design Mode. However,
the position and size of the controls can be changed, properties edited, and controls added or
deleted in Design Mode.

Figure 341: Form Design toolbar

(1) Select (8) Automatic Control Focus (15) Align Objects
(2) Control Properties (9) Bring to Front (16) Open in Design Mode
(3) Form Properties (10) Send to Back (17) Display Grid
(4) Position and Size (11) Group (18) Snap to Grid
(5) Form Navigator (12) Ungroup (19) Helplines While Moving
(6) Activation Order (13) Enter Group
(7) Add Field (14) Exit Group

Form Navigation
The Form Navigation toolbar (Figure 342) provides tools to edit a database table or control data
view. The toolbar is normally displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are
linked to a database. This toolbar is only active when forms are connected to a database, which
is why an inactivate toolbar is shown in Figure 342.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 365

The Form Navigation toolbar allows movement within records as well as inserting and deleting
records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. This toolbar also
provides tools providing sort, filter, and search functions for data records.

Figure 342: Form Navigation toolbar

(1) Find Record (9) Last Record (17) Sort Ascending
(2) Record (10) New Record (18) Sort Descending
(3) Absolute Record (11) Save Record (19) AutoFilter
(4) Text -> Record (12) Undo: Data entry (20) Apply Filter
(5) Total No. of Records (13) Delete Record (21) Form-Based Filters
(6) First Record (14) Refresh (22) Reset Filter/Sort
(7) Previous Record (15) Refresh Control (23) Data source as Table
(8) Next Record (16) Sort

Gluepoints
The Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 343) provides tools to insert a gluepoint or modify the properties
of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a point where a connector is attached to an object. By default,
LibreOffice automatically places a gluepoint at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle
for every object created.

Figure 343: Gluepoints toolbar

(1) Insert Glue Point (5) Exit Direction Bottom (9) Glue Point Horizontal Right
(2) Exit Direction Left (6) Glue Point Relative (10) Glue Point Vertical Top
(3) Exit Direction Top (7) Glue Point Horizontal Left (11) Glue Point Vertical Center
(4) Exit Direction Right (8) Glue Point Horizontal Center (12) Glue Point Vertical Bottom

Image
The Image toolbar (Figure 344) provides tools to edit, modify, align, reposition and resize
images. The toolbar only becomes active and available when an image is selected in a drawing.
The Image toolbar automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when it becomes active.

Figure 344: Image toolbar

366 |Draw Guide 24.8

(1) Position and Size (13) Send to Back (25) Crop
(2) Align Objects (14) In Front of Object (26) Vertically
(3) Left (15) Behind Object (27) Horizontally
(4) Centered (16) Reverse (28) Transformations
(5) Right (17) Line Style (29) Transparency
(6) Top (18) Line Width (30) Color
(7) Center (19) Line Color (31) Line
(8) Bottom (20) Area Style/Filling (32) Area
(9) Arrange (21) Fill Color (33) Animation
(10) Bring to Front (22) Shadow (34) Interaction
(11) Bring Forward (23) Filter
(12) Send Backward (24) Image Mode

Insert
The Insert toolbar (Figure 345) provides tools for inserting objects into a drawing such as table,
images, media, formulas, charts, and OLE objects.

Figure 345: Insert toolbar

(1) New Page (4) Table (7) Formula Object
(2) Floating Frame (5) Image (8) Chart
(3) Insert Page from File (6) Insert Audio or Video (9) OLE Object

Legacy Circles and Ovals

The Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 346) provides tools to insert different types of
circles and ovals into a drawing.

Figure 346: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

(1) Insert Ellipse (6) Circle Segment (11) Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
(2) Circle (7) Ellipse, Unfilled (12) Circle Segment, Unfilled
(3) Ellipse Pie (8) Circle, Unfilled (13) Arc
(4) Circle Pie (9) Ellipse Pie, Unfilled (14) Circle Arc
(5) Ellipse Segment (10) Circle Pie, Unfilled

Legacy Rectangles
The Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 347) provides tools to insert different types of rectangles
and squares into a slide.

Figure 347: Legacy Rectangles toolbar

Appendix B, Toolbars | 367

(1) Insert Rectangle (4) Rounded Square (7) Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled
(2) Square (5) Rectangle, Unfilled (8) Rounded Square, Unfilled
(3) Rectangle, Rounded (6) Square, Unfilled

Line and Filling

The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 348) provides tools and drop-down lists for editing lines,
arrows, and object borders. The tools available depends on the type of object selected for
editing.

Figure 348: Line and Filling toolbar

(1) Position and Size (13) Send to Back (25) Horizontally
(2) Align Objects (14) In Front of Object (26) Transformations
(3) Left (15) Behind Object (27) Line
(4) Centered (16) Reverse (28) Area
(5) Right (17) Line Style (29) 3D Effects
(6) Top (18) Line Width (30) Image Map
(7) Center (19) Line Color (31) Animation
(8) Bottom (20) Area Style/Filling (32) Interaction
(9) Arrange (21) Fill Color (33) Show the Styles Sidebar
(10) Bring to Front (22) Shadow (34) Display Grid
(11) Bring Forward (23) Arrow Style (35) Helplines While Moving
(12) Send Backward (24) Vertically

Master View
The Master View toolbar (Figure 349) provides tools for creating, renaming, deleting, and closing
the master view. This toolbar is only active when Draw is in master view mode.

Figure 349: Master View toolbar

(1) New Master (3) Delete Master
(2) Rename Master (4) Close Master View

Media Playback
The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 350) provides the tools required to insert, view, play, and
listen to audio and video files. The toolbar only becomes active when an audio or video file is
selected. LibreOffice Draw supports many different media formats depending on the computer
operating system being used.

368 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Figure 350: Media Playback toolbar
(1) Insert Audio or Video (4) Stop (7) Mute
(2) Play (5) Repeat (8) Volume
(3) Pause (6) Position (9) View

Options
The Options toolbar (Figure 351) provides tools for editing various settings for newly created
presentations, for example how objects snap to the grid when being moved or resized.

Figure 351: Options toolbar

(1) Rotation Mode after Clicking (5) Snap to Grid (10) Allow Quick Editing
Object (6) Snap to Snap Guides (11) Select Text Area Only
(2) Display Grid (7) Snap to Page Margins (12) Double-click to edit Text
(3) Display Snap Guides (8) Snap to Object Borders (13) Modify Object with Attributes
(4) Helplines While Moving (9) Snap to Object Points (14) Exit All Groups

Redaction
The Redaction toolbar (Figure 352) is used to block portions of a drawing when protecting
sensitive information. Redaction helps enterprises and organizations to comply with regulations
on confidentiality or privacy.
When a redacted drawing is exported, any redacted portions are removed from a drawing and
replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This prevents any attempt in restoring or copying the
original contents. A redacted drawing is often exported as PDF for publication or sharing.

Figure 352: Redaction toolbar

(1) Rectangle (3) Redacted Export (White) (5) PDF
(2) Freeform (4) Redacted Export (Black)

Standard
The Standard toolbar (Figure 353) is common to all LibreOffice components providing the most
common tools used for creating and editing documents using LibreOffice. The Standard toolbar
differs between LibreOffice components to allow for the toolsets required when creating different
types of documents.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 369

 Figure 353: Standard toolbar
(1) Load URL (16) Clone Formatting (31) Start from First Slide
(2) New (17) Clear (32) Start from Current Slide
(3) Templates (18) Undo (33) Table
(4) Open (19) Redo (34) Insert Image
(5) Open Remote (20) Find and Replace (35) Insert Audio or Video
(6) Save (21) Spelling (36) Insert Chart
(7) Save As (22) Auto Spellcheck (37) Text Box
(8) Email (23) Zoom & Pan (38) Insert Special Characters
(9) Edit Mode (24) Zoom (39) Vertical Text
(10) Export Directly as PDF (25) Display Grid (40) Insert Fontwork Text
(11) Print Directly (26) Helplines While Moving (41) Insert Hyperlink
(12) Print (27) Display Views (42) Show Draw Function
(13) Cut (28) Views Tab Bar (43) Interaction
(14) Copy (29) Format Slide (44) LibreOffice Help
(15) Paste (30) Master Slide (45) What’s That

Standard (Viewing Mode)

The Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar (Figure 354) provides tools for saving, editing, and
distributing a drawing.

Figure 354: Standard (ViewingMode) toolbar

(1) Save As (5) Export Directly as PDF (9) Copy
(2) Edit Mode (6) EPUB (10) Find and Replace
(3) Read Only Mode (7) Print Directly (11) Zoom
(4) Email (8) Print

Table
The Table toolbar (Figure 355) provides tools and options to edit and format a table inserted into
a drawing. This toolbar only becomes active when a table is selected.

Figure 355: Table toolbar

370 |Draw Guide 24.8

(1) Table (9) Optimize (17) Delete Row
(2) Border Style (10) Align Top (18) Delete Column
(3) Border Color (11) Center Vertically (19) Delete Table
(4) Borders (Shift to overwrite) (12) Align Bottom (20) Select Table
(5) Area Style/Filling (13) Insert Row Above (21) Select Column
(6) Fill Color (14) Insert Row Below (22) Select Row
(7) Merge Cells (15) Insert Column Before (23) Table Design
(8) Split Cells (16) Insert Column After (24) Table Properties

Text
The Text toolbar (Figure 356) provides tools to insert text boxes and callouts into a drawing.

Figure 356: Text toolbar

(1) Insert Text Box (3) Callouts (5) Fit Vertical Text to Frame
(2) Fit Text in Text Box Size (4) Insert Vertical Text (6) Vertical Callouts

Text Formatting
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 357) provides tools for formatting text and alignment
commands. This toolbar becomes active when text in a text box or graphic object has been
selected and it automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar.

Figure 357: Text Formatting toolbar

(1) Font Name (16) lowercase (31) Set Line Spacing
(2) Font Size (17) UPPERCASE (32) Character Spacing
(3) Increase Font Size (18) SMALL CAPITALS (33) Increase Paragraph Spacing
(4) Decrease Font Size (19) Font Color (34) Decrease Paragraph
(5) Bold (20) Character Highlighting Color Spacing
(6) Italic (21) Toggle Unordered List (35) Text direction from left to
(7) Underline (22) Toggle Ordered List right
(8) Double Underline (23) Outline Format (36) Text direction from top to
(9) Strikethrough (24) Align Left bottom
(10) Overline (25) Align Center (37) Left-To-Right
(11) Superscript (26) Align Right (38) Right-To-Left
(12) Subscript (27) Justified (39) Select All
(13) Toggle Shadow (28) Align Top (40) Character
(14) Apply outline attribute to font (29) Center Vertically (41) Paragraph
(15) Clear Direct Formatting (30) Align Bottom

Transformations
The Transformations toolbar (Figure 358) provides tools to modify the shape, orientation, or fill of
selected objects.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 371

 Figure 358: Transformations toolbar
(1) Rotate (4) Set in Circle (perspective) (7) Interactive transparency tool
(2) Flip (5) Set to circle (slant) (8) Interactive gradient tool
(3) In 3D Rotation Object (6) Distort

Zoom
The Zoom toolbar (Figure 359) provides tools to reduce or enlarge the screen display of the
current drawing.

Figure 359: Zoom toolbar

(1) Zoom In (5) Zoom Next (9) Object Zoom
(2) Zoom Out (6) Entire Page (10) Zoom & Pan
(3) 100% (7) Page Width (11) Shift
(4) Zoom Previous (8) Optimal View

Subtoolbars
3D-Objects
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar to open the 3D-Objects
subtoolbar (Figure 360), then select a 3D object to add to a drawing. The 3D-Objects subtoolbar
is identical to the 3D-Objects toolbar available at View > Toolbars on the Menu bar.

Figure 360: 3D-Objects subtoolbar

(1) Cube (4) Cone (7) Shell
(2) Sphere (5) Pyramid (8) Half Sphere
(3) Cylinder (6) Torus

Align Objects
To make a drawing look more professional, objects can be aligned with each other using one of
the following methods to align objects. Select one or more objects before opening the Align
Objects subtoolbar (Figure 361).

Figure 361: Align Objects subtoolbar

372 |Draw Guide 24.8

The Align Objects subtoolbar is also available as a toolbar. Go to View > Toolbars > Align
Objects on the Main menu bar. The alignment tools available are as follows:
Left
Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the left edge
of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
Centered
Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of the
object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
Right
Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right
edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
Top
Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the
top edge of the object is aligned to the top page margin.
Center
Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of the
object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
Bottom
Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected,
the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the bottom page margin.

Basic Shapes
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the Basic
Shapes subtoolbar (Figure 362), then select a basic shape to add to a drawing.

Figure 362: Basic Shapes subtoolbar

(1) Rectangle (9) Circle Pie (17) Hexagon
(2) Rectangle, Rounded (10) Circle Segment (18) Octagon
(3) Square (11) Arc (19) Cylinder
(4) Square, Rounded (12) Block Arc (20) Cube
(5) Parallelogram (13) Isosceles Triangle (21) Folded Corner
(6) Trapezoid (14) Right Triangle (22) Cross
(7) Ellipse (15) Diamond (23) Frame
(8) Circle (16) Regular Pentagon (24) Ring

Block Arrows
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the Block
Arrows subtoolbar (Figure 363), then select a block arrow to add to a drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 373

 Figure 363: Block Arrows subtoolbar
(1) Right Arrow (10) Right or Left Arrow (19) Right Arrow Callout
(2) Left Arrow (11) 4-way Arrow (20) Left Arrow Callout
(3) Down Arrow (12) Corner Right Arrow (21) Down Arrow Callout
(4) Up Arrow (13) Chevron (22) Up Arrow Callout
(5) Left and Right Arrow (14) Pentagon (23) Left and Right Arrow Callout
(6) Up and Down Arrow (15) Striped Right Arrow (24) Up and Down Arrow Callout
(7) Circular Arrow (16) Up, right and Down Arrow (25) 4-way Arrow Callout
(8) S-shaped Arrow (17) Notched Right Arrow (26) Up and Right Arrow Callout
(9) Split Arrow (18) Up and Right Arrow

Callouts
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callouts on the Drawing toolbar to open the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 364), then select a callout to add to a drawing.

Figure 364: Callouts subtoolbar

(1) Rectangular Callout (3) Round Callout (6) Line Callout 2
(2) Rounded Rectangular (4) Cloud (7) Line Callout 3
Callout (5) Line Callout 1

Color
The Color subtoolbar (Figure 365) provides tools to edit the color properties of a selected object.
After selecting an image or graphic to open the Image toolbar, click on Color on the Image
toolbar.

Figure 365: Color subtoolbar

The tools available on the Color subtoolbar are as follows:
Red
Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible.

374 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Green
Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible.
Blue
Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values
from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible.
Brightness
Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black)
to +100% (only white) are possible.
Contrast
Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no
contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible.
Gamma
Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the
brightness of the mid-tone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum
Gamma) are possible.

Connectors
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Connectors sub-toolbar (Figure 366), then select a connector to add to a drawing.

Figure 366: Connectors subtoolbar

(1) Connector Ends with Arrow (10) Straight Connector starts (18) Straight Connector starts
(2) Straight Connector Ends with Arrow with Circle
with Arrow (11) Curved Connector Starts (19) Curved Connector Starts
(3) Curved Connector Ends with with Arrow with Circle
Arrow (12) Line Connector Starts Arrow (20) Line Connector Starts with
(4) Line Connector Ends with (13) Connector Ends with Circle Circle
Arrow (14) Straight Connector Ends (21) Connector with Circles
(5) Connector with Circle (22) Straight Connector with
(6) Straight Connector (15) Curved Connector Ends with Circle
(7) Curved Connector Circle (23) Curved Connector with
(8) Line Connector (16) Line Connector Ends with Circle
(9) Connector Starts with Arrow Circle (24) Line Connector with Circle
(17) Connector Starts with Circle

Curves and Polygons

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar (Figure 367), then select a curve or polygon to add to a
drawing.

Figure 367: Curves and Polygons subtoolbar

Appendix B, Toolbars | 375

(1) Curve, Filled (4) Freeform Line, Filled (7) Polygon (45°)
(2) Polygon, Filled (5) Curve (8) Freeform Line
(3) Polygon (45°), Filled (6) Polygon

Distribute Selection
Distributing objects allows three or more objects to be evenly spaced along a horizontal or
vertical axis. Objects are distributed using the outermost objects as base points for spacing.
Select at least three objects, then use one of the following methods to distribute the objects:
• Right-click on the selected objects, then select Distribute Selection from the context
menu and one of the available options.
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Distribute Selection to open the
Distribute Selection subtoolbar (Figure 368).
• Go to Shape > Distribute Selection on the Menu bar and select a distribution option.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Distribute Selection from the context
menu, then select a distribution option.

Figure 368: Distribute Selection subtoolbar

The Distribute subtoolbar is also available as a toolbar. Go to View > Toolbars > Distribute
Selecttion on the Main menu bar. The distribution options available are as follow:
Horizontal Left
Distributes the selected objects so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Horizontal Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Horizontal Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally so that the objects are evenly spaced from
one another.
Horizontal Right
Distributes the selected objects so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertical Top
Distributes the selected objects so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced
from one another.
Vertical Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Vertical Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically so that the objects are evenly spaced from one
another.

376 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Vertical Bottom
Distributes the selected objects so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.

Flowchart
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar to open the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 369), then select a flowchart shape to add to a drawing.

Figure 369: Flowchart subtoolbar

(1) Flowchart: Process (11) Flowchart: Manual Input (21) Flowchart: Extract
(2) Flowchart: Alternate (12) Flowchart: Manual Operation (22) Flowchart: Merge
Process (13) Flowchart: Connector (23) Flowchart: Stored Data
(3) Flowchart: Decision (14) Flowchart: Off-page (24) Flowchart: Delay
(4) Flowchart: Data Connector (25) Flowchart: Sequential
(5) Flowchart: Predefined (15) Flowchart: Card Access
Process (16) Flowchart: Punched Tape (26) Flowchart: Magnetic Disc
(6) Flowchart: Internal Storage (17) Flowchart: Summing (27) Flowchart: Direct Access
(7) Flowchart: Document Junction Storage
(8) Flowchart: Multidocument (18) Flowchart: Or (28) Flowchart: Display
(9) Flowchart: Terminator (19) Flowchart: Collate
(10) Flowchart: Preparation (20) Flowchart: Sort

Figure 370: Fontwork Shape subtoolbar

(1) Plain Text (11) Fade Up (21) Arch Left (Curve)
(2) Wave (12) Fade Down (22) Arch Right (Curve)
(3) Inflate (13) Slant Up (23) Circle (Curve)
(4) Stop (14) Slant Down (24) Open Circle (Curve)
(5) Curve Up (15) Fade Up and Right (25) Arch Up (Pour)
(6) Curve Down (16) Fade Up and Left (26) Arch Down (Pour)
(7) Triangle Up (17) Chevron Up (27) Arch Left (Pour)
(8) Triangle Down (18) Chevron Down (28) Arch Right (Pour)
(9) Fade Right (19) Arch Up (Curve) (29) Circle (Pour)
(10) Fade Left (20) Arch Down (Curve) (30) Open Circle (Pour)

Appendix B, Toolbars | 377

Fontwork Shape
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Fontwork Shape on the Fontwork toolbar opens the
Fontwork Shape subtoolbar (Figure 370). Select the required shape to change how a Fontwork
text shape appears in a drawing.

Image Filter
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Filter on the Image toolbar opens the Image Filter
sub-toolbar (Figure 371). Select the required filter to change how an image appears on the
display.

Figure 371: Image Filter subtoolbar

The filters available on the Image Filter subtoolbar are as follows:
Invert
Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a greyscale image.
Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
Smooth
Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
Sharpen
Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter.
Solarization
Opens a dialogue box for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks
like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors
become partly inverted.
Aging
All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are
reduced by the amount specified. The red color channel is not changed.
Posterize
Opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on
the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
Pop Art
Converts an image to a pop-art format.
Charcoal Sketch
Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black,
and the original colors are suppressed.
Relief
Displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs. Selecting the position of the imaginary light
source determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in
relief.

378 |Draw Guide 24.8

 Mosaic
Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the
individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.

Lines and Arrows

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 372), then select a line or arrow to add to a drawing.

Figure 372: Lines and Arrows subtoolbar

(1) Line Ends with Arrow (5) Line Starts with Arrow (9) Dimension Line
(2) Line with Circle/Arrow (6) Line with Arrow/Circle (10) Line (45°)
(3) Line with Square/Arrow (7) Line with Arrow/Square
(4) Line with Arrows (8) Insert Line

Position
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Arrange on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Position
subtoolbar (Figure 373), then select the position of a selected object in a drawing.

Figure 373: Position subtoolbar

(1) Bring to Front (4) Send to Back (7) Reverse
(2) Bring Forward (5) In Front of Object
(3) Send Backward (6) Behind Object

Stars and Banners

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Stars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 374), then select a star or arrow to add to a drawing.

Figure 374: Stars and Banners subtoolbar

(1) 4-Point Star (5) 12-Point Star (9) Horizontal Scroll
(2) 5-Point Star (6) 24-Point Star (10) Signet
(3) 6-Point Star (7) Explosion (11) Doorplate
(4) 8-Point Star (8) Vertical Scroll (12) 6-Point Star, Concave

Symbol Shapes
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 375), then select a symbol shape to add to a drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 379

 Figure 375: Symbol Shapes subtoolbar
(1) Smiley Face (7) Flower (13) Double Bracket
(2) Heart (8) Prohibited (14) Left Bracket
(3) Sun (9) Puzzle (15) Right Bracket
(4) Moon (10) Square Bevel (16) Double Brace
(5) Cloud (11) Octagon Bevel (17) Left Brace
(6) Lightning Bolt (12) Diamond Bevel (18) Right Brace

380 |Draw Guide 24.8

Draw Guide
Working With Vector Graphics
About this book:
This book covers the main features of Draw, the vector graphics component of LibreOffice.
Using Draw, a wide variety of graphical images can be created.
Vector graphics store and display a picture as simple geometric elements such as lines, circles,
and polygons rather than as a collection of pixels (points on the screen). This permits simpler
storage and supports precise scaling of the picture elements.
Draw is fully integrated into LibreOffice. This simplifies exchanging graphics with Writer, Calc,
and Impress. Images can be exported in many formats for use in other programs.

About the authors:

This book was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from the sales of
the printed edition are used to benefit the community.
A PDF version of this book can be downloaded free from:
[Link]

About LibreOffice:
LibreOffice is the free, libre, and open source personal productivity suite from The
Documentation Foundation. It runs on Windows, macOS, and GNU/Linux. Support and
documentation is free from a large, dedicated community of users, contributors, and developers.
Get involved as a volunteer and work in many areas: development, quality assurance,
documentation, translation, user support, and more.
Download LibreOffice for free from:
[Link]

For commercial use:

Work with certified LibreOffice professionals for any business needs, from deployment or
conversion from other office suits, staff training, or custom development needs.
For information on professional support services, go to
[Link]

Appendix B, Toolbars | 381